Allowed Publications
Slot System
Featured Buckets
Featured Buckets Admin

Self-mutilation: Impulsive traits, high pain threshold suggest new drug therapies

Article Type
Changed
Tue, 12/11/2018 - 15:12
Display Headline
Self-mutilation: Impulsive traits, high pain threshold suggest new drug therapies

Self-mutilation has the power to confuse, frustrate, and frighten patients and their families. Psychiatrists, too, are not immune to the intense emotional responses that pathologic self-mutilation can provoke.

One definition of self-mutilation is any self-directed, repetitive behavior that causes physical injury.1 Examples vary widely and include skin cutting, burning, or picking as well as head banging and extreme injuries such as auto enucleation. Most acts of self-mutilation are not suicide attempts but behaviors meant to express or release emotional turmoil.

As difficult as self-mutilation may be to understand, managing this condition may be even more complex. A multidisciplinary approach may be required, but evidence for the effectiveness of psycho- and pharmacotherapies is limited. This article reviews some theories of pathologic self-mutilation and describes emerging clinical strategies to treat it.

Four types of self-mutilation

DSM-IV does not recognize self-mutilation as a separate disorder but sees it as a symptom of other psychiatric conditions.2,3 It is briefly mentioned as one criterion for diagnosing borderline personality disorder (“recurrent suicidal behaviors, gestures or threats or self-mutilating behaviors”), and it also appears in the catch-all diagnosis of impulse control disorders, not otherwise specified (NOS). Other self-injurious behaviors such as substance use disorders, trichotillomania, and, in some respects, pathologic gambling have found their way into DSM-IV as addiction or impulse control disorders. Self-mutilation appears to fall between these diagnostic categories, as it contains elements of many psychiatric disorders, such as:

  • loss of behavioral control
  • repetitive actions despite negative consequences
  • and clear dysregulation of thought and emotions.4

Self-mutilation presents in a variety of forms and encompasses many behaviors, from the socially acceptable to the bizarre and grotesque (Table 1). Favazza and Rosenthal described three main forms of pathologic self-mutilation.2,5 A fourth form (such as ear piercing) is socially accepted and not considered pathologic.

Table 1

FOUR TYPES OF SELF-MUTILATION

TypeExampleCommon causes
SevereEye enucleation, castration, amputationPsychotic states, intoxicated states (especially with use of amphetamines)
StereotypedHead banging, bitingMental retardation, Lesch-Nyhan syndrome, Tourette’s syndrome
Superficial or moderateSkin cutting, burning, pickingPersonality disorders secondary to axis I disorders, impulse control disorder
Socially acceptedEar piercing, tattoosAccepted cultural practices
Source: Adapted and reprinted with permission from Favazza AR, Rosenthal RJ. Diagnostic issues in self-mutilation. Hosp Community Psychiatry 1993;44(2):134-40.

  • Severe self-mutilation manifests as extensive (and often irreversible) body damage. Examples include eye enucleation, castration, or amputation. Intense psychotic states and intoxication from illicit substances—usually amphetamines—are the main causes of this relatively rare type, which fortunately is not frequently repeated.
  • Stereotyped self-mutilation is self-directed physical injury (head banging, biting oneself) seen in mental retardation and developmental disorders. This type has a stereotyped and repetitive rhythm and presents in the clear context of a neurobiological insult.
  • Superficial or moderate self-mutilation—seen most commonly in general psychiatric practice—includes skin cutting, burning, or picking by nonpsychotic, nonmentally retarded patients. The behavior tends to be repetitive. Patients with this type usually present with comorbid conditions, particularly personality disorders.
  • Socially accepted self-mutilation includes ear piercing, tattoos, or culturally based behaviors, such as lip piercing or ear stretching seen in some African cultures.

An impulse control disorder?

Over the last 15 years, increasing evidence has suggested that pathologic self-mutilation may be an impulse control disorder.6 Many clinical case reports demonstrate that self-mutilation shares two characteristics of impulse control disorders that involve such behaviors as gambling, sex, or stealing:

  • failure to resist impulses/urges to participate in a particular behavior
  • increasing tension or physical arousal before the act and release of pleasure or gratification after the act.

In the case report, “Pain from cutting makes me feel alive” (box), the patient describes being unable to resist thoughts of cutting herself or to stop the behavior, despite knowing that she should. Self-mutilators also have been shown to have biological measures of impulsivity—namely decreased serotonin levels—similar to those seen with other impulse control disorders.7,8 Finally, evidence is emerging that acts of self-mutilation are socially triggered expressions of impulsive psychological traits.5-7

Risk factors

Accurate estimates of self-mutilation’s incidence and prevalence are lacking, mainly because the behavior is difficult to define. In the U.S. population, Favazza estimated the prevalence as 0.75% and the incidence between 14 and 600 per 100,000 persons annually.5 Known risk factors are:

  • female gender
  • adolescence and college age
  • substance abuse and/or personality disorders
  • history of self-mutilation3,9,10 (Table 2).

Comorbidities such as depression, bipolar disorder, substance abuse, and schizophrenia are common. Axis II phenomena are common, especially the cluster B traits of histrionic, narcissistic, and borderline personalities.

Finally, little is known about the course of self-mutilation, but it tends to begin in adolescence and follows an episodic, recurrent pattern.11 Reports are scant of self-mutilation in the elderly, although clinical experience tells us that it does occur in this age group.

 

 

Causes

Several theories addressing the causes of self-mutilation have been championed. A few, with particular attention to impulse-control dysfunction, are described here.

Biological contributions. Support for a biological mechanism is beginning to emerge. Dysregulation in neurotransmission or neurobiological function may predispose a person to self-mutilate through the expression of impulsive traits such as motor disinhibition and a tendency to physical aggression.6 Decreased serotonergic functioning or a central deficit in serotonergic functioning—as measured by platelet imipramine binding levels and serotonin metabolites in the CSF—are seen in self-mutilators and persons with other impulsive behaviors, such as completed suicide, physical aggression, and pathologic gambling.11,12

Box

CASE REPORT ‘PAIN FROM CUTTING MAKES ME FEEL ALIVE’

Mrs. K, age 39, is being treated for depression. She reports an onset of cutting behavior in college after she broke up with a boyfriend. She recalls being so agitated at the time that she instinctively grabbed a knife and began scraping her forearm. Since then, she has been cutting about three to four times a year and always in the context of an overwhelming stressful situation. So far, no serious medical consequences have resulted; she usually draws blood, then cleans and bandages the wound.

She is facing a divorce and is in a tumultuous battle with her estranged husband over custody of their children. As a result, her cutting behavior has increased in frequency to once or twice a week. These behaviors bother her, but she also reports that cutting allows her to “feel pain that makes me feel alive.” She denies suicidal intent. She wishes she could use another way to deal with emotional pain but finds herself yielding to cutting behaviors. Mrs. K has tried alcohol on some occasions and thought about using illicit drugs but did not know how to get them.

One of the reasons she sought treatment was to reduce her cutting behaviors. She feels that she can’t control her behavior and wants to understand why she repetitively chooses to engage in it.

Self-mutilators also respond abnormally to infusions of the adrenergic agent fenfluramine—they show decreased release of prolactin, which signals reduced serotonergic function.11,12 Reports of a blunted serotonergic response in patients who attempt suicide and in those who complete a self-mutilation act strengthen this theory of a biological contribution.12

Finally, in examining the relationship of impulsivity and serotonergic function, Herpertz found a link between trait impulsivity—as measured by a deficit in problem-solving ability and affective hyperreactivity—and low serotonergic function.6 What remains unclear, however, is cause and effect: do impulsivity traits cause serotonergic dysfunction, or do serotonin function deficits manifest as impulsivity?

Table 2

PROFILE OF PATHOLOGIC SELF-MUTILATORS

  • See themselves as isolated and disconnected from the world
  • History of physical or sexual abuse
  • May come from chaotic family environments
  • Comorbid axis I or II disorders, especially depression, borderline personality disorder, and substance abuse
  • Low self-esteem; inability to cope with negative emotions, life situations
  • Usually female
  • Hopelessness
  • Impulsivity
  • Usually ages 16 to 30
  • Self-mutilation behavior waxes and wanes

In one fascinating study, self-mutilators whose primary diagnosis was borderline personality disorder tolerated more physical pain than did healthy controls.7 When they were tested during a distressed state of mind, self-mutilators’ pain thresholds were even more elevated. This finding suggests alterations in the opiate systems and stress-response pathways.

Further work—including genetic studies and functional neuroimaging—is needed to better understand the neurobiological locus of pathologic self-mutilation.

Psychological contributions. Self-mutilation may represent a compromise between choosing life or death. Some analysts have viewed self-mutilation as a coping mechanism to avoid suicide.1,13 In other words, self-mutilation is the expression of psychic pain turned outward but without the intent to end life. Self-mutilation may then be viewed as a way to concretely demonstrate negative affective states to the self and to the world. It also may serve as a tool to regulate and cope with these negative affective states.

Unfortunately, this coping behavior can become irresistible and psychologically tempting. One self-mutilator writes, “It’s like a relief; I do it [cutting on her wrists] every couple of weeks, just to get relief…from pressure that builds up inside…you feel like you’re going to explode if you don’t cut.”1 The described rise in tension is reminiscent of other impulse control disorders.

Hyperreactivity of decision-making also is correlated with self-mutilation, as it is with impulse-control disorders. Impulsive people tend to respond very quickly to environmental stimuli, rather than suppressing physical and emotional responses.6 One behavioral definition of impulsivity is the tendency to choose smaller, more immediate rewards instead of larger, delayed rewards. In the case report presented earlier, Mrs. K chose to cut her wrists instead of waiting for the negative affective state to pass. Waiting—which would have taken more time—would have offered the obvious benefit of avoiding physical harm.

 

 

Social contributions. The act of self-mutilation typically grabs the attention of a therapist, friends, or spouses. Operant conditioning—where the positive rewards of help, empathy, and attention follow self-mutilation—may reinforce and perpetuate the behavior.1 Other social contributions may include:

  • dysfunctional family systems
  • lack of social support
  • poor communication skills
  • role expectations, such as school/work performance, sexuality, or career obligations.13

When social pressures demand immediate decisions, impulsive self-mutilators may feel an urgency to act instead of using other coping mechanisms. Leibenluft et al published what may be the only empiric study that addresses this “inner experience” of the self-mutilator with borderline personality disorder.14 In our case example, the pressures of an imminent divorce trial triggered Mrs. K’s most recent cutting behavior. She did not have a strong support system and—in her desperation to control something—she resorted to cutting.

Pharmacologic treatment

Just as the cause of self-mutilation is multidimensional, so is its treatment. Research has focused on medications, individual therapy, and social therapy. Not surprisingly, these approaches resemble the treatment of other impulse control disorders.

Most of the evidence for drug treatment of self-mutilation comes from case reports and small openlabel studies. A variety of medication classes have been tried.

Antidepressants. In theory, if reduced serotonin neurotransmission helps drive pathologic self-mutilation, then using selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs) to increase serotonin availability may reduce impulsivity. For example, Velazquez described the case of an 11-year-old boy whose finger-chewing behavior diminished with fluoxetine therapy.15

Most of the SSRI studies have examined self-mutilation in the context of treating personality disorders, especially borderline personality disorder. SSRIs have been shown to modestly reduce anger and negative affective states, but the studies do not refer specifically to their effect on the frequency of self-mutilation. Given the present evidence, SSRIs appear to be an appropriate first-line treatment for self-mutilation because of their:

  • overall safety profile
  • effectiveness in treating mood lability and reactivity
  • documented deficits in serotonergic neurotransmission.

Still, little empiric data exists regarding their use in treating self-mutilation, and prescribers should watch for possible side effects. No SSRI appears to be best suited to treat this disorder. Base initial selection on prior medication trials and on whether a drug’s side effects could work in the patient’s favor. For example, paroxetine’s more sedating properties may benefit a patient with difficulty sleeping, whereas sertraline’s more activating properties may help the lethargic patient with psychomotor retardation.

Atypical antipsychotics are often used in patients with borderline personality disorders or mental retardation to reduce impulsive physical aggression and mood lability. Their wide range of pharmacologic effects—including serotonin and dopamine blockade—suggests why they may have thymoleptic properties related to mood, anxiety, impulsiveness, and overall behavioral control. Small trials have demonstrated that olanzapine and clozapine may help control self-mutilation,16,17 but controlled trials are lacking.

Mood stabilizers. Case reports have described use of lithium, divalproex, and topiramate to reduce the frequency of self-mutilation, but—as with antipsychotics—controlled studies are lacking.18 Mood stabilizers are appropriate in self-mutilators with co-existing bipolar disorder and possibly in those whose self-mutilation has cycling or circadian properties.

Anxiolytics. The sedative effects of benzodiazepines such as lorazepam or clonazepam may help control agitation and attempts to self-mutilate in emergent inpatient settings. This drug class carries a high abuse potential and may cause behavioral disinhibition, especially with mentally retarded patients. These properties limit benzodiazepines’ usefulness in outpatient treatment of self-mutilation.

Box 2

FIVE PRINCIPLES OF DRUG MANAGEMENT OF SELF-MUTILATION

  • Use medications to lay the groundwork for psychosocial interventions. When mood and thought are stabilized, patients can think more clearly and be more receptive to therapy.
  • Consider SSRIs as a first-line approach, followed by atypical antipsychotics, mood stabilizers, and typical antipsychotics. Target doses may vary; some patients respond to lower antipsychotic doses than are used for psychotic disorders.
  • Choose medications to target co-existing symptoms, such as insomnia, heightened arousal states, and behavioral agitation.
  • Discuss the limitations of medications with patients and families, so that their expectations are realistic and do not impede recovery.
  • Monitor prescriptions closely; self-injuring patients are impulsive and at risk for unintentional (or intentional) overdose.

Opiate antagonists. Naltrexone and nalmefene have been shown to be effective in other impulse control disorders, such as pathologic gambling and kleptomania.19,20 In self-mutilation, the use of opiate antagonists has been limited to case reports in patients with autism or mental retardation.

Although unproven, it may be that self-injurious behaviors are reinforced by a release of endogenous opioids. In theory, then, blocking opiate release would reduce the behaviors, as patients would then respond more normally to pain. The behavior would extinguish without the reward.19,20

Opiate antagonists, which purportedly reduce urges and cravings to drink or to gamble, may also block urges and cravings to self-mutilate. Problems with using these agents include the need for periodic liver function tests and side effects such as nausea and gastrointestinal disturbances.

 

 

Psychotherapeutic approaches

Psychodynamic psychotherapy is the most common form of individual therapy used in treating self-mutilation. Effective therapy enables patients to understand why they self-mutilate and teaches them more healthy ways to deal with negative internal states.2,3

Individual therapy is the mainstay of self-mutilation treatment, although no known studies have confirmed that psychodynamic psychotherapy reduces acts of self-mutilation. Because self-mutilators tend to have poor boundaries, supervision and peer collaboration are highly recommended to maintain an effective therapeutic relationship.1

Yet to be answered is whether healthier coping strategies alter measures of impulsivity. Patients who have improved report they are better able to cope with negative affective states and to verbalize their feelings.

Dialectical behavior therapy (DBT) is another psychotherapeutic option. Used in treating personality disorders, DBT combines cognitive, behavioral, and supportive interventions. In one study, DBT reduced the frequency of self-mutilation to 1.5 acts per year, compared with 9 acts per year in a treatment-as-usual control group.21

Need for ‘emergency plans’

Relaxation training, exposure therapy, and response prevention have been suggested as treatments for pathologic self-mutilation, but there is no convincing evidence to support their efficacy.1 Contracts against self-mutilation do not appear to be effective. Instead, “emergency plans” may be needed to deal with urges to self-mutilate.

Crisis intervention strategies that may help the self-mutilator include:

  • partial hospitalizations to focus on increasing coping skills and strengthening a patient’s sense of self-reliance and individual responsibility
  • increased frequency of visits
  • educating the patient to use medications such as atypical neuroleptics or benzodiazepines as needed (“in case of emergency, take this medication instead of cutting”).

Crisis interventions should focus on understanding and changing pathologic behaviors. Self-mutilation behavior may be reinforced if attention is given without enough emphasis on developing coping skills.

Group therapy may be another treatment option. Group support helps patients with pathologic gambling, addictive, or other impulse control disorders to prevent relapse and learn to deal with urges and impulses.

Related resources

  • Self-injury Web site offering information about self-harming behavior plus coping skills, alternatives to self-injury, support groups. www.selfabuse.com
  • Levenkron S. Cutting: understanding and overcoming self-mutilation. New York: WW Norton and Company Ltd, 1998.
  • SAFE (Self-Abuse Finally Ends), www.selfinjury.com. Resources for patients, families, and therapists. Recording at 1-800-DON’T-CUT (800-366-8288) offers to mail information on self-injury and the SAFE Alternatives program.

Drug brand names

  • Clonazepam • Klonopin
  • Clozapine • Clozaril
  • Fluoxetine • Prozac
  • Lorazepam • Ativan
  • Naltrexone • ReVia
  • Nalmefene • Revex
  • Olanzapine • Zyprexa
  • Paroxetine • Paxil
  • Sertraline • Zoloft
  • Topiramate • Topamax

Disclosure

Dr. Fong reports no financial relationship with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

References

1. Suyemoto KL. The functions of self-mutilation. Clin Psychology Rev 1998;18:531-54.

2. Favazza AR, Rosenthal RJ. Diagnostic issues in self-mutilation. Hosp Community Psychiatry 1993;44(2):134-40.

3. Favazza AR, Rosenthal RJ. Varieties of pathological self-mutilation. Behav Neurol. 1990;77-85.

4. Levenkron S. Cutting: Understanding and overcoming self-mutilation. New York: WW Norton and Company Ltd., 1998.

5. Favazza AR. The coming of age of self-mutilation. J Nerv Ment Dis 1998;259-68.

6. Herpertz S, Sass H, Favazza AR. Impulsivity in self-mutilative behavior psychometric and biological findings. J Psychiatric Res 1997;31:451-65.

7. Bohus M, Limberger M, Ebner U, et al. Pain perception during self-reported distress and calmness in patients with borderline personality disorder and self-mutilating behavior. Psychiatric Research 2000;95:251-60.

8. Herpertz S, Steinmeyer SM, Marx D, Oidtmann A, Sass H. The significance of aggression and impulsivity for self-mutilative behavior. Pharmacopsychiatry. 1995;28(suppl):64-72.

9. Nijman HL, Dautzenberg HL, Merckelbach HL, Jung P, Wessel I, Campo J. Self-mutilating behaviour of psychiatric inpatients. Eur Psychiatry 1999;14:4-10.

10. Zlotnick C, Shea MT, Recupero P, Bidadi K, Pearlstein T, Brown P. Trauma, dissociation, impulsivity and self-mutilation among substance abuse patients. Am J Orthopsychiatry 1997;67:650-3.

11. Simeon D, Stanley B, Frances A, Mann JJ, Winchel R, Stanley M. Self-mutilation in personality disorders: psychological and biological correlates. Am J Psychiatry. 1992;149:221-6.

12. New A, Trestman R, Mitropoulou V, Benishay DS, Coccaro E, et al. Serotonergic function and self-injurious behavior in personality disorder patients. Psychiatry Res. 1997;69:17-26.

13. Webb L. Deliberate self-harm in adolescence; a systematic review of psychological and psychosocial factors. J Adv Nursing 2002;38:235-44.

14. Leibenluft E, Gardner DL, Cowdry RW. The inner experience of the borderline self-mutilator. J Personality Disord 1987;1(4):317-24.

15. Velazquez L, Ward-Chene L, Loogsian SR. Fluoxetine in the treatment of self-mutilating behavior. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 2000;39:812-14.

16. Garnis-Jones S, Collins S, Rosenthal D. Treatment of self-mutilation with olanzapine. J Cutan Med Surg 2000;4(3):161-3.

17. Chengappa KN, Ebeling T, Kang JS, Levine J, Parepally H. Clozapine reduces severe self-mutilation and aggression in psychotic patients with borderline personality disorder. J Clin Psychiatry 1999;60:477-84.

18. Cassano P, Lattanzi L, Pini S, Dell’Osso L, Battisini G, Cassano GB. Topiramate for self-mutilation in a patient with borderline personality disorder. Bipolar Disord. 2001;3:161.-

19. Benjamin S, Seek A, Tresise L, Price E, Maureen G. Paradoxical response to naltrexone treatment of self-injurious behavior. J Am Acad Child Adoles Psychiatry. 1995;34:238-42.

20. Szymanski L, Kedesdy J, Sulkes S, Cutler A, Stevens OP. Naltrexone in the treatment of self-injurious behavior; a clinical study. Res Dev Disabil. 1987;8:179-90.

21. Linehan MM, Armstrong HE, Suarez A, Allmon D, Heard HL. Cognitive-behavioral treatment of chronically parasuicidal borderline patients. Arch Gen Psychiatry. 1993;50:157-8.

Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

Timothy Fong, MD
UCLA Addictions Research Fellow Director, Impulse Control Disorders Clinic UCLA Neuropsychiatric Institute, Los Angeles, CA.

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(02)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
15-23
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

Timothy Fong, MD
UCLA Addictions Research Fellow Director, Impulse Control Disorders Clinic UCLA Neuropsychiatric Institute, Los Angeles, CA.

Author and Disclosure Information

Timothy Fong, MD
UCLA Addictions Research Fellow Director, Impulse Control Disorders Clinic UCLA Neuropsychiatric Institute, Los Angeles, CA.

Article PDF
Article PDF

Self-mutilation has the power to confuse, frustrate, and frighten patients and their families. Psychiatrists, too, are not immune to the intense emotional responses that pathologic self-mutilation can provoke.

One definition of self-mutilation is any self-directed, repetitive behavior that causes physical injury.1 Examples vary widely and include skin cutting, burning, or picking as well as head banging and extreme injuries such as auto enucleation. Most acts of self-mutilation are not suicide attempts but behaviors meant to express or release emotional turmoil.

As difficult as self-mutilation may be to understand, managing this condition may be even more complex. A multidisciplinary approach may be required, but evidence for the effectiveness of psycho- and pharmacotherapies is limited. This article reviews some theories of pathologic self-mutilation and describes emerging clinical strategies to treat it.

Four types of self-mutilation

DSM-IV does not recognize self-mutilation as a separate disorder but sees it as a symptom of other psychiatric conditions.2,3 It is briefly mentioned as one criterion for diagnosing borderline personality disorder (“recurrent suicidal behaviors, gestures or threats or self-mutilating behaviors”), and it also appears in the catch-all diagnosis of impulse control disorders, not otherwise specified (NOS). Other self-injurious behaviors such as substance use disorders, trichotillomania, and, in some respects, pathologic gambling have found their way into DSM-IV as addiction or impulse control disorders. Self-mutilation appears to fall between these diagnostic categories, as it contains elements of many psychiatric disorders, such as:

  • loss of behavioral control
  • repetitive actions despite negative consequences
  • and clear dysregulation of thought and emotions.4

Self-mutilation presents in a variety of forms and encompasses many behaviors, from the socially acceptable to the bizarre and grotesque (Table 1). Favazza and Rosenthal described three main forms of pathologic self-mutilation.2,5 A fourth form (such as ear piercing) is socially accepted and not considered pathologic.

Table 1

FOUR TYPES OF SELF-MUTILATION

TypeExampleCommon causes
SevereEye enucleation, castration, amputationPsychotic states, intoxicated states (especially with use of amphetamines)
StereotypedHead banging, bitingMental retardation, Lesch-Nyhan syndrome, Tourette’s syndrome
Superficial or moderateSkin cutting, burning, pickingPersonality disorders secondary to axis I disorders, impulse control disorder
Socially acceptedEar piercing, tattoosAccepted cultural practices
Source: Adapted and reprinted with permission from Favazza AR, Rosenthal RJ. Diagnostic issues in self-mutilation. Hosp Community Psychiatry 1993;44(2):134-40.

  • Severe self-mutilation manifests as extensive (and often irreversible) body damage. Examples include eye enucleation, castration, or amputation. Intense psychotic states and intoxication from illicit substances—usually amphetamines—are the main causes of this relatively rare type, which fortunately is not frequently repeated.
  • Stereotyped self-mutilation is self-directed physical injury (head banging, biting oneself) seen in mental retardation and developmental disorders. This type has a stereotyped and repetitive rhythm and presents in the clear context of a neurobiological insult.
  • Superficial or moderate self-mutilation—seen most commonly in general psychiatric practice—includes skin cutting, burning, or picking by nonpsychotic, nonmentally retarded patients. The behavior tends to be repetitive. Patients with this type usually present with comorbid conditions, particularly personality disorders.
  • Socially accepted self-mutilation includes ear piercing, tattoos, or culturally based behaviors, such as lip piercing or ear stretching seen in some African cultures.

An impulse control disorder?

Over the last 15 years, increasing evidence has suggested that pathologic self-mutilation may be an impulse control disorder.6 Many clinical case reports demonstrate that self-mutilation shares two characteristics of impulse control disorders that involve such behaviors as gambling, sex, or stealing:

  • failure to resist impulses/urges to participate in a particular behavior
  • increasing tension or physical arousal before the act and release of pleasure or gratification after the act.

In the case report, “Pain from cutting makes me feel alive” (box), the patient describes being unable to resist thoughts of cutting herself or to stop the behavior, despite knowing that she should. Self-mutilators also have been shown to have biological measures of impulsivity—namely decreased serotonin levels—similar to those seen with other impulse control disorders.7,8 Finally, evidence is emerging that acts of self-mutilation are socially triggered expressions of impulsive psychological traits.5-7

Risk factors

Accurate estimates of self-mutilation’s incidence and prevalence are lacking, mainly because the behavior is difficult to define. In the U.S. population, Favazza estimated the prevalence as 0.75% and the incidence between 14 and 600 per 100,000 persons annually.5 Known risk factors are:

  • female gender
  • adolescence and college age
  • substance abuse and/or personality disorders
  • history of self-mutilation3,9,10 (Table 2).

Comorbidities such as depression, bipolar disorder, substance abuse, and schizophrenia are common. Axis II phenomena are common, especially the cluster B traits of histrionic, narcissistic, and borderline personalities.

Finally, little is known about the course of self-mutilation, but it tends to begin in adolescence and follows an episodic, recurrent pattern.11 Reports are scant of self-mutilation in the elderly, although clinical experience tells us that it does occur in this age group.

 

 

Causes

Several theories addressing the causes of self-mutilation have been championed. A few, with particular attention to impulse-control dysfunction, are described here.

Biological contributions. Support for a biological mechanism is beginning to emerge. Dysregulation in neurotransmission or neurobiological function may predispose a person to self-mutilate through the expression of impulsive traits such as motor disinhibition and a tendency to physical aggression.6 Decreased serotonergic functioning or a central deficit in serotonergic functioning—as measured by platelet imipramine binding levels and serotonin metabolites in the CSF—are seen in self-mutilators and persons with other impulsive behaviors, such as completed suicide, physical aggression, and pathologic gambling.11,12

Box

CASE REPORT ‘PAIN FROM CUTTING MAKES ME FEEL ALIVE’

Mrs. K, age 39, is being treated for depression. She reports an onset of cutting behavior in college after she broke up with a boyfriend. She recalls being so agitated at the time that she instinctively grabbed a knife and began scraping her forearm. Since then, she has been cutting about three to four times a year and always in the context of an overwhelming stressful situation. So far, no serious medical consequences have resulted; she usually draws blood, then cleans and bandages the wound.

She is facing a divorce and is in a tumultuous battle with her estranged husband over custody of their children. As a result, her cutting behavior has increased in frequency to once or twice a week. These behaviors bother her, but she also reports that cutting allows her to “feel pain that makes me feel alive.” She denies suicidal intent. She wishes she could use another way to deal with emotional pain but finds herself yielding to cutting behaviors. Mrs. K has tried alcohol on some occasions and thought about using illicit drugs but did not know how to get them.

One of the reasons she sought treatment was to reduce her cutting behaviors. She feels that she can’t control her behavior and wants to understand why she repetitively chooses to engage in it.

Self-mutilators also respond abnormally to infusions of the adrenergic agent fenfluramine—they show decreased release of prolactin, which signals reduced serotonergic function.11,12 Reports of a blunted serotonergic response in patients who attempt suicide and in those who complete a self-mutilation act strengthen this theory of a biological contribution.12

Finally, in examining the relationship of impulsivity and serotonergic function, Herpertz found a link between trait impulsivity—as measured by a deficit in problem-solving ability and affective hyperreactivity—and low serotonergic function.6 What remains unclear, however, is cause and effect: do impulsivity traits cause serotonergic dysfunction, or do serotonin function deficits manifest as impulsivity?

Table 2

PROFILE OF PATHOLOGIC SELF-MUTILATORS

  • See themselves as isolated and disconnected from the world
  • History of physical or sexual abuse
  • May come from chaotic family environments
  • Comorbid axis I or II disorders, especially depression, borderline personality disorder, and substance abuse
  • Low self-esteem; inability to cope with negative emotions, life situations
  • Usually female
  • Hopelessness
  • Impulsivity
  • Usually ages 16 to 30
  • Self-mutilation behavior waxes and wanes

In one fascinating study, self-mutilators whose primary diagnosis was borderline personality disorder tolerated more physical pain than did healthy controls.7 When they were tested during a distressed state of mind, self-mutilators’ pain thresholds were even more elevated. This finding suggests alterations in the opiate systems and stress-response pathways.

Further work—including genetic studies and functional neuroimaging—is needed to better understand the neurobiological locus of pathologic self-mutilation.

Psychological contributions. Self-mutilation may represent a compromise between choosing life or death. Some analysts have viewed self-mutilation as a coping mechanism to avoid suicide.1,13 In other words, self-mutilation is the expression of psychic pain turned outward but without the intent to end life. Self-mutilation may then be viewed as a way to concretely demonstrate negative affective states to the self and to the world. It also may serve as a tool to regulate and cope with these negative affective states.

Unfortunately, this coping behavior can become irresistible and psychologically tempting. One self-mutilator writes, “It’s like a relief; I do it [cutting on her wrists] every couple of weeks, just to get relief…from pressure that builds up inside…you feel like you’re going to explode if you don’t cut.”1 The described rise in tension is reminiscent of other impulse control disorders.

Hyperreactivity of decision-making also is correlated with self-mutilation, as it is with impulse-control disorders. Impulsive people tend to respond very quickly to environmental stimuli, rather than suppressing physical and emotional responses.6 One behavioral definition of impulsivity is the tendency to choose smaller, more immediate rewards instead of larger, delayed rewards. In the case report presented earlier, Mrs. K chose to cut her wrists instead of waiting for the negative affective state to pass. Waiting—which would have taken more time—would have offered the obvious benefit of avoiding physical harm.

 

 

Social contributions. The act of self-mutilation typically grabs the attention of a therapist, friends, or spouses. Operant conditioning—where the positive rewards of help, empathy, and attention follow self-mutilation—may reinforce and perpetuate the behavior.1 Other social contributions may include:

  • dysfunctional family systems
  • lack of social support
  • poor communication skills
  • role expectations, such as school/work performance, sexuality, or career obligations.13

When social pressures demand immediate decisions, impulsive self-mutilators may feel an urgency to act instead of using other coping mechanisms. Leibenluft et al published what may be the only empiric study that addresses this “inner experience” of the self-mutilator with borderline personality disorder.14 In our case example, the pressures of an imminent divorce trial triggered Mrs. K’s most recent cutting behavior. She did not have a strong support system and—in her desperation to control something—she resorted to cutting.

Pharmacologic treatment

Just as the cause of self-mutilation is multidimensional, so is its treatment. Research has focused on medications, individual therapy, and social therapy. Not surprisingly, these approaches resemble the treatment of other impulse control disorders.

Most of the evidence for drug treatment of self-mutilation comes from case reports and small openlabel studies. A variety of medication classes have been tried.

Antidepressants. In theory, if reduced serotonin neurotransmission helps drive pathologic self-mutilation, then using selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs) to increase serotonin availability may reduce impulsivity. For example, Velazquez described the case of an 11-year-old boy whose finger-chewing behavior diminished with fluoxetine therapy.15

Most of the SSRI studies have examined self-mutilation in the context of treating personality disorders, especially borderline personality disorder. SSRIs have been shown to modestly reduce anger and negative affective states, but the studies do not refer specifically to their effect on the frequency of self-mutilation. Given the present evidence, SSRIs appear to be an appropriate first-line treatment for self-mutilation because of their:

  • overall safety profile
  • effectiveness in treating mood lability and reactivity
  • documented deficits in serotonergic neurotransmission.

Still, little empiric data exists regarding their use in treating self-mutilation, and prescribers should watch for possible side effects. No SSRI appears to be best suited to treat this disorder. Base initial selection on prior medication trials and on whether a drug’s side effects could work in the patient’s favor. For example, paroxetine’s more sedating properties may benefit a patient with difficulty sleeping, whereas sertraline’s more activating properties may help the lethargic patient with psychomotor retardation.

Atypical antipsychotics are often used in patients with borderline personality disorders or mental retardation to reduce impulsive physical aggression and mood lability. Their wide range of pharmacologic effects—including serotonin and dopamine blockade—suggests why they may have thymoleptic properties related to mood, anxiety, impulsiveness, and overall behavioral control. Small trials have demonstrated that olanzapine and clozapine may help control self-mutilation,16,17 but controlled trials are lacking.

Mood stabilizers. Case reports have described use of lithium, divalproex, and topiramate to reduce the frequency of self-mutilation, but—as with antipsychotics—controlled studies are lacking.18 Mood stabilizers are appropriate in self-mutilators with co-existing bipolar disorder and possibly in those whose self-mutilation has cycling or circadian properties.

Anxiolytics. The sedative effects of benzodiazepines such as lorazepam or clonazepam may help control agitation and attempts to self-mutilate in emergent inpatient settings. This drug class carries a high abuse potential and may cause behavioral disinhibition, especially with mentally retarded patients. These properties limit benzodiazepines’ usefulness in outpatient treatment of self-mutilation.

Box 2

FIVE PRINCIPLES OF DRUG MANAGEMENT OF SELF-MUTILATION

  • Use medications to lay the groundwork for psychosocial interventions. When mood and thought are stabilized, patients can think more clearly and be more receptive to therapy.
  • Consider SSRIs as a first-line approach, followed by atypical antipsychotics, mood stabilizers, and typical antipsychotics. Target doses may vary; some patients respond to lower antipsychotic doses than are used for psychotic disorders.
  • Choose medications to target co-existing symptoms, such as insomnia, heightened arousal states, and behavioral agitation.
  • Discuss the limitations of medications with patients and families, so that their expectations are realistic and do not impede recovery.
  • Monitor prescriptions closely; self-injuring patients are impulsive and at risk for unintentional (or intentional) overdose.

Opiate antagonists. Naltrexone and nalmefene have been shown to be effective in other impulse control disorders, such as pathologic gambling and kleptomania.19,20 In self-mutilation, the use of opiate antagonists has been limited to case reports in patients with autism or mental retardation.

Although unproven, it may be that self-injurious behaviors are reinforced by a release of endogenous opioids. In theory, then, blocking opiate release would reduce the behaviors, as patients would then respond more normally to pain. The behavior would extinguish without the reward.19,20

Opiate antagonists, which purportedly reduce urges and cravings to drink or to gamble, may also block urges and cravings to self-mutilate. Problems with using these agents include the need for periodic liver function tests and side effects such as nausea and gastrointestinal disturbances.

 

 

Psychotherapeutic approaches

Psychodynamic psychotherapy is the most common form of individual therapy used in treating self-mutilation. Effective therapy enables patients to understand why they self-mutilate and teaches them more healthy ways to deal with negative internal states.2,3

Individual therapy is the mainstay of self-mutilation treatment, although no known studies have confirmed that psychodynamic psychotherapy reduces acts of self-mutilation. Because self-mutilators tend to have poor boundaries, supervision and peer collaboration are highly recommended to maintain an effective therapeutic relationship.1

Yet to be answered is whether healthier coping strategies alter measures of impulsivity. Patients who have improved report they are better able to cope with negative affective states and to verbalize their feelings.

Dialectical behavior therapy (DBT) is another psychotherapeutic option. Used in treating personality disorders, DBT combines cognitive, behavioral, and supportive interventions. In one study, DBT reduced the frequency of self-mutilation to 1.5 acts per year, compared with 9 acts per year in a treatment-as-usual control group.21

Need for ‘emergency plans’

Relaxation training, exposure therapy, and response prevention have been suggested as treatments for pathologic self-mutilation, but there is no convincing evidence to support their efficacy.1 Contracts against self-mutilation do not appear to be effective. Instead, “emergency plans” may be needed to deal with urges to self-mutilate.

Crisis intervention strategies that may help the self-mutilator include:

  • partial hospitalizations to focus on increasing coping skills and strengthening a patient’s sense of self-reliance and individual responsibility
  • increased frequency of visits
  • educating the patient to use medications such as atypical neuroleptics or benzodiazepines as needed (“in case of emergency, take this medication instead of cutting”).

Crisis interventions should focus on understanding and changing pathologic behaviors. Self-mutilation behavior may be reinforced if attention is given without enough emphasis on developing coping skills.

Group therapy may be another treatment option. Group support helps patients with pathologic gambling, addictive, or other impulse control disorders to prevent relapse and learn to deal with urges and impulses.

Related resources

  • Self-injury Web site offering information about self-harming behavior plus coping skills, alternatives to self-injury, support groups. www.selfabuse.com
  • Levenkron S. Cutting: understanding and overcoming self-mutilation. New York: WW Norton and Company Ltd, 1998.
  • SAFE (Self-Abuse Finally Ends), www.selfinjury.com. Resources for patients, families, and therapists. Recording at 1-800-DON’T-CUT (800-366-8288) offers to mail information on self-injury and the SAFE Alternatives program.

Drug brand names

  • Clonazepam • Klonopin
  • Clozapine • Clozaril
  • Fluoxetine • Prozac
  • Lorazepam • Ativan
  • Naltrexone • ReVia
  • Nalmefene • Revex
  • Olanzapine • Zyprexa
  • Paroxetine • Paxil
  • Sertraline • Zoloft
  • Topiramate • Topamax

Disclosure

Dr. Fong reports no financial relationship with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

Self-mutilation has the power to confuse, frustrate, and frighten patients and their families. Psychiatrists, too, are not immune to the intense emotional responses that pathologic self-mutilation can provoke.

One definition of self-mutilation is any self-directed, repetitive behavior that causes physical injury.1 Examples vary widely and include skin cutting, burning, or picking as well as head banging and extreme injuries such as auto enucleation. Most acts of self-mutilation are not suicide attempts but behaviors meant to express or release emotional turmoil.

As difficult as self-mutilation may be to understand, managing this condition may be even more complex. A multidisciplinary approach may be required, but evidence for the effectiveness of psycho- and pharmacotherapies is limited. This article reviews some theories of pathologic self-mutilation and describes emerging clinical strategies to treat it.

Four types of self-mutilation

DSM-IV does not recognize self-mutilation as a separate disorder but sees it as a symptom of other psychiatric conditions.2,3 It is briefly mentioned as one criterion for diagnosing borderline personality disorder (“recurrent suicidal behaviors, gestures or threats or self-mutilating behaviors”), and it also appears in the catch-all diagnosis of impulse control disorders, not otherwise specified (NOS). Other self-injurious behaviors such as substance use disorders, trichotillomania, and, in some respects, pathologic gambling have found their way into DSM-IV as addiction or impulse control disorders. Self-mutilation appears to fall between these diagnostic categories, as it contains elements of many psychiatric disorders, such as:

  • loss of behavioral control
  • repetitive actions despite negative consequences
  • and clear dysregulation of thought and emotions.4

Self-mutilation presents in a variety of forms and encompasses many behaviors, from the socially acceptable to the bizarre and grotesque (Table 1). Favazza and Rosenthal described three main forms of pathologic self-mutilation.2,5 A fourth form (such as ear piercing) is socially accepted and not considered pathologic.

Table 1

FOUR TYPES OF SELF-MUTILATION

TypeExampleCommon causes
SevereEye enucleation, castration, amputationPsychotic states, intoxicated states (especially with use of amphetamines)
StereotypedHead banging, bitingMental retardation, Lesch-Nyhan syndrome, Tourette’s syndrome
Superficial or moderateSkin cutting, burning, pickingPersonality disorders secondary to axis I disorders, impulse control disorder
Socially acceptedEar piercing, tattoosAccepted cultural practices
Source: Adapted and reprinted with permission from Favazza AR, Rosenthal RJ. Diagnostic issues in self-mutilation. Hosp Community Psychiatry 1993;44(2):134-40.

  • Severe self-mutilation manifests as extensive (and often irreversible) body damage. Examples include eye enucleation, castration, or amputation. Intense psychotic states and intoxication from illicit substances—usually amphetamines—are the main causes of this relatively rare type, which fortunately is not frequently repeated.
  • Stereotyped self-mutilation is self-directed physical injury (head banging, biting oneself) seen in mental retardation and developmental disorders. This type has a stereotyped and repetitive rhythm and presents in the clear context of a neurobiological insult.
  • Superficial or moderate self-mutilation—seen most commonly in general psychiatric practice—includes skin cutting, burning, or picking by nonpsychotic, nonmentally retarded patients. The behavior tends to be repetitive. Patients with this type usually present with comorbid conditions, particularly personality disorders.
  • Socially accepted self-mutilation includes ear piercing, tattoos, or culturally based behaviors, such as lip piercing or ear stretching seen in some African cultures.

An impulse control disorder?

Over the last 15 years, increasing evidence has suggested that pathologic self-mutilation may be an impulse control disorder.6 Many clinical case reports demonstrate that self-mutilation shares two characteristics of impulse control disorders that involve such behaviors as gambling, sex, or stealing:

  • failure to resist impulses/urges to participate in a particular behavior
  • increasing tension or physical arousal before the act and release of pleasure or gratification after the act.

In the case report, “Pain from cutting makes me feel alive” (box), the patient describes being unable to resist thoughts of cutting herself or to stop the behavior, despite knowing that she should. Self-mutilators also have been shown to have biological measures of impulsivity—namely decreased serotonin levels—similar to those seen with other impulse control disorders.7,8 Finally, evidence is emerging that acts of self-mutilation are socially triggered expressions of impulsive psychological traits.5-7

Risk factors

Accurate estimates of self-mutilation’s incidence and prevalence are lacking, mainly because the behavior is difficult to define. In the U.S. population, Favazza estimated the prevalence as 0.75% and the incidence between 14 and 600 per 100,000 persons annually.5 Known risk factors are:

  • female gender
  • adolescence and college age
  • substance abuse and/or personality disorders
  • history of self-mutilation3,9,10 (Table 2).

Comorbidities such as depression, bipolar disorder, substance abuse, and schizophrenia are common. Axis II phenomena are common, especially the cluster B traits of histrionic, narcissistic, and borderline personalities.

Finally, little is known about the course of self-mutilation, but it tends to begin in adolescence and follows an episodic, recurrent pattern.11 Reports are scant of self-mutilation in the elderly, although clinical experience tells us that it does occur in this age group.

 

 

Causes

Several theories addressing the causes of self-mutilation have been championed. A few, with particular attention to impulse-control dysfunction, are described here.

Biological contributions. Support for a biological mechanism is beginning to emerge. Dysregulation in neurotransmission or neurobiological function may predispose a person to self-mutilate through the expression of impulsive traits such as motor disinhibition and a tendency to physical aggression.6 Decreased serotonergic functioning or a central deficit in serotonergic functioning—as measured by platelet imipramine binding levels and serotonin metabolites in the CSF—are seen in self-mutilators and persons with other impulsive behaviors, such as completed suicide, physical aggression, and pathologic gambling.11,12

Box

CASE REPORT ‘PAIN FROM CUTTING MAKES ME FEEL ALIVE’

Mrs. K, age 39, is being treated for depression. She reports an onset of cutting behavior in college after she broke up with a boyfriend. She recalls being so agitated at the time that she instinctively grabbed a knife and began scraping her forearm. Since then, she has been cutting about three to four times a year and always in the context of an overwhelming stressful situation. So far, no serious medical consequences have resulted; she usually draws blood, then cleans and bandages the wound.

She is facing a divorce and is in a tumultuous battle with her estranged husband over custody of their children. As a result, her cutting behavior has increased in frequency to once or twice a week. These behaviors bother her, but she also reports that cutting allows her to “feel pain that makes me feel alive.” She denies suicidal intent. She wishes she could use another way to deal with emotional pain but finds herself yielding to cutting behaviors. Mrs. K has tried alcohol on some occasions and thought about using illicit drugs but did not know how to get them.

One of the reasons she sought treatment was to reduce her cutting behaviors. She feels that she can’t control her behavior and wants to understand why she repetitively chooses to engage in it.

Self-mutilators also respond abnormally to infusions of the adrenergic agent fenfluramine—they show decreased release of prolactin, which signals reduced serotonergic function.11,12 Reports of a blunted serotonergic response in patients who attempt suicide and in those who complete a self-mutilation act strengthen this theory of a biological contribution.12

Finally, in examining the relationship of impulsivity and serotonergic function, Herpertz found a link between trait impulsivity—as measured by a deficit in problem-solving ability and affective hyperreactivity—and low serotonergic function.6 What remains unclear, however, is cause and effect: do impulsivity traits cause serotonergic dysfunction, or do serotonin function deficits manifest as impulsivity?

Table 2

PROFILE OF PATHOLOGIC SELF-MUTILATORS

  • See themselves as isolated and disconnected from the world
  • History of physical or sexual abuse
  • May come from chaotic family environments
  • Comorbid axis I or II disorders, especially depression, borderline personality disorder, and substance abuse
  • Low self-esteem; inability to cope with negative emotions, life situations
  • Usually female
  • Hopelessness
  • Impulsivity
  • Usually ages 16 to 30
  • Self-mutilation behavior waxes and wanes

In one fascinating study, self-mutilators whose primary diagnosis was borderline personality disorder tolerated more physical pain than did healthy controls.7 When they were tested during a distressed state of mind, self-mutilators’ pain thresholds were even more elevated. This finding suggests alterations in the opiate systems and stress-response pathways.

Further work—including genetic studies and functional neuroimaging—is needed to better understand the neurobiological locus of pathologic self-mutilation.

Psychological contributions. Self-mutilation may represent a compromise between choosing life or death. Some analysts have viewed self-mutilation as a coping mechanism to avoid suicide.1,13 In other words, self-mutilation is the expression of psychic pain turned outward but without the intent to end life. Self-mutilation may then be viewed as a way to concretely demonstrate negative affective states to the self and to the world. It also may serve as a tool to regulate and cope with these negative affective states.

Unfortunately, this coping behavior can become irresistible and psychologically tempting. One self-mutilator writes, “It’s like a relief; I do it [cutting on her wrists] every couple of weeks, just to get relief…from pressure that builds up inside…you feel like you’re going to explode if you don’t cut.”1 The described rise in tension is reminiscent of other impulse control disorders.

Hyperreactivity of decision-making also is correlated with self-mutilation, as it is with impulse-control disorders. Impulsive people tend to respond very quickly to environmental stimuli, rather than suppressing physical and emotional responses.6 One behavioral definition of impulsivity is the tendency to choose smaller, more immediate rewards instead of larger, delayed rewards. In the case report presented earlier, Mrs. K chose to cut her wrists instead of waiting for the negative affective state to pass. Waiting—which would have taken more time—would have offered the obvious benefit of avoiding physical harm.

 

 

Social contributions. The act of self-mutilation typically grabs the attention of a therapist, friends, or spouses. Operant conditioning—where the positive rewards of help, empathy, and attention follow self-mutilation—may reinforce and perpetuate the behavior.1 Other social contributions may include:

  • dysfunctional family systems
  • lack of social support
  • poor communication skills
  • role expectations, such as school/work performance, sexuality, or career obligations.13

When social pressures demand immediate decisions, impulsive self-mutilators may feel an urgency to act instead of using other coping mechanisms. Leibenluft et al published what may be the only empiric study that addresses this “inner experience” of the self-mutilator with borderline personality disorder.14 In our case example, the pressures of an imminent divorce trial triggered Mrs. K’s most recent cutting behavior. She did not have a strong support system and—in her desperation to control something—she resorted to cutting.

Pharmacologic treatment

Just as the cause of self-mutilation is multidimensional, so is its treatment. Research has focused on medications, individual therapy, and social therapy. Not surprisingly, these approaches resemble the treatment of other impulse control disorders.

Most of the evidence for drug treatment of self-mutilation comes from case reports and small openlabel studies. A variety of medication classes have been tried.

Antidepressants. In theory, if reduced serotonin neurotransmission helps drive pathologic self-mutilation, then using selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs) to increase serotonin availability may reduce impulsivity. For example, Velazquez described the case of an 11-year-old boy whose finger-chewing behavior diminished with fluoxetine therapy.15

Most of the SSRI studies have examined self-mutilation in the context of treating personality disorders, especially borderline personality disorder. SSRIs have been shown to modestly reduce anger and negative affective states, but the studies do not refer specifically to their effect on the frequency of self-mutilation. Given the present evidence, SSRIs appear to be an appropriate first-line treatment for self-mutilation because of their:

  • overall safety profile
  • effectiveness in treating mood lability and reactivity
  • documented deficits in serotonergic neurotransmission.

Still, little empiric data exists regarding their use in treating self-mutilation, and prescribers should watch for possible side effects. No SSRI appears to be best suited to treat this disorder. Base initial selection on prior medication trials and on whether a drug’s side effects could work in the patient’s favor. For example, paroxetine’s more sedating properties may benefit a patient with difficulty sleeping, whereas sertraline’s more activating properties may help the lethargic patient with psychomotor retardation.

Atypical antipsychotics are often used in patients with borderline personality disorders or mental retardation to reduce impulsive physical aggression and mood lability. Their wide range of pharmacologic effects—including serotonin and dopamine blockade—suggests why they may have thymoleptic properties related to mood, anxiety, impulsiveness, and overall behavioral control. Small trials have demonstrated that olanzapine and clozapine may help control self-mutilation,16,17 but controlled trials are lacking.

Mood stabilizers. Case reports have described use of lithium, divalproex, and topiramate to reduce the frequency of self-mutilation, but—as with antipsychotics—controlled studies are lacking.18 Mood stabilizers are appropriate in self-mutilators with co-existing bipolar disorder and possibly in those whose self-mutilation has cycling or circadian properties.

Anxiolytics. The sedative effects of benzodiazepines such as lorazepam or clonazepam may help control agitation and attempts to self-mutilate in emergent inpatient settings. This drug class carries a high abuse potential and may cause behavioral disinhibition, especially with mentally retarded patients. These properties limit benzodiazepines’ usefulness in outpatient treatment of self-mutilation.

Box 2

FIVE PRINCIPLES OF DRUG MANAGEMENT OF SELF-MUTILATION

  • Use medications to lay the groundwork for psychosocial interventions. When mood and thought are stabilized, patients can think more clearly and be more receptive to therapy.
  • Consider SSRIs as a first-line approach, followed by atypical antipsychotics, mood stabilizers, and typical antipsychotics. Target doses may vary; some patients respond to lower antipsychotic doses than are used for psychotic disorders.
  • Choose medications to target co-existing symptoms, such as insomnia, heightened arousal states, and behavioral agitation.
  • Discuss the limitations of medications with patients and families, so that their expectations are realistic and do not impede recovery.
  • Monitor prescriptions closely; self-injuring patients are impulsive and at risk for unintentional (or intentional) overdose.

Opiate antagonists. Naltrexone and nalmefene have been shown to be effective in other impulse control disorders, such as pathologic gambling and kleptomania.19,20 In self-mutilation, the use of opiate antagonists has been limited to case reports in patients with autism or mental retardation.

Although unproven, it may be that self-injurious behaviors are reinforced by a release of endogenous opioids. In theory, then, blocking opiate release would reduce the behaviors, as patients would then respond more normally to pain. The behavior would extinguish without the reward.19,20

Opiate antagonists, which purportedly reduce urges and cravings to drink or to gamble, may also block urges and cravings to self-mutilate. Problems with using these agents include the need for periodic liver function tests and side effects such as nausea and gastrointestinal disturbances.

 

 

Psychotherapeutic approaches

Psychodynamic psychotherapy is the most common form of individual therapy used in treating self-mutilation. Effective therapy enables patients to understand why they self-mutilate and teaches them more healthy ways to deal with negative internal states.2,3

Individual therapy is the mainstay of self-mutilation treatment, although no known studies have confirmed that psychodynamic psychotherapy reduces acts of self-mutilation. Because self-mutilators tend to have poor boundaries, supervision and peer collaboration are highly recommended to maintain an effective therapeutic relationship.1

Yet to be answered is whether healthier coping strategies alter measures of impulsivity. Patients who have improved report they are better able to cope with negative affective states and to verbalize their feelings.

Dialectical behavior therapy (DBT) is another psychotherapeutic option. Used in treating personality disorders, DBT combines cognitive, behavioral, and supportive interventions. In one study, DBT reduced the frequency of self-mutilation to 1.5 acts per year, compared with 9 acts per year in a treatment-as-usual control group.21

Need for ‘emergency plans’

Relaxation training, exposure therapy, and response prevention have been suggested as treatments for pathologic self-mutilation, but there is no convincing evidence to support their efficacy.1 Contracts against self-mutilation do not appear to be effective. Instead, “emergency plans” may be needed to deal with urges to self-mutilate.

Crisis intervention strategies that may help the self-mutilator include:

  • partial hospitalizations to focus on increasing coping skills and strengthening a patient’s sense of self-reliance and individual responsibility
  • increased frequency of visits
  • educating the patient to use medications such as atypical neuroleptics or benzodiazepines as needed (“in case of emergency, take this medication instead of cutting”).

Crisis interventions should focus on understanding and changing pathologic behaviors. Self-mutilation behavior may be reinforced if attention is given without enough emphasis on developing coping skills.

Group therapy may be another treatment option. Group support helps patients with pathologic gambling, addictive, or other impulse control disorders to prevent relapse and learn to deal with urges and impulses.

Related resources

  • Self-injury Web site offering information about self-harming behavior plus coping skills, alternatives to self-injury, support groups. www.selfabuse.com
  • Levenkron S. Cutting: understanding and overcoming self-mutilation. New York: WW Norton and Company Ltd, 1998.
  • SAFE (Self-Abuse Finally Ends), www.selfinjury.com. Resources for patients, families, and therapists. Recording at 1-800-DON’T-CUT (800-366-8288) offers to mail information on self-injury and the SAFE Alternatives program.

Drug brand names

  • Clonazepam • Klonopin
  • Clozapine • Clozaril
  • Fluoxetine • Prozac
  • Lorazepam • Ativan
  • Naltrexone • ReVia
  • Nalmefene • Revex
  • Olanzapine • Zyprexa
  • Paroxetine • Paxil
  • Sertraline • Zoloft
  • Topiramate • Topamax

Disclosure

Dr. Fong reports no financial relationship with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

References

1. Suyemoto KL. The functions of self-mutilation. Clin Psychology Rev 1998;18:531-54.

2. Favazza AR, Rosenthal RJ. Diagnostic issues in self-mutilation. Hosp Community Psychiatry 1993;44(2):134-40.

3. Favazza AR, Rosenthal RJ. Varieties of pathological self-mutilation. Behav Neurol. 1990;77-85.

4. Levenkron S. Cutting: Understanding and overcoming self-mutilation. New York: WW Norton and Company Ltd., 1998.

5. Favazza AR. The coming of age of self-mutilation. J Nerv Ment Dis 1998;259-68.

6. Herpertz S, Sass H, Favazza AR. Impulsivity in self-mutilative behavior psychometric and biological findings. J Psychiatric Res 1997;31:451-65.

7. Bohus M, Limberger M, Ebner U, et al. Pain perception during self-reported distress and calmness in patients with borderline personality disorder and self-mutilating behavior. Psychiatric Research 2000;95:251-60.

8. Herpertz S, Steinmeyer SM, Marx D, Oidtmann A, Sass H. The significance of aggression and impulsivity for self-mutilative behavior. Pharmacopsychiatry. 1995;28(suppl):64-72.

9. Nijman HL, Dautzenberg HL, Merckelbach HL, Jung P, Wessel I, Campo J. Self-mutilating behaviour of psychiatric inpatients. Eur Psychiatry 1999;14:4-10.

10. Zlotnick C, Shea MT, Recupero P, Bidadi K, Pearlstein T, Brown P. Trauma, dissociation, impulsivity and self-mutilation among substance abuse patients. Am J Orthopsychiatry 1997;67:650-3.

11. Simeon D, Stanley B, Frances A, Mann JJ, Winchel R, Stanley M. Self-mutilation in personality disorders: psychological and biological correlates. Am J Psychiatry. 1992;149:221-6.

12. New A, Trestman R, Mitropoulou V, Benishay DS, Coccaro E, et al. Serotonergic function and self-injurious behavior in personality disorder patients. Psychiatry Res. 1997;69:17-26.

13. Webb L. Deliberate self-harm in adolescence; a systematic review of psychological and psychosocial factors. J Adv Nursing 2002;38:235-44.

14. Leibenluft E, Gardner DL, Cowdry RW. The inner experience of the borderline self-mutilator. J Personality Disord 1987;1(4):317-24.

15. Velazquez L, Ward-Chene L, Loogsian SR. Fluoxetine in the treatment of self-mutilating behavior. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 2000;39:812-14.

16. Garnis-Jones S, Collins S, Rosenthal D. Treatment of self-mutilation with olanzapine. J Cutan Med Surg 2000;4(3):161-3.

17. Chengappa KN, Ebeling T, Kang JS, Levine J, Parepally H. Clozapine reduces severe self-mutilation and aggression in psychotic patients with borderline personality disorder. J Clin Psychiatry 1999;60:477-84.

18. Cassano P, Lattanzi L, Pini S, Dell’Osso L, Battisini G, Cassano GB. Topiramate for self-mutilation in a patient with borderline personality disorder. Bipolar Disord. 2001;3:161.-

19. Benjamin S, Seek A, Tresise L, Price E, Maureen G. Paradoxical response to naltrexone treatment of self-injurious behavior. J Am Acad Child Adoles Psychiatry. 1995;34:238-42.

20. Szymanski L, Kedesdy J, Sulkes S, Cutler A, Stevens OP. Naltrexone in the treatment of self-injurious behavior; a clinical study. Res Dev Disabil. 1987;8:179-90.

21. Linehan MM, Armstrong HE, Suarez A, Allmon D, Heard HL. Cognitive-behavioral treatment of chronically parasuicidal borderline patients. Arch Gen Psychiatry. 1993;50:157-8.

References

1. Suyemoto KL. The functions of self-mutilation. Clin Psychology Rev 1998;18:531-54.

2. Favazza AR, Rosenthal RJ. Diagnostic issues in self-mutilation. Hosp Community Psychiatry 1993;44(2):134-40.

3. Favazza AR, Rosenthal RJ. Varieties of pathological self-mutilation. Behav Neurol. 1990;77-85.

4. Levenkron S. Cutting: Understanding and overcoming self-mutilation. New York: WW Norton and Company Ltd., 1998.

5. Favazza AR. The coming of age of self-mutilation. J Nerv Ment Dis 1998;259-68.

6. Herpertz S, Sass H, Favazza AR. Impulsivity in self-mutilative behavior psychometric and biological findings. J Psychiatric Res 1997;31:451-65.

7. Bohus M, Limberger M, Ebner U, et al. Pain perception during self-reported distress and calmness in patients with borderline personality disorder and self-mutilating behavior. Psychiatric Research 2000;95:251-60.

8. Herpertz S, Steinmeyer SM, Marx D, Oidtmann A, Sass H. The significance of aggression and impulsivity for self-mutilative behavior. Pharmacopsychiatry. 1995;28(suppl):64-72.

9. Nijman HL, Dautzenberg HL, Merckelbach HL, Jung P, Wessel I, Campo J. Self-mutilating behaviour of psychiatric inpatients. Eur Psychiatry 1999;14:4-10.

10. Zlotnick C, Shea MT, Recupero P, Bidadi K, Pearlstein T, Brown P. Trauma, dissociation, impulsivity and self-mutilation among substance abuse patients. Am J Orthopsychiatry 1997;67:650-3.

11. Simeon D, Stanley B, Frances A, Mann JJ, Winchel R, Stanley M. Self-mutilation in personality disorders: psychological and biological correlates. Am J Psychiatry. 1992;149:221-6.

12. New A, Trestman R, Mitropoulou V, Benishay DS, Coccaro E, et al. Serotonergic function and self-injurious behavior in personality disorder patients. Psychiatry Res. 1997;69:17-26.

13. Webb L. Deliberate self-harm in adolescence; a systematic review of psychological and psychosocial factors. J Adv Nursing 2002;38:235-44.

14. Leibenluft E, Gardner DL, Cowdry RW. The inner experience of the borderline self-mutilator. J Personality Disord 1987;1(4):317-24.

15. Velazquez L, Ward-Chene L, Loogsian SR. Fluoxetine in the treatment of self-mutilating behavior. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 2000;39:812-14.

16. Garnis-Jones S, Collins S, Rosenthal D. Treatment of self-mutilation with olanzapine. J Cutan Med Surg 2000;4(3):161-3.

17. Chengappa KN, Ebeling T, Kang JS, Levine J, Parepally H. Clozapine reduces severe self-mutilation and aggression in psychotic patients with borderline personality disorder. J Clin Psychiatry 1999;60:477-84.

18. Cassano P, Lattanzi L, Pini S, Dell’Osso L, Battisini G, Cassano GB. Topiramate for self-mutilation in a patient with borderline personality disorder. Bipolar Disord. 2001;3:161.-

19. Benjamin S, Seek A, Tresise L, Price E, Maureen G. Paradoxical response to naltrexone treatment of self-injurious behavior. J Am Acad Child Adoles Psychiatry. 1995;34:238-42.

20. Szymanski L, Kedesdy J, Sulkes S, Cutler A, Stevens OP. Naltrexone in the treatment of self-injurious behavior; a clinical study. Res Dev Disabil. 1987;8:179-90.

21. Linehan MM, Armstrong HE, Suarez A, Allmon D, Heard HL. Cognitive-behavioral treatment of chronically parasuicidal borderline patients. Arch Gen Psychiatry. 1993;50:157-8.

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(02)
Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(02)
Page Number
15-23
Page Number
15-23
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Self-mutilation: Impulsive traits, high pain threshold suggest new drug therapies
Display Headline
Self-mutilation: Impulsive traits, high pain threshold suggest new drug therapies
Sections
Article Source

PURLs Copyright

Inside the Article

Article PDF Media

Factitious disorder: What to do when someone plays sick

Article Type
Changed
Tue, 12/11/2018 - 15:12
Display Headline
Factitious disorder: What to do when someone plays sick

An orthopedic surgeon treating a patient, age 29, at a tertiary medical center asks a staff psychiatrist for advice. The patient—who has chronic bilateral knee infections—lives 350 miles away; her treatment-resistant disease has stymied and frustrated her local physicians. Her infections have persisted despite multiple courses of antibiotics and numerous surgical procedures.

Because of damage to the right knee joint, she cannot bear weight or walk. A registered nurse, she has been unable to work or care for her school-aged children for 2 years. The surgeon tells the psychiatrist that the patient denies psychiatric complaints beyond sadness over her inability to fulfill her responsibilities. She expresses a wish to recover and adamantly denies that she manipulates her wound or does anything to interfere with its healing. The medical/surgical team has noticed that while she is away from home receiving orthopedic care, her husband never visits or calls.

Cases such as the one described above are rare, but psychiatrists occasionally encounter patients with these baffling characteristics. When the patient’s disease fails to respond to treatment as expected—or progresses—members of the medical/psychiatric team need to ask themselves these questions:

  • Are we dealing with a drug-resistant infection?
  • Is the patient adhering fully with treatment?
  • Does the patient do anything to perpetuate this disease process and wish to stay ill?

Asking this last question is difficult but necessary in certain situations. Most of us cannot imagine why a person would wish to remain sick. Why would someone be willing to endure pain and multiple hospital stays, remain isolated from family, and risk a permanent disability? Yet, an unknown number of people strive to appear unwell so that they can receive ongoing medical care.

What are factitious disorders?

Factitious disorders are psychiatric conditions in which patients deliberately portray themselves as ill. They may present with physical or psychological symptoms or both. Their objective is to assume the sick role—not to procure shelter, obtain financial assistance, avoid prison, etc., which would fall into other diagnoses such as malingering.

Table 1

DSM-IV DIAGNOSTIC CRITERIA FOR FACTITIOUS DISORDER

  1. Intentional production or feigning of physical or psychological signs or symptoms.
  2. The motivation for behaviors is to assume the sick role.
  3. External incentives for the behaviors (such as economic gain, avoiding legal responsibility, or improving physical well-being, as in malingering) are absent.
Types
  • With predominantly psychological signs and symptoms
  • With predominantly physical signs and symptoms
  • With combined psychological and physical signs and symptoms
Source: DSM-IV-TR

DSM-IV criteria are straightforward and inclusive (Table 1).1 They do not specify:

  • the presence of medical and/or psychiatric disorders, which do not preclude the diagnosis
  • reasons why a person may wish to assume the sick role.

The medical literature on factitious disorder includes many compelling case reports. However, the secretive nature of most patients with factitious complaints has made it difficult to conduct carefully designed community-based studies, prospective studies, or controlled randomized trials. Because research is scarce, much is unknown about who gets factitious disorder, what causes it, and how to treat it.

Differential diagnosis

Factitious disorder varies in severity. Among subtypes proposed by Folks et al (Table 2),2 patients in categories 3, 4, and 5—who produce physical illness—can potentially be identified by diagnostic testing.3 Patients in categories 1 and 2—who exaggerate physical symptoms and provide a false medical history—may be more difficult to detect.

In cases where patients exaggerate symptoms or fabricate histories, little objective information is typically available to the treating physicians. Medical records revealing multiple admissions or emergency room visits may be obtained from other institutions only if the patient gives permission. However, the patient often does not consent or the materials cannot be located.

Third-party payers’ pre-authorization procedures and utilization reviews may speak volumes about a patient’s search for health care. However, patients who are unemployed or estranged from spouses may lose insurance coverage over time. Government assistance programs such as Medicare and Medicaid provide care to many patients with these chronic problems and do not perform the same degree of utilization review.

Munchausen disorder—a variant of factitious disorder—is not recognized by DSM-IV. The term—while still used primarily by nonpsychiatrists—is generally viewed as outdated. The term is reserved for patients with the most severe and chronic form of factitious disorder.4 The few studies done of patients with this variant have not adequately examined the specificity and sensitivity of their core symptoms or other characteristics, such as production of a misleading medical condition, travel to multiple medical centers (peregrination), and the telling of tall tales (pseudologia fantastica).

Somatoform disorder. If physicians suspect that a patient’s illness is taking an unusual course, they may suspect a somatoform rather than factitious disorder. Patients with somatoform disorder do not intentionally produce their symptoms, whereas patients with factitious disorder deliberately try to appear ill. In both disorders, the underlying cause is unconscious.

 

 

Hypochondriasis. Patients with hypochondriasis are obsessed with concerns that they have an illness. Their worries may compel them to seek out examinations and diagnostic tests. Unlike patients with factitious disorder, these patients do not deliberately provide information or manufacture symptoms to create the appearance of a medical disorder.

Malingering. Patients who malinger may engage in deceitful behaviors that can include creating a misleading impression about a medical or psychiatric illness. Being a patient, however, is not their objective. They may be seeking disability payments, insurance settlements, shelter, or food.

Patient evaluation

Patients suspected of factitious disorder merit a thorough medical and psychiatric evaluation, guided by their presenting symptoms. They commonly have comorbid psychiatric disorders (Table 3), which medical/surgical team members and the psychiatrist need to identify before considering a diagnosis of factitious disorder.

Because invasive tests such as angiography, colonoscopy, biopsies, or exploratory surgery are required to exclude some underlying medical processes, the treatment team must take care not to cause harm. The expected benefits of diagnostic testing must be balanced against the risks of an iatrogenic event.

Table 2

FIVE PROPOSED SUBTYPES OF FACTITIOUS DISORDER

CharacteristicExamples
May be most difficult to detect
1. Exaggerates physical symptoms
2. Provides a false medical history
An epileptic patient has a seizure while EEG is normal
Describes a fictitious history of cancer
Can potentially be identified by diagnostic testing
3. Simulates physical symptoms
4. Modifies physiology to create physical signs
5. Induces physical illness
Puts gravel into urine sample
Exerts oneself before vital signs test to elevate blood pressure
Injects foreign material into a surgical wound to slow healing
Source: Adapted from Folks et al.2

Relatively little is known about how to diagnose a factitious process coexisting with a genuine medical disorder. For example, a patient with well-documented chronic inflammatory disease may easily exaggerate pain and diarrhea to facilitate hospital admission.

To confront or not to confront?

Some patients may relish the patient role for a time—such as while being evaluated for a presumed opportunistic infection—but may not consent to more definitive tests—such as HIV testing. They may demand discharge while they still may be harming themselves, such as by injecting foreign material. The patient may plan to find another health care provider and continue the maladaptive behavior.

If you suspected that our case patient was playing a role in perpetuating her chronic knee infections, would you confront her with the evidence? The answer is unclear, but some experts argue against confrontation.5 Once a patient believes that the medical team suspects a factitious process, he or she may no longer wish to cooperate, even if the diagnostic evaluation is incomplete. Patients often become more guarded about what they reveal after they are confronted. They may become more careful to hide evidence of wound tampering (e.g., syringes) and hesitant to discuss emotional issues (e.g., estranged relationships, feeling overwhelmed by work and home duties).

Case reports suggest that patients who simulate symptoms, modify their physiology, or induce physical illness are at high risk of morbidity and mortality. For example, one report described a patient who underwent two cardiopulmonary resuscitations because of torsades de pointes triggered by hypokalemia related to covert laxative use.6 Physicians must manage these cases carefully to reduce patient risk. In rare cases where a patient’s behavior becomes life-threatening, admission to a psychiatric unit—even involuntarily—may be necessary.

Collaborating with the patient

A comprehensive treatment approach is optimal for patients with factitious disorder. All the patient’s objective medical disorders should be addressed in systematically and with empathy. Treating a co-existing medical disorder may help the physician gain the patient’s trust, which in turn can help keep treatment options open.

Some patients have been known to exaggerate their physical symptoms because they feel they have a serious, undiagnosed medical problem. They feel that their assessment has been cursory and that they need to compel the physician to do a more thorough evaluation in order to identify the true underlying problem. Although no research supports this observation, these patients may be reassured when their physicians carefully evaluate their medical problems.

Eisendrath5 recommends that the treatment team take time to get to know the patient and convey that this attention is devoted to the person, not just the medical illness. This approach may increase the likelihood of learning about psychosocial issues the person may be trying to resolve by taking the patient role. Patients also may be more willing to complete the evaluation and adhere to recommended treatment, although these outcomes are not guaranteed.

Table 3

DISORDERS KNOWN TO CO-EXIST WITH FACTITIOUS DISORDER

DisorderPossible issue
MedicalCoexisting medical disease
DelusionalSomatic delusions
DepressiveSomatic complaints, dependency on staff
Chemical dependencyPrescription drug abuse
Eating disordersPersistent vomiting, weight loss
Obsessive-compulsive disorderSomatic obsessions
HypochondriasisConviction one is unwell
Pain disordersPain complaints
MalingeringSeeking shelter in hospital
Source: Adapted from Folks et al. Somatoform disorders, factitious disorders, and malingering.
In: Stoudemire A, Fogel B, Greenberg D, eds. Psychiatric care of the medical patient (2nd ed). New York: Oxford University Press, 2000:458-75.
 

 

Case report

For the patient with chronic knee infections, the staff psychiatrist recommended that the orthopedist develop a collaborative relationship with her. Eventually the surgeon told her that she needed psychiatric care, and the patient agreed to psychiatric hospitalization.

In this setting, she was initially observed with a 24-hour monitor and received appropriate wound care. The staff encouraged her to talk about the emotional distress related to having a chronic disease. She never admitted to perpetuating the infections in her knees, although she was suspected of injecting herself with infected material. Psychiatric evaluation revealed a history of multiple strained relationships that suggested a severe personality disorder.

Her wounds slowly began to improve, and she was discharged after 2 weeks. Throughout her stay, she remained reluctant to discuss her relationship with her husband or examine other possible sources of stress in her life. Thus, factitious behavior will probably recur unless she tackles her unconscious motivations for adopting a patient role.

If patients’ emotional needs are being met, they may reveal the mechanism of their disease. Unfortunately, experience suggests that very few confess the false nature of their medical illness, fewer accept psychiatric treatment, and even fewer complete the recommended course of treatment.

Comorbid psychiatric disorders provide an opportunity to intervene with selected medications and psychotherapy to reduce patient distress. Chemical dependency treatment in particular can help stabilize a patient with a factitious disorder so that he or she no longer seeks pain medications or sedatives. Patients with an obsessive-compulsive disorder or hypochondriasis may require specifically targeted cognitive-behavioral therapy or pharmacotherapy.

Few references regarding treatment of factitious disorder exist; the only known review of cognitive-behavioral therapy’s role in treating this disorder awaits publication.

Related resources

  • Sutherland AJ, Rodin GM. Factitious disorders in a general hospital setting: clinical features and a review of the literature. Psychosomatics 1990;31(4):392-9.
  • Reich P, Gottfried LA. Factitious disorders in a teaching hospital. Ann Intern Med 1983;99(2):240-7.
References

1. American Psychiatric Association Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders (4th ed). Washington DC: American Psychiatric Association, 1994-886.

2. Folks D, Feldman M, Ford C. Somatoform disorders, factitious disorders, and malingering. In: Stoudemire A, Fogel B, Greenberg D, eds. Psychiatric care of the medical patient (2nd ed). New York: Oxford University Press, 2000;458-75.

3. Wallach J. Laboratory diagnosis of factitious disorders. Arch Intern Med 1994;154:1690-6.

4. Asher R. Munchausen’s syndrome. Lancet 1951;1:339-41.

5. Eisendrath S. Factitious physical disorders treatment without confrontation. Psychosomatics 1990;31:357-8.

6. Krahn L, Lee J, Martin MJ, Richardson J, O’Connor M. Hypokalemia leading to torsades de pointes: Munchausen’s syndrome versus bulimia nervosa. Gen Hosp Psychiatry 1997;19:370-7.

Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

Lois E. Krahn, MD
Associate professor Department of psychiatry & psychology Mayo Clinic and Mayo Medical School Rochester, MN

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(02)
Publications
Page Number
47-56
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

Lois E. Krahn, MD
Associate professor Department of psychiatry & psychology Mayo Clinic and Mayo Medical School Rochester, MN

Author and Disclosure Information

Lois E. Krahn, MD
Associate professor Department of psychiatry & psychology Mayo Clinic and Mayo Medical School Rochester, MN

Article PDF
Article PDF

An orthopedic surgeon treating a patient, age 29, at a tertiary medical center asks a staff psychiatrist for advice. The patient—who has chronic bilateral knee infections—lives 350 miles away; her treatment-resistant disease has stymied and frustrated her local physicians. Her infections have persisted despite multiple courses of antibiotics and numerous surgical procedures.

Because of damage to the right knee joint, she cannot bear weight or walk. A registered nurse, she has been unable to work or care for her school-aged children for 2 years. The surgeon tells the psychiatrist that the patient denies psychiatric complaints beyond sadness over her inability to fulfill her responsibilities. She expresses a wish to recover and adamantly denies that she manipulates her wound or does anything to interfere with its healing. The medical/surgical team has noticed that while she is away from home receiving orthopedic care, her husband never visits or calls.

Cases such as the one described above are rare, but psychiatrists occasionally encounter patients with these baffling characteristics. When the patient’s disease fails to respond to treatment as expected—or progresses—members of the medical/psychiatric team need to ask themselves these questions:

  • Are we dealing with a drug-resistant infection?
  • Is the patient adhering fully with treatment?
  • Does the patient do anything to perpetuate this disease process and wish to stay ill?

Asking this last question is difficult but necessary in certain situations. Most of us cannot imagine why a person would wish to remain sick. Why would someone be willing to endure pain and multiple hospital stays, remain isolated from family, and risk a permanent disability? Yet, an unknown number of people strive to appear unwell so that they can receive ongoing medical care.

What are factitious disorders?

Factitious disorders are psychiatric conditions in which patients deliberately portray themselves as ill. They may present with physical or psychological symptoms or both. Their objective is to assume the sick role—not to procure shelter, obtain financial assistance, avoid prison, etc., which would fall into other diagnoses such as malingering.

Table 1

DSM-IV DIAGNOSTIC CRITERIA FOR FACTITIOUS DISORDER

  1. Intentional production or feigning of physical or psychological signs or symptoms.
  2. The motivation for behaviors is to assume the sick role.
  3. External incentives for the behaviors (such as economic gain, avoiding legal responsibility, or improving physical well-being, as in malingering) are absent.
Types
  • With predominantly psychological signs and symptoms
  • With predominantly physical signs and symptoms
  • With combined psychological and physical signs and symptoms
Source: DSM-IV-TR

DSM-IV criteria are straightforward and inclusive (Table 1).1 They do not specify:

  • the presence of medical and/or psychiatric disorders, which do not preclude the diagnosis
  • reasons why a person may wish to assume the sick role.

The medical literature on factitious disorder includes many compelling case reports. However, the secretive nature of most patients with factitious complaints has made it difficult to conduct carefully designed community-based studies, prospective studies, or controlled randomized trials. Because research is scarce, much is unknown about who gets factitious disorder, what causes it, and how to treat it.

Differential diagnosis

Factitious disorder varies in severity. Among subtypes proposed by Folks et al (Table 2),2 patients in categories 3, 4, and 5—who produce physical illness—can potentially be identified by diagnostic testing.3 Patients in categories 1 and 2—who exaggerate physical symptoms and provide a false medical history—may be more difficult to detect.

In cases where patients exaggerate symptoms or fabricate histories, little objective information is typically available to the treating physicians. Medical records revealing multiple admissions or emergency room visits may be obtained from other institutions only if the patient gives permission. However, the patient often does not consent or the materials cannot be located.

Third-party payers’ pre-authorization procedures and utilization reviews may speak volumes about a patient’s search for health care. However, patients who are unemployed or estranged from spouses may lose insurance coverage over time. Government assistance programs such as Medicare and Medicaid provide care to many patients with these chronic problems and do not perform the same degree of utilization review.

Munchausen disorder—a variant of factitious disorder—is not recognized by DSM-IV. The term—while still used primarily by nonpsychiatrists—is generally viewed as outdated. The term is reserved for patients with the most severe and chronic form of factitious disorder.4 The few studies done of patients with this variant have not adequately examined the specificity and sensitivity of their core symptoms or other characteristics, such as production of a misleading medical condition, travel to multiple medical centers (peregrination), and the telling of tall tales (pseudologia fantastica).

Somatoform disorder. If physicians suspect that a patient’s illness is taking an unusual course, they may suspect a somatoform rather than factitious disorder. Patients with somatoform disorder do not intentionally produce their symptoms, whereas patients with factitious disorder deliberately try to appear ill. In both disorders, the underlying cause is unconscious.

 

 

Hypochondriasis. Patients with hypochondriasis are obsessed with concerns that they have an illness. Their worries may compel them to seek out examinations and diagnostic tests. Unlike patients with factitious disorder, these patients do not deliberately provide information or manufacture symptoms to create the appearance of a medical disorder.

Malingering. Patients who malinger may engage in deceitful behaviors that can include creating a misleading impression about a medical or psychiatric illness. Being a patient, however, is not their objective. They may be seeking disability payments, insurance settlements, shelter, or food.

Patient evaluation

Patients suspected of factitious disorder merit a thorough medical and psychiatric evaluation, guided by their presenting symptoms. They commonly have comorbid psychiatric disorders (Table 3), which medical/surgical team members and the psychiatrist need to identify before considering a diagnosis of factitious disorder.

Because invasive tests such as angiography, colonoscopy, biopsies, or exploratory surgery are required to exclude some underlying medical processes, the treatment team must take care not to cause harm. The expected benefits of diagnostic testing must be balanced against the risks of an iatrogenic event.

Table 2

FIVE PROPOSED SUBTYPES OF FACTITIOUS DISORDER

CharacteristicExamples
May be most difficult to detect
1. Exaggerates physical symptoms
2. Provides a false medical history
An epileptic patient has a seizure while EEG is normal
Describes a fictitious history of cancer
Can potentially be identified by diagnostic testing
3. Simulates physical symptoms
4. Modifies physiology to create physical signs
5. Induces physical illness
Puts gravel into urine sample
Exerts oneself before vital signs test to elevate blood pressure
Injects foreign material into a surgical wound to slow healing
Source: Adapted from Folks et al.2

Relatively little is known about how to diagnose a factitious process coexisting with a genuine medical disorder. For example, a patient with well-documented chronic inflammatory disease may easily exaggerate pain and diarrhea to facilitate hospital admission.

To confront or not to confront?

Some patients may relish the patient role for a time—such as while being evaluated for a presumed opportunistic infection—but may not consent to more definitive tests—such as HIV testing. They may demand discharge while they still may be harming themselves, such as by injecting foreign material. The patient may plan to find another health care provider and continue the maladaptive behavior.

If you suspected that our case patient was playing a role in perpetuating her chronic knee infections, would you confront her with the evidence? The answer is unclear, but some experts argue against confrontation.5 Once a patient believes that the medical team suspects a factitious process, he or she may no longer wish to cooperate, even if the diagnostic evaluation is incomplete. Patients often become more guarded about what they reveal after they are confronted. They may become more careful to hide evidence of wound tampering (e.g., syringes) and hesitant to discuss emotional issues (e.g., estranged relationships, feeling overwhelmed by work and home duties).

Case reports suggest that patients who simulate symptoms, modify their physiology, or induce physical illness are at high risk of morbidity and mortality. For example, one report described a patient who underwent two cardiopulmonary resuscitations because of torsades de pointes triggered by hypokalemia related to covert laxative use.6 Physicians must manage these cases carefully to reduce patient risk. In rare cases where a patient’s behavior becomes life-threatening, admission to a psychiatric unit—even involuntarily—may be necessary.

Collaborating with the patient

A comprehensive treatment approach is optimal for patients with factitious disorder. All the patient’s objective medical disorders should be addressed in systematically and with empathy. Treating a co-existing medical disorder may help the physician gain the patient’s trust, which in turn can help keep treatment options open.

Some patients have been known to exaggerate their physical symptoms because they feel they have a serious, undiagnosed medical problem. They feel that their assessment has been cursory and that they need to compel the physician to do a more thorough evaluation in order to identify the true underlying problem. Although no research supports this observation, these patients may be reassured when their physicians carefully evaluate their medical problems.

Eisendrath5 recommends that the treatment team take time to get to know the patient and convey that this attention is devoted to the person, not just the medical illness. This approach may increase the likelihood of learning about psychosocial issues the person may be trying to resolve by taking the patient role. Patients also may be more willing to complete the evaluation and adhere to recommended treatment, although these outcomes are not guaranteed.

Table 3

DISORDERS KNOWN TO CO-EXIST WITH FACTITIOUS DISORDER

DisorderPossible issue
MedicalCoexisting medical disease
DelusionalSomatic delusions
DepressiveSomatic complaints, dependency on staff
Chemical dependencyPrescription drug abuse
Eating disordersPersistent vomiting, weight loss
Obsessive-compulsive disorderSomatic obsessions
HypochondriasisConviction one is unwell
Pain disordersPain complaints
MalingeringSeeking shelter in hospital
Source: Adapted from Folks et al. Somatoform disorders, factitious disorders, and malingering.
In: Stoudemire A, Fogel B, Greenberg D, eds. Psychiatric care of the medical patient (2nd ed). New York: Oxford University Press, 2000:458-75.
 

 

Case report

For the patient with chronic knee infections, the staff psychiatrist recommended that the orthopedist develop a collaborative relationship with her. Eventually the surgeon told her that she needed psychiatric care, and the patient agreed to psychiatric hospitalization.

In this setting, she was initially observed with a 24-hour monitor and received appropriate wound care. The staff encouraged her to talk about the emotional distress related to having a chronic disease. She never admitted to perpetuating the infections in her knees, although she was suspected of injecting herself with infected material. Psychiatric evaluation revealed a history of multiple strained relationships that suggested a severe personality disorder.

Her wounds slowly began to improve, and she was discharged after 2 weeks. Throughout her stay, she remained reluctant to discuss her relationship with her husband or examine other possible sources of stress in her life. Thus, factitious behavior will probably recur unless she tackles her unconscious motivations for adopting a patient role.

If patients’ emotional needs are being met, they may reveal the mechanism of their disease. Unfortunately, experience suggests that very few confess the false nature of their medical illness, fewer accept psychiatric treatment, and even fewer complete the recommended course of treatment.

Comorbid psychiatric disorders provide an opportunity to intervene with selected medications and psychotherapy to reduce patient distress. Chemical dependency treatment in particular can help stabilize a patient with a factitious disorder so that he or she no longer seeks pain medications or sedatives. Patients with an obsessive-compulsive disorder or hypochondriasis may require specifically targeted cognitive-behavioral therapy or pharmacotherapy.

Few references regarding treatment of factitious disorder exist; the only known review of cognitive-behavioral therapy’s role in treating this disorder awaits publication.

Related resources

  • Sutherland AJ, Rodin GM. Factitious disorders in a general hospital setting: clinical features and a review of the literature. Psychosomatics 1990;31(4):392-9.
  • Reich P, Gottfried LA. Factitious disorders in a teaching hospital. Ann Intern Med 1983;99(2):240-7.

An orthopedic surgeon treating a patient, age 29, at a tertiary medical center asks a staff psychiatrist for advice. The patient—who has chronic bilateral knee infections—lives 350 miles away; her treatment-resistant disease has stymied and frustrated her local physicians. Her infections have persisted despite multiple courses of antibiotics and numerous surgical procedures.

Because of damage to the right knee joint, she cannot bear weight or walk. A registered nurse, she has been unable to work or care for her school-aged children for 2 years. The surgeon tells the psychiatrist that the patient denies psychiatric complaints beyond sadness over her inability to fulfill her responsibilities. She expresses a wish to recover and adamantly denies that she manipulates her wound or does anything to interfere with its healing. The medical/surgical team has noticed that while she is away from home receiving orthopedic care, her husband never visits or calls.

Cases such as the one described above are rare, but psychiatrists occasionally encounter patients with these baffling characteristics. When the patient’s disease fails to respond to treatment as expected—or progresses—members of the medical/psychiatric team need to ask themselves these questions:

  • Are we dealing with a drug-resistant infection?
  • Is the patient adhering fully with treatment?
  • Does the patient do anything to perpetuate this disease process and wish to stay ill?

Asking this last question is difficult but necessary in certain situations. Most of us cannot imagine why a person would wish to remain sick. Why would someone be willing to endure pain and multiple hospital stays, remain isolated from family, and risk a permanent disability? Yet, an unknown number of people strive to appear unwell so that they can receive ongoing medical care.

What are factitious disorders?

Factitious disorders are psychiatric conditions in which patients deliberately portray themselves as ill. They may present with physical or psychological symptoms or both. Their objective is to assume the sick role—not to procure shelter, obtain financial assistance, avoid prison, etc., which would fall into other diagnoses such as malingering.

Table 1

DSM-IV DIAGNOSTIC CRITERIA FOR FACTITIOUS DISORDER

  1. Intentional production or feigning of physical or psychological signs or symptoms.
  2. The motivation for behaviors is to assume the sick role.
  3. External incentives for the behaviors (such as economic gain, avoiding legal responsibility, or improving physical well-being, as in malingering) are absent.
Types
  • With predominantly psychological signs and symptoms
  • With predominantly physical signs and symptoms
  • With combined psychological and physical signs and symptoms
Source: DSM-IV-TR

DSM-IV criteria are straightforward and inclusive (Table 1).1 They do not specify:

  • the presence of medical and/or psychiatric disorders, which do not preclude the diagnosis
  • reasons why a person may wish to assume the sick role.

The medical literature on factitious disorder includes many compelling case reports. However, the secretive nature of most patients with factitious complaints has made it difficult to conduct carefully designed community-based studies, prospective studies, or controlled randomized trials. Because research is scarce, much is unknown about who gets factitious disorder, what causes it, and how to treat it.

Differential diagnosis

Factitious disorder varies in severity. Among subtypes proposed by Folks et al (Table 2),2 patients in categories 3, 4, and 5—who produce physical illness—can potentially be identified by diagnostic testing.3 Patients in categories 1 and 2—who exaggerate physical symptoms and provide a false medical history—may be more difficult to detect.

In cases where patients exaggerate symptoms or fabricate histories, little objective information is typically available to the treating physicians. Medical records revealing multiple admissions or emergency room visits may be obtained from other institutions only if the patient gives permission. However, the patient often does not consent or the materials cannot be located.

Third-party payers’ pre-authorization procedures and utilization reviews may speak volumes about a patient’s search for health care. However, patients who are unemployed or estranged from spouses may lose insurance coverage over time. Government assistance programs such as Medicare and Medicaid provide care to many patients with these chronic problems and do not perform the same degree of utilization review.

Munchausen disorder—a variant of factitious disorder—is not recognized by DSM-IV. The term—while still used primarily by nonpsychiatrists—is generally viewed as outdated. The term is reserved for patients with the most severe and chronic form of factitious disorder.4 The few studies done of patients with this variant have not adequately examined the specificity and sensitivity of their core symptoms or other characteristics, such as production of a misleading medical condition, travel to multiple medical centers (peregrination), and the telling of tall tales (pseudologia fantastica).

Somatoform disorder. If physicians suspect that a patient’s illness is taking an unusual course, they may suspect a somatoform rather than factitious disorder. Patients with somatoform disorder do not intentionally produce their symptoms, whereas patients with factitious disorder deliberately try to appear ill. In both disorders, the underlying cause is unconscious.

 

 

Hypochondriasis. Patients with hypochondriasis are obsessed with concerns that they have an illness. Their worries may compel them to seek out examinations and diagnostic tests. Unlike patients with factitious disorder, these patients do not deliberately provide information or manufacture symptoms to create the appearance of a medical disorder.

Malingering. Patients who malinger may engage in deceitful behaviors that can include creating a misleading impression about a medical or psychiatric illness. Being a patient, however, is not their objective. They may be seeking disability payments, insurance settlements, shelter, or food.

Patient evaluation

Patients suspected of factitious disorder merit a thorough medical and psychiatric evaluation, guided by their presenting symptoms. They commonly have comorbid psychiatric disorders (Table 3), which medical/surgical team members and the psychiatrist need to identify before considering a diagnosis of factitious disorder.

Because invasive tests such as angiography, colonoscopy, biopsies, or exploratory surgery are required to exclude some underlying medical processes, the treatment team must take care not to cause harm. The expected benefits of diagnostic testing must be balanced against the risks of an iatrogenic event.

Table 2

FIVE PROPOSED SUBTYPES OF FACTITIOUS DISORDER

CharacteristicExamples
May be most difficult to detect
1. Exaggerates physical symptoms
2. Provides a false medical history
An epileptic patient has a seizure while EEG is normal
Describes a fictitious history of cancer
Can potentially be identified by diagnostic testing
3. Simulates physical symptoms
4. Modifies physiology to create physical signs
5. Induces physical illness
Puts gravel into urine sample
Exerts oneself before vital signs test to elevate blood pressure
Injects foreign material into a surgical wound to slow healing
Source: Adapted from Folks et al.2

Relatively little is known about how to diagnose a factitious process coexisting with a genuine medical disorder. For example, a patient with well-documented chronic inflammatory disease may easily exaggerate pain and diarrhea to facilitate hospital admission.

To confront or not to confront?

Some patients may relish the patient role for a time—such as while being evaluated for a presumed opportunistic infection—but may not consent to more definitive tests—such as HIV testing. They may demand discharge while they still may be harming themselves, such as by injecting foreign material. The patient may plan to find another health care provider and continue the maladaptive behavior.

If you suspected that our case patient was playing a role in perpetuating her chronic knee infections, would you confront her with the evidence? The answer is unclear, but some experts argue against confrontation.5 Once a patient believes that the medical team suspects a factitious process, he or she may no longer wish to cooperate, even if the diagnostic evaluation is incomplete. Patients often become more guarded about what they reveal after they are confronted. They may become more careful to hide evidence of wound tampering (e.g., syringes) and hesitant to discuss emotional issues (e.g., estranged relationships, feeling overwhelmed by work and home duties).

Case reports suggest that patients who simulate symptoms, modify their physiology, or induce physical illness are at high risk of morbidity and mortality. For example, one report described a patient who underwent two cardiopulmonary resuscitations because of torsades de pointes triggered by hypokalemia related to covert laxative use.6 Physicians must manage these cases carefully to reduce patient risk. In rare cases where a patient’s behavior becomes life-threatening, admission to a psychiatric unit—even involuntarily—may be necessary.

Collaborating with the patient

A comprehensive treatment approach is optimal for patients with factitious disorder. All the patient’s objective medical disorders should be addressed in systematically and with empathy. Treating a co-existing medical disorder may help the physician gain the patient’s trust, which in turn can help keep treatment options open.

Some patients have been known to exaggerate their physical symptoms because they feel they have a serious, undiagnosed medical problem. They feel that their assessment has been cursory and that they need to compel the physician to do a more thorough evaluation in order to identify the true underlying problem. Although no research supports this observation, these patients may be reassured when their physicians carefully evaluate their medical problems.

Eisendrath5 recommends that the treatment team take time to get to know the patient and convey that this attention is devoted to the person, not just the medical illness. This approach may increase the likelihood of learning about psychosocial issues the person may be trying to resolve by taking the patient role. Patients also may be more willing to complete the evaluation and adhere to recommended treatment, although these outcomes are not guaranteed.

Table 3

DISORDERS KNOWN TO CO-EXIST WITH FACTITIOUS DISORDER

DisorderPossible issue
MedicalCoexisting medical disease
DelusionalSomatic delusions
DepressiveSomatic complaints, dependency on staff
Chemical dependencyPrescription drug abuse
Eating disordersPersistent vomiting, weight loss
Obsessive-compulsive disorderSomatic obsessions
HypochondriasisConviction one is unwell
Pain disordersPain complaints
MalingeringSeeking shelter in hospital
Source: Adapted from Folks et al. Somatoform disorders, factitious disorders, and malingering.
In: Stoudemire A, Fogel B, Greenberg D, eds. Psychiatric care of the medical patient (2nd ed). New York: Oxford University Press, 2000:458-75.
 

 

Case report

For the patient with chronic knee infections, the staff psychiatrist recommended that the orthopedist develop a collaborative relationship with her. Eventually the surgeon told her that she needed psychiatric care, and the patient agreed to psychiatric hospitalization.

In this setting, she was initially observed with a 24-hour monitor and received appropriate wound care. The staff encouraged her to talk about the emotional distress related to having a chronic disease. She never admitted to perpetuating the infections in her knees, although she was suspected of injecting herself with infected material. Psychiatric evaluation revealed a history of multiple strained relationships that suggested a severe personality disorder.

Her wounds slowly began to improve, and she was discharged after 2 weeks. Throughout her stay, she remained reluctant to discuss her relationship with her husband or examine other possible sources of stress in her life. Thus, factitious behavior will probably recur unless she tackles her unconscious motivations for adopting a patient role.

If patients’ emotional needs are being met, they may reveal the mechanism of their disease. Unfortunately, experience suggests that very few confess the false nature of their medical illness, fewer accept psychiatric treatment, and even fewer complete the recommended course of treatment.

Comorbid psychiatric disorders provide an opportunity to intervene with selected medications and psychotherapy to reduce patient distress. Chemical dependency treatment in particular can help stabilize a patient with a factitious disorder so that he or she no longer seeks pain medications or sedatives. Patients with an obsessive-compulsive disorder or hypochondriasis may require specifically targeted cognitive-behavioral therapy or pharmacotherapy.

Few references regarding treatment of factitious disorder exist; the only known review of cognitive-behavioral therapy’s role in treating this disorder awaits publication.

Related resources

  • Sutherland AJ, Rodin GM. Factitious disorders in a general hospital setting: clinical features and a review of the literature. Psychosomatics 1990;31(4):392-9.
  • Reich P, Gottfried LA. Factitious disorders in a teaching hospital. Ann Intern Med 1983;99(2):240-7.
References

1. American Psychiatric Association Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders (4th ed). Washington DC: American Psychiatric Association, 1994-886.

2. Folks D, Feldman M, Ford C. Somatoform disorders, factitious disorders, and malingering. In: Stoudemire A, Fogel B, Greenberg D, eds. Psychiatric care of the medical patient (2nd ed). New York: Oxford University Press, 2000;458-75.

3. Wallach J. Laboratory diagnosis of factitious disorders. Arch Intern Med 1994;154:1690-6.

4. Asher R. Munchausen’s syndrome. Lancet 1951;1:339-41.

5. Eisendrath S. Factitious physical disorders treatment without confrontation. Psychosomatics 1990;31:357-8.

6. Krahn L, Lee J, Martin MJ, Richardson J, O’Connor M. Hypokalemia leading to torsades de pointes: Munchausen’s syndrome versus bulimia nervosa. Gen Hosp Psychiatry 1997;19:370-7.

References

1. American Psychiatric Association Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders (4th ed). Washington DC: American Psychiatric Association, 1994-886.

2. Folks D, Feldman M, Ford C. Somatoform disorders, factitious disorders, and malingering. In: Stoudemire A, Fogel B, Greenberg D, eds. Psychiatric care of the medical patient (2nd ed). New York: Oxford University Press, 2000;458-75.

3. Wallach J. Laboratory diagnosis of factitious disorders. Arch Intern Med 1994;154:1690-6.

4. Asher R. Munchausen’s syndrome. Lancet 1951;1:339-41.

5. Eisendrath S. Factitious physical disorders treatment without confrontation. Psychosomatics 1990;31:357-8.

6. Krahn L, Lee J, Martin MJ, Richardson J, O’Connor M. Hypokalemia leading to torsades de pointes: Munchausen’s syndrome versus bulimia nervosa. Gen Hosp Psychiatry 1997;19:370-7.

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(02)
Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(02)
Page Number
47-56
Page Number
47-56
Publications
Publications
Article Type
Display Headline
Factitious disorder: What to do when someone plays sick
Display Headline
Factitious disorder: What to do when someone plays sick
Sections
Article Source

PURLs Copyright

Inside the Article

Article PDF Media

Factitious disorder: What to do when someone plays sick

Article Type
Changed
Tue, 12/11/2018 - 15:12
Display Headline
Factitious disorder: What to do when someone plays sick

An orthopedic surgeon treating a patient, age 29, at a tertiary medical center asks a staff psychiatrist for advice. The patient—who has chronic bilateral knee infections—lives 350 miles away; her treatment-resistant disease has stymied and frustrated her local physicians. Her infections have persisted despite multiple courses of antibiotics and numerous surgical procedures.

Because of damage to the right knee joint, she cannot bear weight or walk. A registered nurse, she has been unable to work or care for her school-aged children for 2 years. The surgeon tells the psychiatrist that the patient denies psychiatric complaints beyond sadness over her inability to fulfill her responsibilities. She expresses a wish to recover and adamantly denies that she manipulates her wound or does anything to interfere with its healing. The medical/surgical team has noticed that while she is away from home receiving orthopedic care, her husband never visits or calls.

Cases such as the one described above are rare, but psychiatrists occasionally encounter patients with these baffling characteristics. When the patient’s disease fails to respond to treatment as expected—or progresses—members of the medical/psychiatric team need to ask themselves these questions:

  • Are we dealing with a drug-resistant infection?
  • Is the patient adhering fully with treatment?
  • Does the patient do anything to perpetuate this disease process and wish to stay ill?

Asking this last question is difficult but necessary in certain situations. Most of us cannot imagine why a person would wish to remain sick. Why would someone be willing to endure pain and multiple hospital stays, remain isolated from family, and risk a permanent disability? Yet, an unknown number of people strive to appear unwell so that they can receive ongoing medical care.

What are factitious disorders?

Factitious disorders are psychiatric conditions in which patients deliberately portray themselves as ill. They may present with physical or psychological symptoms or both. Their objective is to assume the sick role—not to procure shelter, obtain financial assistance, avoid prison, etc., which would fall into other diagnoses such as malingering.

Table 1

DSM-IV DIAGNOSTIC CRITERIA FOR FACTITIOUS DISORDER

  1. Intentional production or feigning of physical or psychological signs or symptoms.
  2. The motivation for behaviors is to assume the sick role.
  3. External incentives for the behaviors (such as economic gain, avoiding legal responsibility, or improving physical well-being, as in malingering) are absent.
Types
  • With predominantly psychological signs and symptoms
  • With predominantly physical signs and symptoms
  • With combined psychological and physical signs and symptoms
Source: DSM-IV-TR

DSM-IV criteria are straightforward and inclusive (Table 1).1 They do not specify:

  • the presence of medical and/or psychiatric disorders, which do not preclude the diagnosis
  • reasons why a person may wish to assume the sick role.

The medical literature on factitious disorder includes many compelling case reports. However, the secretive nature of most patients with factitious complaints has made it difficult to conduct carefully designed community-based studies, prospective studies, or controlled randomized trials. Because research is scarce, much is unknown about who gets factitious disorder, what causes it, and how to treat it.

Differential diagnosis

Factitious disorder varies in severity. Among subtypes proposed by Folks et al (Table 2),2 patients in categories 3, 4, and 5—who produce physical illness—can potentially be identified by diagnostic testing.3 Patients in categories 1 and 2—who exaggerate physical symptoms and provide a false medical history—may be more difficult to detect.

In cases where patients exaggerate symptoms or fabricate histories, little objective information is typically available to the treating physicians. Medical records revealing multiple admissions or emergency room visits may be obtained from other institutions only if the patient gives permission. However, the patient often does not consent or the materials cannot be located.

Third-party payers’ pre-authorization procedures and utilization reviews may speak volumes about a patient’s search for health care. However, patients who are unemployed or estranged from spouses may lose insurance coverage over time. Government assistance programs such as Medicare and Medicaid provide care to many patients with these chronic problems and do not perform the same degree of utilization review.

Munchausen disorder—a variant of factitious disorder—is not recognized by DSM-IV. The term—while still used primarily by nonpsychiatrists—is generally viewed as outdated. The term is reserved for patients with the most severe and chronic form of factitious disorder.4 The few studies done of patients with this variant have not adequately examined the specificity and sensitivity of their core symptoms or other characteristics, such as production of a misleading medical condition, travel to multiple medical centers (peregrination), and the telling of tall tales (pseudologia fantastica).

Somatoform disorder. If physicians suspect that a patient’s illness is taking an unusual course, they may suspect a somatoform rather than factitious disorder. Patients with somatoform disorder do not intentionally produce their symptoms, whereas patients with factitious disorder deliberately try to appear ill. In both disorders, the underlying cause is unconscious.

 

 

Hypochondriasis. Patients with hypochondriasis are obsessed with concerns that they have an illness. Their worries may compel them to seek out examinations and diagnostic tests. Unlike patients with factitious disorder, these patients do not deliberately provide information or manufacture symptoms to create the appearance of a medical disorder.

Malingering. Patients who malinger may engage in deceitful behaviors that can include creating a misleading impression about a medical or psychiatric illness. Being a patient, however, is not their objective. They may be seeking disability payments, insurance settlements, shelter, or food.

Patient evaluation

Patients suspected of factitious disorder merit a thorough medical and psychiatric evaluation, guided by their presenting symptoms. They commonly have comorbid psychiatric disorders (Table 3), which medical/surgical team members and the psychiatrist need to identify before considering a diagnosis of factitious disorder.

Because invasive tests such as angiography, colonoscopy, biopsies, or exploratory surgery are required to exclude some underlying medical processes, the treatment team must take care not to cause harm. The expected benefits of diagnostic testing must be balanced against the risks of an iatrogenic event.

Table 2

FIVE PROPOSED SUBTYPES OF FACTITIOUS DISORDER

CharacteristicExamples
May be most difficult to detect
1. Exaggerates physical symptoms
2. Provides a false medical history
An epileptic patient has a seizure while EEG is normal
Describes a fictitious history of cancer
Can potentially be identified by diagnostic testing
3. Simulates physical symptoms
4. Modifies physiology to create physical signs
5. Induces physical illness
Puts gravel into urine sample
Exerts oneself before vital signs test to elevate blood pressure
Injects foreign material into a surgical wound to slow healing
Source: Adapted from Folks et al.2

Relatively little is known about how to diagnose a factitious process coexisting with a genuine medical disorder. For example, a patient with well-documented chronic inflammatory disease may easily exaggerate pain and diarrhea to facilitate hospital admission.

To confront or not to confront?

Some patients may relish the patient role for a time—such as while being evaluated for a presumed opportunistic infection—but may not consent to more definitive tests—such as HIV testing. They may demand discharge while they still may be harming themselves, such as by injecting foreign material. The patient may plan to find another health care provider and continue the maladaptive behavior.

If you suspected that our case patient was playing a role in perpetuating her chronic knee infections, would you confront her with the evidence? The answer is unclear, but some experts argue against confrontation.5 Once a patient believes that the medical team suspects a factitious process, he or she may no longer wish to cooperate, even if the diagnostic evaluation is incomplete. Patients often become more guarded about what they reveal after they are confronted. They may become more careful to hide evidence of wound tampering (e.g., syringes) and hesitant to discuss emotional issues (e.g., estranged relationships, feeling overwhelmed by work and home duties).

Case reports suggest that patients who simulate symptoms, modify their physiology, or induce physical illness are at high risk of morbidity and mortality. For example, one report described a patient who underwent two cardiopulmonary resuscitations because of torsades de pointes triggered by hypokalemia related to covert laxative use.6 Physicians must manage these cases carefully to reduce patient risk. In rare cases where a patient’s behavior becomes life-threatening, admission to a psychiatric unit—even involuntarily—may be necessary.

Collaborating with the patient

A comprehensive treatment approach is optimal for patients with factitious disorder. All the patient’s objective medical disorders should be addressed in systematically and with empathy. Treating a co-existing medical disorder may help the physician gain the patient’s trust, which in turn can help keep treatment options open.

Some patients have been known to exaggerate their physical symptoms because they feel they have a serious, undiagnosed medical problem. They feel that their assessment has been cursory and that they need to compel the physician to do a more thorough evaluation in order to identify the true underlying problem. Although no research supports this observation, these patients may be reassured when their physicians carefully evaluate their medical problems.

Eisendrath5 recommends that the treatment team take time to get to know the patient and convey that this attention is devoted to the person, not just the medical illness. This approach may increase the likelihood of learning about psychosocial issues the person may be trying to resolve by taking the patient role. Patients also may be more willing to complete the evaluation and adhere to recommended treatment, although these outcomes are not guaranteed.

Table 3

DISORDERS KNOWN TO CO-EXIST WITH FACTITIOUS DISORDER

DisorderPossible issue
MedicalCoexisting medical disease
DelusionalSomatic delusions
DepressiveSomatic complaints, dependency on staff
Chemical dependencyPrescription drug abuse
Eating disordersPersistent vomiting, weight loss
Obsessive-compulsive disorderSomatic obsessions
HypochondriasisConviction one is unwell
Pain disordersPain complaints
MalingeringSeeking shelter in hospital
Source: Adapted from Folks et al. Somatoform disorders, factitious disorders, and malingering.
In: Stoudemire A, Fogel B, Greenberg D, eds. Psychiatric care of the medical patient (2nd ed). New York: Oxford University Press, 2000:458-75.
 

 

Case report

For the patient with chronic knee infections, the staff psychiatrist recommended that the orthopedist develop a collaborative relationship with her. Eventually the surgeon told her that she needed psychiatric care, and the patient agreed to psychiatric hospitalization.

In this setting, she was initially observed with a 24-hour monitor and received appropriate wound care. The staff encouraged her to talk about the emotional distress related to having a chronic disease. She never admitted to perpetuating the infections in her knees, although she was suspected of injecting herself with infected material. Psychiatric evaluation revealed a history of multiple strained relationships that suggested a severe personality disorder.

Her wounds slowly began to improve, and she was discharged after 2 weeks. Throughout her stay, she remained reluctant to discuss her relationship with her husband or examine other possible sources of stress in her life. Thus, factitious behavior will probably recur unless she tackles her unconscious motivations for adopting a patient role.

If patients’ emotional needs are being met, they may reveal the mechanism of their disease. Unfortunately, experience suggests that very few confess the false nature of their medical illness, fewer accept psychiatric treatment, and even fewer complete the recommended course of treatment.

Comorbid psychiatric disorders provide an opportunity to intervene with selected medications and psychotherapy to reduce patient distress. Chemical dependency treatment in particular can help stabilize a patient with a factitious disorder so that he or she no longer seeks pain medications or sedatives. Patients with an obsessive-compulsive disorder or hypochondriasis may require specifically targeted cognitive-behavioral therapy or pharmacotherapy.

Few references regarding treatment of factitious disorder exist; the only known review of cognitive-behavioral therapy’s role in treating this disorder awaits publication.

Related resources

  • Sutherland AJ, Rodin GM. Factitious disorders in a general hospital setting: clinical features and a review of the literature. Psychosomatics 1990;31(4):392-9.
  • Reich P, Gottfried LA. Factitious disorders in a teaching hospital. Ann Intern Med 1983;99(2):240-7.
References

1. American Psychiatric Association Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders (4th ed). Washington DC: American Psychiatric Association, 1994-886.

2. Folks D, Feldman M, Ford C. Somatoform disorders, factitious disorders, and malingering. In: Stoudemire A, Fogel B, Greenberg D, eds. Psychiatric care of the medical patient (2nd ed). New York: Oxford University Press, 2000;458-75.

3. Wallach J. Laboratory diagnosis of factitious disorders. Arch Intern Med 1994;154:1690-6.

4. Asher R. Munchausen’s syndrome. Lancet 1951;1:339-41.

5. Eisendrath S. Factitious physical disorders treatment without confrontation. Psychosomatics 1990;31:357-8.

6. Krahn L, Lee J, Martin MJ, Richardson J, O’Connor M. Hypokalemia leading to torsades de pointes: Munchausen’s syndrome versus bulimia nervosa. Gen Hosp Psychiatry 1997;19:370-7.

Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

Lois E. Krahn, MD
Associate professor Department of psychiatry & psychology Mayo Clinic and Mayo Medical School Rochester, MN

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(02)
Publications
Page Number
47-56
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

Lois E. Krahn, MD
Associate professor Department of psychiatry & psychology Mayo Clinic and Mayo Medical School Rochester, MN

Author and Disclosure Information

Lois E. Krahn, MD
Associate professor Department of psychiatry & psychology Mayo Clinic and Mayo Medical School Rochester, MN

Article PDF
Article PDF

An orthopedic surgeon treating a patient, age 29, at a tertiary medical center asks a staff psychiatrist for advice. The patient—who has chronic bilateral knee infections—lives 350 miles away; her treatment-resistant disease has stymied and frustrated her local physicians. Her infections have persisted despite multiple courses of antibiotics and numerous surgical procedures.

Because of damage to the right knee joint, she cannot bear weight or walk. A registered nurse, she has been unable to work or care for her school-aged children for 2 years. The surgeon tells the psychiatrist that the patient denies psychiatric complaints beyond sadness over her inability to fulfill her responsibilities. She expresses a wish to recover and adamantly denies that she manipulates her wound or does anything to interfere with its healing. The medical/surgical team has noticed that while she is away from home receiving orthopedic care, her husband never visits or calls.

Cases such as the one described above are rare, but psychiatrists occasionally encounter patients with these baffling characteristics. When the patient’s disease fails to respond to treatment as expected—or progresses—members of the medical/psychiatric team need to ask themselves these questions:

  • Are we dealing with a drug-resistant infection?
  • Is the patient adhering fully with treatment?
  • Does the patient do anything to perpetuate this disease process and wish to stay ill?

Asking this last question is difficult but necessary in certain situations. Most of us cannot imagine why a person would wish to remain sick. Why would someone be willing to endure pain and multiple hospital stays, remain isolated from family, and risk a permanent disability? Yet, an unknown number of people strive to appear unwell so that they can receive ongoing medical care.

What are factitious disorders?

Factitious disorders are psychiatric conditions in which patients deliberately portray themselves as ill. They may present with physical or psychological symptoms or both. Their objective is to assume the sick role—not to procure shelter, obtain financial assistance, avoid prison, etc., which would fall into other diagnoses such as malingering.

Table 1

DSM-IV DIAGNOSTIC CRITERIA FOR FACTITIOUS DISORDER

  1. Intentional production or feigning of physical or psychological signs or symptoms.
  2. The motivation for behaviors is to assume the sick role.
  3. External incentives for the behaviors (such as economic gain, avoiding legal responsibility, or improving physical well-being, as in malingering) are absent.
Types
  • With predominantly psychological signs and symptoms
  • With predominantly physical signs and symptoms
  • With combined psychological and physical signs and symptoms
Source: DSM-IV-TR

DSM-IV criteria are straightforward and inclusive (Table 1).1 They do not specify:

  • the presence of medical and/or psychiatric disorders, which do not preclude the diagnosis
  • reasons why a person may wish to assume the sick role.

The medical literature on factitious disorder includes many compelling case reports. However, the secretive nature of most patients with factitious complaints has made it difficult to conduct carefully designed community-based studies, prospective studies, or controlled randomized trials. Because research is scarce, much is unknown about who gets factitious disorder, what causes it, and how to treat it.

Differential diagnosis

Factitious disorder varies in severity. Among subtypes proposed by Folks et al (Table 2),2 patients in categories 3, 4, and 5—who produce physical illness—can potentially be identified by diagnostic testing.3 Patients in categories 1 and 2—who exaggerate physical symptoms and provide a false medical history—may be more difficult to detect.

In cases where patients exaggerate symptoms or fabricate histories, little objective information is typically available to the treating physicians. Medical records revealing multiple admissions or emergency room visits may be obtained from other institutions only if the patient gives permission. However, the patient often does not consent or the materials cannot be located.

Third-party payers’ pre-authorization procedures and utilization reviews may speak volumes about a patient’s search for health care. However, patients who are unemployed or estranged from spouses may lose insurance coverage over time. Government assistance programs such as Medicare and Medicaid provide care to many patients with these chronic problems and do not perform the same degree of utilization review.

Munchausen disorder—a variant of factitious disorder—is not recognized by DSM-IV. The term—while still used primarily by nonpsychiatrists—is generally viewed as outdated. The term is reserved for patients with the most severe and chronic form of factitious disorder.4 The few studies done of patients with this variant have not adequately examined the specificity and sensitivity of their core symptoms or other characteristics, such as production of a misleading medical condition, travel to multiple medical centers (peregrination), and the telling of tall tales (pseudologia fantastica).

Somatoform disorder. If physicians suspect that a patient’s illness is taking an unusual course, they may suspect a somatoform rather than factitious disorder. Patients with somatoform disorder do not intentionally produce their symptoms, whereas patients with factitious disorder deliberately try to appear ill. In both disorders, the underlying cause is unconscious.

 

 

Hypochondriasis. Patients with hypochondriasis are obsessed with concerns that they have an illness. Their worries may compel them to seek out examinations and diagnostic tests. Unlike patients with factitious disorder, these patients do not deliberately provide information or manufacture symptoms to create the appearance of a medical disorder.

Malingering. Patients who malinger may engage in deceitful behaviors that can include creating a misleading impression about a medical or psychiatric illness. Being a patient, however, is not their objective. They may be seeking disability payments, insurance settlements, shelter, or food.

Patient evaluation

Patients suspected of factitious disorder merit a thorough medical and psychiatric evaluation, guided by their presenting symptoms. They commonly have comorbid psychiatric disorders (Table 3), which medical/surgical team members and the psychiatrist need to identify before considering a diagnosis of factitious disorder.

Because invasive tests such as angiography, colonoscopy, biopsies, or exploratory surgery are required to exclude some underlying medical processes, the treatment team must take care not to cause harm. The expected benefits of diagnostic testing must be balanced against the risks of an iatrogenic event.

Table 2

FIVE PROPOSED SUBTYPES OF FACTITIOUS DISORDER

CharacteristicExamples
May be most difficult to detect
1. Exaggerates physical symptoms
2. Provides a false medical history
An epileptic patient has a seizure while EEG is normal
Describes a fictitious history of cancer
Can potentially be identified by diagnostic testing
3. Simulates physical symptoms
4. Modifies physiology to create physical signs
5. Induces physical illness
Puts gravel into urine sample
Exerts oneself before vital signs test to elevate blood pressure
Injects foreign material into a surgical wound to slow healing
Source: Adapted from Folks et al.2

Relatively little is known about how to diagnose a factitious process coexisting with a genuine medical disorder. For example, a patient with well-documented chronic inflammatory disease may easily exaggerate pain and diarrhea to facilitate hospital admission.

To confront or not to confront?

Some patients may relish the patient role for a time—such as while being evaluated for a presumed opportunistic infection—but may not consent to more definitive tests—such as HIV testing. They may demand discharge while they still may be harming themselves, such as by injecting foreign material. The patient may plan to find another health care provider and continue the maladaptive behavior.

If you suspected that our case patient was playing a role in perpetuating her chronic knee infections, would you confront her with the evidence? The answer is unclear, but some experts argue against confrontation.5 Once a patient believes that the medical team suspects a factitious process, he or she may no longer wish to cooperate, even if the diagnostic evaluation is incomplete. Patients often become more guarded about what they reveal after they are confronted. They may become more careful to hide evidence of wound tampering (e.g., syringes) and hesitant to discuss emotional issues (e.g., estranged relationships, feeling overwhelmed by work and home duties).

Case reports suggest that patients who simulate symptoms, modify their physiology, or induce physical illness are at high risk of morbidity and mortality. For example, one report described a patient who underwent two cardiopulmonary resuscitations because of torsades de pointes triggered by hypokalemia related to covert laxative use.6 Physicians must manage these cases carefully to reduce patient risk. In rare cases where a patient’s behavior becomes life-threatening, admission to a psychiatric unit—even involuntarily—may be necessary.

Collaborating with the patient

A comprehensive treatment approach is optimal for patients with factitious disorder. All the patient’s objective medical disorders should be addressed in systematically and with empathy. Treating a co-existing medical disorder may help the physician gain the patient’s trust, which in turn can help keep treatment options open.

Some patients have been known to exaggerate their physical symptoms because they feel they have a serious, undiagnosed medical problem. They feel that their assessment has been cursory and that they need to compel the physician to do a more thorough evaluation in order to identify the true underlying problem. Although no research supports this observation, these patients may be reassured when their physicians carefully evaluate their medical problems.

Eisendrath5 recommends that the treatment team take time to get to know the patient and convey that this attention is devoted to the person, not just the medical illness. This approach may increase the likelihood of learning about psychosocial issues the person may be trying to resolve by taking the patient role. Patients also may be more willing to complete the evaluation and adhere to recommended treatment, although these outcomes are not guaranteed.

Table 3

DISORDERS KNOWN TO CO-EXIST WITH FACTITIOUS DISORDER

DisorderPossible issue
MedicalCoexisting medical disease
DelusionalSomatic delusions
DepressiveSomatic complaints, dependency on staff
Chemical dependencyPrescription drug abuse
Eating disordersPersistent vomiting, weight loss
Obsessive-compulsive disorderSomatic obsessions
HypochondriasisConviction one is unwell
Pain disordersPain complaints
MalingeringSeeking shelter in hospital
Source: Adapted from Folks et al. Somatoform disorders, factitious disorders, and malingering.
In: Stoudemire A, Fogel B, Greenberg D, eds. Psychiatric care of the medical patient (2nd ed). New York: Oxford University Press, 2000:458-75.
 

 

Case report

For the patient with chronic knee infections, the staff psychiatrist recommended that the orthopedist develop a collaborative relationship with her. Eventually the surgeon told her that she needed psychiatric care, and the patient agreed to psychiatric hospitalization.

In this setting, she was initially observed with a 24-hour monitor and received appropriate wound care. The staff encouraged her to talk about the emotional distress related to having a chronic disease. She never admitted to perpetuating the infections in her knees, although she was suspected of injecting herself with infected material. Psychiatric evaluation revealed a history of multiple strained relationships that suggested a severe personality disorder.

Her wounds slowly began to improve, and she was discharged after 2 weeks. Throughout her stay, she remained reluctant to discuss her relationship with her husband or examine other possible sources of stress in her life. Thus, factitious behavior will probably recur unless she tackles her unconscious motivations for adopting a patient role.

If patients’ emotional needs are being met, they may reveal the mechanism of their disease. Unfortunately, experience suggests that very few confess the false nature of their medical illness, fewer accept psychiatric treatment, and even fewer complete the recommended course of treatment.

Comorbid psychiatric disorders provide an opportunity to intervene with selected medications and psychotherapy to reduce patient distress. Chemical dependency treatment in particular can help stabilize a patient with a factitious disorder so that he or she no longer seeks pain medications or sedatives. Patients with an obsessive-compulsive disorder or hypochondriasis may require specifically targeted cognitive-behavioral therapy or pharmacotherapy.

Few references regarding treatment of factitious disorder exist; the only known review of cognitive-behavioral therapy’s role in treating this disorder awaits publication.

Related resources

  • Sutherland AJ, Rodin GM. Factitious disorders in a general hospital setting: clinical features and a review of the literature. Psychosomatics 1990;31(4):392-9.
  • Reich P, Gottfried LA. Factitious disorders in a teaching hospital. Ann Intern Med 1983;99(2):240-7.

An orthopedic surgeon treating a patient, age 29, at a tertiary medical center asks a staff psychiatrist for advice. The patient—who has chronic bilateral knee infections—lives 350 miles away; her treatment-resistant disease has stymied and frustrated her local physicians. Her infections have persisted despite multiple courses of antibiotics and numerous surgical procedures.

Because of damage to the right knee joint, she cannot bear weight or walk. A registered nurse, she has been unable to work or care for her school-aged children for 2 years. The surgeon tells the psychiatrist that the patient denies psychiatric complaints beyond sadness over her inability to fulfill her responsibilities. She expresses a wish to recover and adamantly denies that she manipulates her wound or does anything to interfere with its healing. The medical/surgical team has noticed that while she is away from home receiving orthopedic care, her husband never visits or calls.

Cases such as the one described above are rare, but psychiatrists occasionally encounter patients with these baffling characteristics. When the patient’s disease fails to respond to treatment as expected—or progresses—members of the medical/psychiatric team need to ask themselves these questions:

  • Are we dealing with a drug-resistant infection?
  • Is the patient adhering fully with treatment?
  • Does the patient do anything to perpetuate this disease process and wish to stay ill?

Asking this last question is difficult but necessary in certain situations. Most of us cannot imagine why a person would wish to remain sick. Why would someone be willing to endure pain and multiple hospital stays, remain isolated from family, and risk a permanent disability? Yet, an unknown number of people strive to appear unwell so that they can receive ongoing medical care.

What are factitious disorders?

Factitious disorders are psychiatric conditions in which patients deliberately portray themselves as ill. They may present with physical or psychological symptoms or both. Their objective is to assume the sick role—not to procure shelter, obtain financial assistance, avoid prison, etc., which would fall into other diagnoses such as malingering.

Table 1

DSM-IV DIAGNOSTIC CRITERIA FOR FACTITIOUS DISORDER

  1. Intentional production or feigning of physical or psychological signs or symptoms.
  2. The motivation for behaviors is to assume the sick role.
  3. External incentives for the behaviors (such as economic gain, avoiding legal responsibility, or improving physical well-being, as in malingering) are absent.
Types
  • With predominantly psychological signs and symptoms
  • With predominantly physical signs and symptoms
  • With combined psychological and physical signs and symptoms
Source: DSM-IV-TR

DSM-IV criteria are straightforward and inclusive (Table 1).1 They do not specify:

  • the presence of medical and/or psychiatric disorders, which do not preclude the diagnosis
  • reasons why a person may wish to assume the sick role.

The medical literature on factitious disorder includes many compelling case reports. However, the secretive nature of most patients with factitious complaints has made it difficult to conduct carefully designed community-based studies, prospective studies, or controlled randomized trials. Because research is scarce, much is unknown about who gets factitious disorder, what causes it, and how to treat it.

Differential diagnosis

Factitious disorder varies in severity. Among subtypes proposed by Folks et al (Table 2),2 patients in categories 3, 4, and 5—who produce physical illness—can potentially be identified by diagnostic testing.3 Patients in categories 1 and 2—who exaggerate physical symptoms and provide a false medical history—may be more difficult to detect.

In cases where patients exaggerate symptoms or fabricate histories, little objective information is typically available to the treating physicians. Medical records revealing multiple admissions or emergency room visits may be obtained from other institutions only if the patient gives permission. However, the patient often does not consent or the materials cannot be located.

Third-party payers’ pre-authorization procedures and utilization reviews may speak volumes about a patient’s search for health care. However, patients who are unemployed or estranged from spouses may lose insurance coverage over time. Government assistance programs such as Medicare and Medicaid provide care to many patients with these chronic problems and do not perform the same degree of utilization review.

Munchausen disorder—a variant of factitious disorder—is not recognized by DSM-IV. The term—while still used primarily by nonpsychiatrists—is generally viewed as outdated. The term is reserved for patients with the most severe and chronic form of factitious disorder.4 The few studies done of patients with this variant have not adequately examined the specificity and sensitivity of their core symptoms or other characteristics, such as production of a misleading medical condition, travel to multiple medical centers (peregrination), and the telling of tall tales (pseudologia fantastica).

Somatoform disorder. If physicians suspect that a patient’s illness is taking an unusual course, they may suspect a somatoform rather than factitious disorder. Patients with somatoform disorder do not intentionally produce their symptoms, whereas patients with factitious disorder deliberately try to appear ill. In both disorders, the underlying cause is unconscious.

 

 

Hypochondriasis. Patients with hypochondriasis are obsessed with concerns that they have an illness. Their worries may compel them to seek out examinations and diagnostic tests. Unlike patients with factitious disorder, these patients do not deliberately provide information or manufacture symptoms to create the appearance of a medical disorder.

Malingering. Patients who malinger may engage in deceitful behaviors that can include creating a misleading impression about a medical or psychiatric illness. Being a patient, however, is not their objective. They may be seeking disability payments, insurance settlements, shelter, or food.

Patient evaluation

Patients suspected of factitious disorder merit a thorough medical and psychiatric evaluation, guided by their presenting symptoms. They commonly have comorbid psychiatric disorders (Table 3), which medical/surgical team members and the psychiatrist need to identify before considering a diagnosis of factitious disorder.

Because invasive tests such as angiography, colonoscopy, biopsies, or exploratory surgery are required to exclude some underlying medical processes, the treatment team must take care not to cause harm. The expected benefits of diagnostic testing must be balanced against the risks of an iatrogenic event.

Table 2

FIVE PROPOSED SUBTYPES OF FACTITIOUS DISORDER

CharacteristicExamples
May be most difficult to detect
1. Exaggerates physical symptoms
2. Provides a false medical history
An epileptic patient has a seizure while EEG is normal
Describes a fictitious history of cancer
Can potentially be identified by diagnostic testing
3. Simulates physical symptoms
4. Modifies physiology to create physical signs
5. Induces physical illness
Puts gravel into urine sample
Exerts oneself before vital signs test to elevate blood pressure
Injects foreign material into a surgical wound to slow healing
Source: Adapted from Folks et al.2

Relatively little is known about how to diagnose a factitious process coexisting with a genuine medical disorder. For example, a patient with well-documented chronic inflammatory disease may easily exaggerate pain and diarrhea to facilitate hospital admission.

To confront or not to confront?

Some patients may relish the patient role for a time—such as while being evaluated for a presumed opportunistic infection—but may not consent to more definitive tests—such as HIV testing. They may demand discharge while they still may be harming themselves, such as by injecting foreign material. The patient may plan to find another health care provider and continue the maladaptive behavior.

If you suspected that our case patient was playing a role in perpetuating her chronic knee infections, would you confront her with the evidence? The answer is unclear, but some experts argue against confrontation.5 Once a patient believes that the medical team suspects a factitious process, he or she may no longer wish to cooperate, even if the diagnostic evaluation is incomplete. Patients often become more guarded about what they reveal after they are confronted. They may become more careful to hide evidence of wound tampering (e.g., syringes) and hesitant to discuss emotional issues (e.g., estranged relationships, feeling overwhelmed by work and home duties).

Case reports suggest that patients who simulate symptoms, modify their physiology, or induce physical illness are at high risk of morbidity and mortality. For example, one report described a patient who underwent two cardiopulmonary resuscitations because of torsades de pointes triggered by hypokalemia related to covert laxative use.6 Physicians must manage these cases carefully to reduce patient risk. In rare cases where a patient’s behavior becomes life-threatening, admission to a psychiatric unit—even involuntarily—may be necessary.

Collaborating with the patient

A comprehensive treatment approach is optimal for patients with factitious disorder. All the patient’s objective medical disorders should be addressed in systematically and with empathy. Treating a co-existing medical disorder may help the physician gain the patient’s trust, which in turn can help keep treatment options open.

Some patients have been known to exaggerate their physical symptoms because they feel they have a serious, undiagnosed medical problem. They feel that their assessment has been cursory and that they need to compel the physician to do a more thorough evaluation in order to identify the true underlying problem. Although no research supports this observation, these patients may be reassured when their physicians carefully evaluate their medical problems.

Eisendrath5 recommends that the treatment team take time to get to know the patient and convey that this attention is devoted to the person, not just the medical illness. This approach may increase the likelihood of learning about psychosocial issues the person may be trying to resolve by taking the patient role. Patients also may be more willing to complete the evaluation and adhere to recommended treatment, although these outcomes are not guaranteed.

Table 3

DISORDERS KNOWN TO CO-EXIST WITH FACTITIOUS DISORDER

DisorderPossible issue
MedicalCoexisting medical disease
DelusionalSomatic delusions
DepressiveSomatic complaints, dependency on staff
Chemical dependencyPrescription drug abuse
Eating disordersPersistent vomiting, weight loss
Obsessive-compulsive disorderSomatic obsessions
HypochondriasisConviction one is unwell
Pain disordersPain complaints
MalingeringSeeking shelter in hospital
Source: Adapted from Folks et al. Somatoform disorders, factitious disorders, and malingering.
In: Stoudemire A, Fogel B, Greenberg D, eds. Psychiatric care of the medical patient (2nd ed). New York: Oxford University Press, 2000:458-75.
 

 

Case report

For the patient with chronic knee infections, the staff psychiatrist recommended that the orthopedist develop a collaborative relationship with her. Eventually the surgeon told her that she needed psychiatric care, and the patient agreed to psychiatric hospitalization.

In this setting, she was initially observed with a 24-hour monitor and received appropriate wound care. The staff encouraged her to talk about the emotional distress related to having a chronic disease. She never admitted to perpetuating the infections in her knees, although she was suspected of injecting herself with infected material. Psychiatric evaluation revealed a history of multiple strained relationships that suggested a severe personality disorder.

Her wounds slowly began to improve, and she was discharged after 2 weeks. Throughout her stay, she remained reluctant to discuss her relationship with her husband or examine other possible sources of stress in her life. Thus, factitious behavior will probably recur unless she tackles her unconscious motivations for adopting a patient role.

If patients’ emotional needs are being met, they may reveal the mechanism of their disease. Unfortunately, experience suggests that very few confess the false nature of their medical illness, fewer accept psychiatric treatment, and even fewer complete the recommended course of treatment.

Comorbid psychiatric disorders provide an opportunity to intervene with selected medications and psychotherapy to reduce patient distress. Chemical dependency treatment in particular can help stabilize a patient with a factitious disorder so that he or she no longer seeks pain medications or sedatives. Patients with an obsessive-compulsive disorder or hypochondriasis may require specifically targeted cognitive-behavioral therapy or pharmacotherapy.

Few references regarding treatment of factitious disorder exist; the only known review of cognitive-behavioral therapy’s role in treating this disorder awaits publication.

Related resources

  • Sutherland AJ, Rodin GM. Factitious disorders in a general hospital setting: clinical features and a review of the literature. Psychosomatics 1990;31(4):392-9.
  • Reich P, Gottfried LA. Factitious disorders in a teaching hospital. Ann Intern Med 1983;99(2):240-7.
References

1. American Psychiatric Association Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders (4th ed). Washington DC: American Psychiatric Association, 1994-886.

2. Folks D, Feldman M, Ford C. Somatoform disorders, factitious disorders, and malingering. In: Stoudemire A, Fogel B, Greenberg D, eds. Psychiatric care of the medical patient (2nd ed). New York: Oxford University Press, 2000;458-75.

3. Wallach J. Laboratory diagnosis of factitious disorders. Arch Intern Med 1994;154:1690-6.

4. Asher R. Munchausen’s syndrome. Lancet 1951;1:339-41.

5. Eisendrath S. Factitious physical disorders treatment without confrontation. Psychosomatics 1990;31:357-8.

6. Krahn L, Lee J, Martin MJ, Richardson J, O’Connor M. Hypokalemia leading to torsades de pointes: Munchausen’s syndrome versus bulimia nervosa. Gen Hosp Psychiatry 1997;19:370-7.

References

1. American Psychiatric Association Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders (4th ed). Washington DC: American Psychiatric Association, 1994-886.

2. Folks D, Feldman M, Ford C. Somatoform disorders, factitious disorders, and malingering. In: Stoudemire A, Fogel B, Greenberg D, eds. Psychiatric care of the medical patient (2nd ed). New York: Oxford University Press, 2000;458-75.

3. Wallach J. Laboratory diagnosis of factitious disorders. Arch Intern Med 1994;154:1690-6.

4. Asher R. Munchausen’s syndrome. Lancet 1951;1:339-41.

5. Eisendrath S. Factitious physical disorders treatment without confrontation. Psychosomatics 1990;31:357-8.

6. Krahn L, Lee J, Martin MJ, Richardson J, O’Connor M. Hypokalemia leading to torsades de pointes: Munchausen’s syndrome versus bulimia nervosa. Gen Hosp Psychiatry 1997;19:370-7.

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(02)
Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(02)
Page Number
47-56
Page Number
47-56
Publications
Publications
Article Type
Display Headline
Factitious disorder: What to do when someone plays sick
Display Headline
Factitious disorder: What to do when someone plays sick
Sections
Article Source

PURLs Copyright

Inside the Article

Article PDF Media

Traumatized children: Why victims of violence live out their nightmares

Article Type
Changed
Tue, 12/11/2018 - 15:12
Display Headline
Traumatized children: Why victims of violence live out their nightmares

Steven, age 6, lives in a foster home and attends an intensive day program for treatment of severe aggressive and violent episodes, for which he has been hospitalized several times. The boy has been separated from his biological mother for 2 years, and her parental rights have been terminated because of allegations of neglect and severe abuse.

Steven’s mother has a long history of substance abuse. Her boyfriend, who lived with her, abused Steven physically and sexually. He beat him, tortured him, and burned him. He once inserted a hot curling iron into the boy’s rectum, causing severe burns.

It is not unusual for psychiatrists to encounter children such as Steven who have experienced abuse, trauma, or a life-threatening event, but the psychological aftermath of these experiences has only recently been fully recognized. Diagnostic criteria continue to change with evidence that posttraumatic stress disorder (PTSD) manifests differently in children and adolescents than in adults. Now research is showing changes in brain physiology in children who have experienced maltreatment.

Based on our experience and recent evidence, we discuss important features of PTSD that are being recognized in children and adolescents and describe trends and acceptable practices in treating this chronic, debilitating illness.

Diagnostic criteria

PTSD is reported to occur in 1 to 14% of the general population of children1 and in 3 to 100% of children at risk (those exposed to violence, trauma, or abuse).2,3 As diagnostic criteria have changed over the years, so may have prevalence rates.

PTSD was recognized as a diagnostic entity in adults in DSM-III and in children and adolescents in DSM-III-R. PTSD in children has a somewhat different presentation and expression of symptoms than in adults. According to DSM-IV-TR diagnostic criteria:

  • A child’s response to a stressful event may be expressed as disorganized or agitated behavior instead of intense fear, helplessness, or horror.
  • Children re-experience and express the traumatic event or aspects of it through repetitive play.
  • Children’s dreams may be frightening but without recognizable content, or they may change into generalized nightmares of monsters, of rescuing others, or of threats to self or others.
  • Children also tend to have more psychosomatic complaints, such as headaches and stomachaches, than adults with PTSD.1

Box 1

DSM-IV-TR: POSTTRAUMATIC STRESS DISORDER Criterion A: Exposure to trauma

The person has been exposed to a traumatic event in which both of the following are present:

  1. The person experienced, witnessed, or was confronted with an event or events that involved actual or threatened death or serious injury, or a threat to the physical integrity of self or others.
  2. The person’s response involved intense fear, helplessness, or horror. Note: Children may express this by disorganized or agitated behavior.

PROPOSED CHANGE FOR YOUNG CHILDREN

Children need not exhibit intense fear at the time of the trauma.

Source: Adapted from DSM-IV-TR and Scheeringa et al. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1995;34:191-200.

Age-related symptoms. Appropriate diagnostic criteria for childhood PTSD have been debated for some time, in part because of differences in children’s symptoms at different ages and developmental stages. Since DSM-IV was introduced in 1994, several researchers have recommended modifications to its diagnostic characterizations of childhood PTSD.

To accommodate the developmental stage of children younger than age 4, for example, Scheeringa et al suggested changes to DSM-IV criteria for PTSD.4,5 These changes (Boxes 1-5) are included in the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry’s guidelines for assessing and treating PTSD6 and may be a valuable tool for the clinician treating young children.

Subsyndromal cases. Children whose symptoms fall below the diagnostic criteria for PTSD may demonstrate substantial functional impairment and distress, according to Carrion et al.7 In fact, these researchers found that children who fulfill the requirements for two of three symptom clusters—Cluster B, re-experiencing (Box 2); Cluster C, avoidance and numbing (Box 3); and Cluster D, hyperarousal (Box 4)—do not differ significantly from children who meet criteria for all three symptom clusters. Therefore—the researchers reported—the absence of this triad does not necessarily indicate a lack of posttraumatic stress in children but may stem from “developmental differences in symptom expression.”

Vulnerability. Traumatic experience contributes to PTSD development, and the “vulnerable, anxious child who is exposed to violence appears to be at greater risk,” according to Silva et al.8 After a regression analysis of 59 traumatized children, the research team concluded that PTSD risk is greatest when violence occurs within the family.

A review of 25 studies found that three factors appear to mediate the development of PTSD in children:

  • the severity of the trauma exposure
  • trauma related to parental distress
  • temporal proximity to the traumatic event.9
 

 

Chronicity. PTSD is a long-lasting, chronic disorder for young patients. Symptoms have been found to persist in one-third of children 2 years after the initial diagnosis.10

Comorbidity in childhood PTSD is the norm. Among the conditions frequently encountered with childhood PTSD are major depression, dysthymia, substance abuse, anxiety disorder, attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder (ADHD), conduct disorder, and oppositional defiant disorder.

Steven’s story, continued. At psychiatric referral, Steven had a history of aggression towards other children. He had no friends and usually played alone. He had difficulty sleeping and awoke frequently during the night. Several times daily he displayed temper tantrums with kicking and screaming.

The boy was unable to discuss the abuse that had happened to him but displayed severe aggression when playing with dolls in the office. He stripped off their clothes, examined their private parts, then ripped them apart or threw them across the room. His language development showed significant delays, both in expression and comprehension.

Organic basis for PTSD in children?

Studies of the hypothalamic-pituitary-adrenal (HPA) axis and of brain volume have revealed physiologic changes that may indicate PTSD in children. These changes could be the result of PTSD or a risk factor for its development.

HPA axis dysregulation. One of the first controlled studies of biological and physiologic changes in children with PTSD found elevated levels of dopamine, norepinephrine, and free cortisol in 24-hour urine specimens of maltreated children. Urinary catecholamine and free cortisol concentrations were positively correlated with the duration of PTSD trauma and symptom severity.11,12

Elevated afternoon salivary cortisol levels have been found in depressed, maltreated children compared with depressed children who had not been maltreated.13 Girls ages 5 to 7 who had been abused in the past 2 months were found to have lower salivary cortisol levels than normal controls.14 A controlled study found significantly elevated salivary cortisol levels in 51 children with PTSD, compared with 31 controls. Interestingly, cortisol levels in the PTSD group were significantly higher in girls than in boys.15

The effect of trauma on the HPA axis in children requires more research. Although these studies produced contradicting results, elevated cortisol levels seem to be found more consistently than depressed cortisol levels. The differences in outcome could be related to the groups studied or to variations in adrenal system response among subjects.

Brain volume. Changes in brain volume have been measured in maltreated children using MRI readings analyzed with IMAGE software developed by the National Institutes of Health. Intracranial and cerebral volumes of 44 children with PTSD were found to be smaller than those of 61 matched controls.12 Specifically:

  • Children who experienced abuse at the earliest ages and for the longest periods had the smallest brain volumes.
  • Maltreated children with the smallest brain and corpus callosum volumes displayed the most severe PTSD symptoms (intrusive thoughts, avoidance, hyperarousal, and dissociation).
  • Corpus callosum areas and cerebral volumes were reduced more in maltreated boys than in maltreated girls.
  • Hippocampal volumes were not decreased in maltreated children, unlike findings reported in adults with a history of PTSD.

Box 2

DSM-IV-TR: POSTTRAUMATIC STRESS DISORDER Criterion B: Re-experiencing

The traumatic event is persistently re-experienced in one (or more) of the following ways:

  1. recurrent and intrusive distressing recollections of the event, including images, thoughts, or perceptions. Note: In young children, themes or aspects of the trauma may be expressed in repetitive play.
  2. recurrent distressing dreams of the event. Note: Children may experience frightening dreams without recognizable content.
  3. acting or feeling as if the traumatic event were recurring (includes a sense of reliving the experience, illusions, hallucinations, and dissociative flashback episodes, including those that occur upon awakening or when intoxicated). Note: In young children, trauma-specific re-enactment may occur.
  4. intense psychological distress at exposure to internal or external cues that symbolize or resemble an aspect of the traumatic event.
  5. physiological reactivity on exposure to internal or external cues that symbolize or resemble an aspect of the traumatic event.

PROPOSED CHANGE FOR YOUNG CHILDREN

Only one re-experiencing symptom is required from the following

  1. posttraumatic play
  2. play re-enactment
  3. recurrent recollection
  4. nightmares
  5. episodes of objective features of a flashback or dissociation

Source: Adapted from DSM-IV-TR and Scheeringa et al. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1995;34:191-200.

In a recent study, the same researchers16 reported that superior temporal gyrus gray matter volumes measured with MRI were larger in 43 maltreated children and adolescents compared with controls, but white matter volumes were smaller in the maltreated group. The authors suggested these findings may represent developmental alterations in maltreated children. Other MRI studies have found:

Box 3

DSM-IV-TR: POSTTRAUMATIC STRESS DISORDER Criterion C: Avoidance and numbing

Persistent avoidance of stimuli associated with the trauma and numbing of general responsiveness (not present before the trauma), as indicated by three (or more) of the following:

  1. efforts to avoid thoughts, feelings, or conversations associated with the trauma
  2. efforts to avoid activities, places, or people that arouse recollections of the trauma
  3. inability to recall an important aspect of the trauma
  4. markedly diminished interest toward participation in significant activity
  5. feeling of detachment or estrangement from others
  6. restricted range of affect (e.g., unable to have loving feelings)
  7. sense of a foreshortened future (e.g., does not expect to have a career, marriage, children, or a normal life span)

PROPOSED CHANGE FOR YOUNG CHILDREN

Only one symptom is needed from the following:

  1. constriction of play
  2. socially more withdrawn
  3. restricted range of affect
  4. loss of acquired developmental skills (especially language and toilet training)

Source: Adapted from DSM-IV-TR and Scheeringa et al. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1995;34:191-200.

 

 

  • attenuation in frontal lobe asymmetry and smaller total brain and cerebral volumes in children with PTSD, compared with controls17
  • a lower N-acetylaspartate/creatine ratio in children with PTSD, which suggests altered anterior cingulate neuronal metabolism.18

These apparent changes in brain architecture and metabolism may have functional implications. Children with PTSD have been found to perform more poorly than do controls on measures of attention, abstract reasoning, and executive functioning.16

PTSD treatment in children

Treatment of PTSD in children is strongly influenced by the adult literature and practice guidelines. Most psychiatrists who treat children endorse drug therapy as the first line of treatment, followed by psychodynamic psychotherapy and cognitive-behavioral therapy (CBT). In a recent survey of treatment practices in childhood PTSD, 95% of psychiatrists endorsed the use of medications such as selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs) (47 to 49%), alpha-agonists (16 to 38%), tricyclic antidepressants (11 to 15%), and anxiolytics (12%).

Nonmedical therapists who were included in the survey endorsed the use of eye movement desensitization and reprocessing, CBT, family therapy, and nondirective play therapy.19

Psychotherapy. Preliminary evidence from five controlled trialsindicates that CBT may be an effective first-line treatment for children and adolescents with PTSD:

  • In a study of 100 sexually abused children, PTSD symptoms improved significantly more when children received CBT alone or with their parents, compared with when only their parents received CBT.20 Externalizing and depressive symptoms improved greatly when a parent was included in the child’s treatment, and this improvement was maintained 2 years later.21
  • A randomized study of 80 sexually abused children found little difference between those who received traditional group therapy and others who received group therapy plus CBT.22
  • CBT was found more effective than nondirective supportive therapy in sexually abused preschool children, both initially and at 6- and 12-month intervals, as well as in children ages 7 to 14.23,24
  • After an earthquake in Armenia, children treated with school-based, grief/trauma-focused CBT showed significant improvement on self-reported measures of PTSD and depressive symptoms, compared with children who received no such treatment.25

Pharmacotherapy

Open-label case reports and case series have examined a variety of pharmacotherapies in childhood PTSD, but no double-blind, placebo-controlled studies have been published.

Propranolol. Eleven children with histories of sexual and/or physical abuse exhibited significantly fewer PTSD symptoms during a 5-week regimen of the beta blocker propranolol than either before or after they received the medication.26

Carbamazepine was given to 28 children and adolescents ages 8 to 17 with a primary diagnosis of PTSD. Complete symptom remission was observed in 22 children, and the other 6 had significant improvement—reporting only abuse-related nightmares. Carbamazepine dosages of 300 to 1,200 mg/d yielded serum levels of 10 to 11.5 mcg/ml.

Subjects with comorbid conditions (one-half the sample) required additional medications. Four children with ADHD received stimulants, three with major depressive disorder received SSRIs, and one patient was given imipramine.27

Clonidine treatment resulted in moderate or greater improvement in target symptoms of PTSD in seven preschool children ages 3 to 6 with a history of severe sexual and/or physical abuse. Clonidine dosages ranged from 0.1 mg at bedtime to 0.05 bid plus 0.1 at bedtime.28

SSRIs and other antidepressants. Citalopram was given in a comparison study to 24 children and adolescents and 14 adults with PTSD, with symptoms assessed every 2 weeks based on Clinician Administered PTSD Scale (CAPS) and Clinical Global Impression (CGI) scores. Mean CAPS total score, symptom cluster score, and CGI ratings were significantly reduced in both age groups. Children and adolescents showed greater improvement than adults in hyperarousal symptoms but less in re-experiencing and avoidance symptoms.29

An 8-year-old girl with PTSD and comorbid anxiety disorder initially responded to fluvoxamine. When she relapsed, mirtazapine was added and her overall symptoms improved.30

An adolescent with PTSD treated with nefazodone, up to 600 mg/d, showed improvement in hyperarousal symptoms and anhedonia.31

Summary. In the absence of conclusive scientific evidence—i.e., double-blind, placebo-controlled studies—these case reports reflect common practices in treating PTSD in children and adolescents. American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry practice guidelines defer to the psychiatrist’s judgment to determine the best pharmacologic approach.6 In most cases, evidence from the adult literature influences treatment decisions, and in some cases treatment targets comorbidities such as depression, panic disorder, ADHD, and anxiety.

Box 4

DSM-IV-TR: POSTTRAUMATIC STRESS DISORDER Criterion D: Hyperarousal

Persistent symptoms of increased arousal (not present before the trauma), as indicated by two (or more) of the following:

  1. difficulty falling or staying asleep
  2. irritability or outbursts of anger
  3. difficulty concentrating
  4. hypervigilance
  5. exaggerated startle response

PROPOSED CHANGE FOR YOUNG CHILDREN

  1. night terrors
  2. difficulty going to sleep
  3. night awakening
  4. decreased concentration
  5. hypervigilance
  6. exaggerated startle response

Source: Adapted from DSM-IV-TR and Scheeringa et al. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1995;34:191-200.

 

 

Confronting Steven’s demons. Steven was treated with paroxetine, 15 mg/d, targeting both his depressive and PTSD symptoms; clonidine, 0.05 mg at bedtime, targeting hyperarousal symptoms and ADHD; and risperidone, 0.5 mg bid, which was added last to target his severe aggression and violent behavior.

He also received speech therapy, milieu treatment with the structured setting at the day program, and individual play therapy from the day program’s interns. At home, wrap-around services—including a behavioral specialist and a therapeutic staff support worker—were provided to help his foster family deal with his aggression and difficult behavior.

Conclusion

Current approaches to diagnosis, assessment, and treatment of PTSD in children and adolescents depend in large part on the few available studies conducted in adults, which may not necessarily apply to younger patients. We need more clinical trials involving children and adolescents, better diagnostic instruments, and accurate symptom severity rating scales.

Box 5

DSM-IV-TR: POSTTRAUMATIC STRESS DISORDER Criterion E: Duration of symptoms

Duration of the disturbance (symptoms in Criteria B, C, and D) is more than 1 month.

PROPOSED CHANGE FOR YOUNG CHILDREN

The disturbance has been present for 1 month

Appearance of new symptoms (only one is needed)

  1. new aggression
  2. new separation anxiety
  3. fear of toilet training alone
  4. fear of darkness
  5. any new fears not related to the trauma

Criterion F: Impairment in functioning

The disturbance causes clinically significant distress or impairment in social, occupational, or other important areas of functioning.

PROPOSED CHANGE FOR YOUNG CHILDREN

Function impairment is not needed for the diagnosis

Source: Adapted from DSM-IV-TR and Scheeringa et al. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1995;34:191-200.

Research is leading to new understandings of PTSD in childhood, from more refined diagnostic criteria to observations of changes in brain volume and secretion of stress hormones in maltreated children. Case reports are exploring the safety and efficacy of drug and psychotherapeutic treatments.

Acceptable treatment and management—as indicated by case reports and recommended by the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry—includes CBT or dynamic psychotherapy, group therapy, and drug treatment, especially for PTSD’s comorbidities.

Related resources

Drug brand names

  • Carbamazepine • Tegretol
  • Citalopram • Celexa
  • Clonidine • Catapres
  • Fluvoxamine • Luvox
  • Imipramine • Tofranil
  • Mirtazapine • Remeron
  • Nefazodone • Serzone
  • Paroxetine • Paxil
  • Propranolol • Inderal
  • Risperidone • Risperdal

Disclosure

Dr. Elizabeth Weller reports that she receives research/grant support from Forest Pharmaceuticals, Organon, and Wyeth Pharmaceuticals, and serves as a consultant to Johnson & Johnson, GlaxoSmithKline, and Novartis Pharmaceuticals Corp.

Dr. Shlewiet reports no affiliation or financial arrangement with any of the companies whose products are mentioned in this article, or with manufacturers of competing products.

Dr. Ronald Weller reports that he receives research/grant support from Wyeth Pharmaceuticals, Organon, and Forest Pharmaceuticals.

References

1. American Psychiatric Association. Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders (4th ed). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Association, 1994

2. Frederick CJ. Children traumatized by catastrophic situations. In: Eth S, Pynoos RS (eds). Posttraumatic stress disorder in children. Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Press, 1985;71-100.

3. Garrison CZ, Bryant ES, Addy CL, Spurrier PG, Freedy JR, Kilpatrick DG. Posttraumatic stress disorder in adolescents after Hurricane Andrew. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1995;34:1193-1201.

4. Scheeringa MS, Zeanah CH. Symptom expression and trauma variables in children under 48 months of age. Infant Ment Health J 1995;16:259-70.

5. Scheeringa MS, Zeanah CH, Drell MJ, Larrieu JA. Two approaches to diagnosing post-traumatic stress disorder in infancy and early childhood. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1995;34:191-200.

6. American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry. Practice parameters for the assessment and treatment of posttraumatic stress disorder in children and adolescents. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1998;37(10,suppl):4S-26S.

7. Carrion VG, Weems CF, Ray R, Reiss AL. Toward an empirical definition of pediatric PTSD: the phenomenology of PTSD symptoms in youth. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 2002;41(2):166-73.

8. Silva RR, Alpert M, Munoz DM, Singh S, Matzner F, Dummit S. Stress and vulnerability to posttraumatic stress disorder in children and adolescents. Am J Psychiatry 2000;157(8):1229-35.

9. Foy DW, Madvig BT, et al. Etiologic factors in the development of posttraumatic stress disorders in children and adolescents. J Sch Psychol 1996;34:133-45.

10. Famularo R, Fenton T, Augustyn M, Zuckerman B. Persistence of pediatric posttraumatic stress after two years. Child Abuse Negl 1996;20:1245-8.

11. De Bellis MD, Baum A, Birmaher B, Keshavan MS, Eccard CH, et al. Developmental traumatology part I: Biological stress systems. Biol Psychiatry 1999;45(10):1259-70.

12. De Bellis MD, Keshavan M, Clark DB, Casey BJ, Giedd JN, Boring AM, et al. Developmental traumatology Part II: Brain development. Biol Psychiatry 1999;45:1271-84.

13. Hart J, Gunnar M, Cicchetti D. Altered neuroendocrine activity in maltreated children related to symptoms of depression. Dev Psychopathol 1996;8:201-14.

14. King JA, Madasky D, King S, Fletcher KE, Brewer J. Early sexual abuse and low cortisol. Psychiatry Clin Neurosci 2001;55:71-4.

15. Carrion VG, Weems CF, Ray RD, Glaser B, Hessl D, Reiss AL. Diurnal salivary cortisol in pediatric posttraumatic stress disorder. Biol Psychiatry 2002;51(7):575-82.

16. De Bellis MD, Keshavan M, Frustaci K, Shifflett H, et al. Superior temporal gyrus volumes in maltreated children and adolescents with PTSD. Biol Psychiatry 2002;51:544-52

17. Carrion VG, Weems CF, Eliez S, Patwardhan A, Brown W, et al. Attenuation of frontal asymmetry in pediatric posttraumatic stress disorder. Biol Psychiatry 2001;50:943-51

18. De Bellis MD, Keshavan MS, Spencer S, Hall J. N-acetylaspartate concentration in the anterior cingulate of maltreated children and adolescents with PTSD. Am J Psychiatry 2000;157:1175-7.

19. Cohen JA, Mannarino AP. Treatment outcome study for sexually abused preschool children: initial findings. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1996;35(1):42-50.

20. Deblinger ES, Lippman J, Steer R. Sexually abused children suffering posttraumatic stress symptoms: initial treatment outcome findings. Child Maltreatment 1996;1:310-21.

21. Deblinger ES, Cohen JA. Cognitive behavioral treatment for sexually abused children and their nonoffending parents (workshop) Chicago: American Professional Society on the Abuse of Children, sixth national colloquium,1998.

22. Berliner L, Saunders BE. Treating fear and anxiety in sexually abused children: results of a controlled 2-year follow-up study. Child Maltreatment 1996;1:294-309.

23. Cohen JA, Mannarino AP. Treatment outcome study for sexually abused preschool children: initial findings. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1996;35 (1):42-50.

24. Cohen JA, Mannarino AP. Interventions for sexually abused children: initial treatment findings. Child Maltreatment 1998;3(1):17-26.

25. Goenjian AK, Karayan I, Pynoos RS, Minassian D, Najarian LM, et al. Outcome of psychotherapy among early adolescents after trauma. Am J Psychiatry 1997;154:536-42.

26. Famularo R, Kinscheiff R, Fenton T. Propranolol treatment for childhood PTSD, acute type: a pilot study. Am J Disabled Children 1988;142:1244-7.

27. Looff D, Grimley P, Kuiler F, Martin A, Shunfield L. Carbamazepine for PTSD (letter). J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1995;34 (6):703-4.

28. Harmon RJ, Riggs PD. Clonidine for posttraumatic stress disorder in preschool children. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1996;35(9):1247-9.

29. Seedat S, Lockhat R, Kaminer D, Zungu-Dirwayi N, Stein DJ. An open trial of citalopram in adolescents with post traumatic stress disorder. Int Clin Psychopharmacology 2001;16(1):21-5.

30. Good C, Peterson C. SSRI and mirtazapine in PTSD. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 2001;40:263-4.

31. Domon S, Anderson M. Nefazodone for PTSD. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 2000;39(8):

Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

Elizabeth B. Weller, MD
Professor of psychiatry and pediatrics University of Pennsylvania Department of child and adolescent psychiatry Children’s Hospital of Philadelphia

Basem Kaleem Shlewiet, MD
Fellow, child and adolescent psychiatry Department of child and adolescent psychiatry Children’s Hospital of Philadelphia

Ronald A. Weller, MD
Lecturer Department of psychiatry University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(01)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
30-39
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

Elizabeth B. Weller, MD
Professor of psychiatry and pediatrics University of Pennsylvania Department of child and adolescent psychiatry Children’s Hospital of Philadelphia

Basem Kaleem Shlewiet, MD
Fellow, child and adolescent psychiatry Department of child and adolescent psychiatry Children’s Hospital of Philadelphia

Ronald A. Weller, MD
Lecturer Department of psychiatry University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia

Author and Disclosure Information

Elizabeth B. Weller, MD
Professor of psychiatry and pediatrics University of Pennsylvania Department of child and adolescent psychiatry Children’s Hospital of Philadelphia

Basem Kaleem Shlewiet, MD
Fellow, child and adolescent psychiatry Department of child and adolescent psychiatry Children’s Hospital of Philadelphia

Ronald A. Weller, MD
Lecturer Department of psychiatry University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia

Article PDF
Article PDF

Steven, age 6, lives in a foster home and attends an intensive day program for treatment of severe aggressive and violent episodes, for which he has been hospitalized several times. The boy has been separated from his biological mother for 2 years, and her parental rights have been terminated because of allegations of neglect and severe abuse.

Steven’s mother has a long history of substance abuse. Her boyfriend, who lived with her, abused Steven physically and sexually. He beat him, tortured him, and burned him. He once inserted a hot curling iron into the boy’s rectum, causing severe burns.

It is not unusual for psychiatrists to encounter children such as Steven who have experienced abuse, trauma, or a life-threatening event, but the psychological aftermath of these experiences has only recently been fully recognized. Diagnostic criteria continue to change with evidence that posttraumatic stress disorder (PTSD) manifests differently in children and adolescents than in adults. Now research is showing changes in brain physiology in children who have experienced maltreatment.

Based on our experience and recent evidence, we discuss important features of PTSD that are being recognized in children and adolescents and describe trends and acceptable practices in treating this chronic, debilitating illness.

Diagnostic criteria

PTSD is reported to occur in 1 to 14% of the general population of children1 and in 3 to 100% of children at risk (those exposed to violence, trauma, or abuse).2,3 As diagnostic criteria have changed over the years, so may have prevalence rates.

PTSD was recognized as a diagnostic entity in adults in DSM-III and in children and adolescents in DSM-III-R. PTSD in children has a somewhat different presentation and expression of symptoms than in adults. According to DSM-IV-TR diagnostic criteria:

  • A child’s response to a stressful event may be expressed as disorganized or agitated behavior instead of intense fear, helplessness, or horror.
  • Children re-experience and express the traumatic event or aspects of it through repetitive play.
  • Children’s dreams may be frightening but without recognizable content, or they may change into generalized nightmares of monsters, of rescuing others, or of threats to self or others.
  • Children also tend to have more psychosomatic complaints, such as headaches and stomachaches, than adults with PTSD.1

Box 1

DSM-IV-TR: POSTTRAUMATIC STRESS DISORDER Criterion A: Exposure to trauma

The person has been exposed to a traumatic event in which both of the following are present:

  1. The person experienced, witnessed, or was confronted with an event or events that involved actual or threatened death or serious injury, or a threat to the physical integrity of self or others.
  2. The person’s response involved intense fear, helplessness, or horror. Note: Children may express this by disorganized or agitated behavior.

PROPOSED CHANGE FOR YOUNG CHILDREN

Children need not exhibit intense fear at the time of the trauma.

Source: Adapted from DSM-IV-TR and Scheeringa et al. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1995;34:191-200.

Age-related symptoms. Appropriate diagnostic criteria for childhood PTSD have been debated for some time, in part because of differences in children’s symptoms at different ages and developmental stages. Since DSM-IV was introduced in 1994, several researchers have recommended modifications to its diagnostic characterizations of childhood PTSD.

To accommodate the developmental stage of children younger than age 4, for example, Scheeringa et al suggested changes to DSM-IV criteria for PTSD.4,5 These changes (Boxes 1-5) are included in the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry’s guidelines for assessing and treating PTSD6 and may be a valuable tool for the clinician treating young children.

Subsyndromal cases. Children whose symptoms fall below the diagnostic criteria for PTSD may demonstrate substantial functional impairment and distress, according to Carrion et al.7 In fact, these researchers found that children who fulfill the requirements for two of three symptom clusters—Cluster B, re-experiencing (Box 2); Cluster C, avoidance and numbing (Box 3); and Cluster D, hyperarousal (Box 4)—do not differ significantly from children who meet criteria for all three symptom clusters. Therefore—the researchers reported—the absence of this triad does not necessarily indicate a lack of posttraumatic stress in children but may stem from “developmental differences in symptom expression.”

Vulnerability. Traumatic experience contributes to PTSD development, and the “vulnerable, anxious child who is exposed to violence appears to be at greater risk,” according to Silva et al.8 After a regression analysis of 59 traumatized children, the research team concluded that PTSD risk is greatest when violence occurs within the family.

A review of 25 studies found that three factors appear to mediate the development of PTSD in children:

  • the severity of the trauma exposure
  • trauma related to parental distress
  • temporal proximity to the traumatic event.9
 

 

Chronicity. PTSD is a long-lasting, chronic disorder for young patients. Symptoms have been found to persist in one-third of children 2 years after the initial diagnosis.10

Comorbidity in childhood PTSD is the norm. Among the conditions frequently encountered with childhood PTSD are major depression, dysthymia, substance abuse, anxiety disorder, attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder (ADHD), conduct disorder, and oppositional defiant disorder.

Steven’s story, continued. At psychiatric referral, Steven had a history of aggression towards other children. He had no friends and usually played alone. He had difficulty sleeping and awoke frequently during the night. Several times daily he displayed temper tantrums with kicking and screaming.

The boy was unable to discuss the abuse that had happened to him but displayed severe aggression when playing with dolls in the office. He stripped off their clothes, examined their private parts, then ripped them apart or threw them across the room. His language development showed significant delays, both in expression and comprehension.

Organic basis for PTSD in children?

Studies of the hypothalamic-pituitary-adrenal (HPA) axis and of brain volume have revealed physiologic changes that may indicate PTSD in children. These changes could be the result of PTSD or a risk factor for its development.

HPA axis dysregulation. One of the first controlled studies of biological and physiologic changes in children with PTSD found elevated levels of dopamine, norepinephrine, and free cortisol in 24-hour urine specimens of maltreated children. Urinary catecholamine and free cortisol concentrations were positively correlated with the duration of PTSD trauma and symptom severity.11,12

Elevated afternoon salivary cortisol levels have been found in depressed, maltreated children compared with depressed children who had not been maltreated.13 Girls ages 5 to 7 who had been abused in the past 2 months were found to have lower salivary cortisol levels than normal controls.14 A controlled study found significantly elevated salivary cortisol levels in 51 children with PTSD, compared with 31 controls. Interestingly, cortisol levels in the PTSD group were significantly higher in girls than in boys.15

The effect of trauma on the HPA axis in children requires more research. Although these studies produced contradicting results, elevated cortisol levels seem to be found more consistently than depressed cortisol levels. The differences in outcome could be related to the groups studied or to variations in adrenal system response among subjects.

Brain volume. Changes in brain volume have been measured in maltreated children using MRI readings analyzed with IMAGE software developed by the National Institutes of Health. Intracranial and cerebral volumes of 44 children with PTSD were found to be smaller than those of 61 matched controls.12 Specifically:

  • Children who experienced abuse at the earliest ages and for the longest periods had the smallest brain volumes.
  • Maltreated children with the smallest brain and corpus callosum volumes displayed the most severe PTSD symptoms (intrusive thoughts, avoidance, hyperarousal, and dissociation).
  • Corpus callosum areas and cerebral volumes were reduced more in maltreated boys than in maltreated girls.
  • Hippocampal volumes were not decreased in maltreated children, unlike findings reported in adults with a history of PTSD.

Box 2

DSM-IV-TR: POSTTRAUMATIC STRESS DISORDER Criterion B: Re-experiencing

The traumatic event is persistently re-experienced in one (or more) of the following ways:

  1. recurrent and intrusive distressing recollections of the event, including images, thoughts, or perceptions. Note: In young children, themes or aspects of the trauma may be expressed in repetitive play.
  2. recurrent distressing dreams of the event. Note: Children may experience frightening dreams without recognizable content.
  3. acting or feeling as if the traumatic event were recurring (includes a sense of reliving the experience, illusions, hallucinations, and dissociative flashback episodes, including those that occur upon awakening or when intoxicated). Note: In young children, trauma-specific re-enactment may occur.
  4. intense psychological distress at exposure to internal or external cues that symbolize or resemble an aspect of the traumatic event.
  5. physiological reactivity on exposure to internal or external cues that symbolize or resemble an aspect of the traumatic event.

PROPOSED CHANGE FOR YOUNG CHILDREN

Only one re-experiencing symptom is required from the following

  1. posttraumatic play
  2. play re-enactment
  3. recurrent recollection
  4. nightmares
  5. episodes of objective features of a flashback or dissociation

Source: Adapted from DSM-IV-TR and Scheeringa et al. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1995;34:191-200.

In a recent study, the same researchers16 reported that superior temporal gyrus gray matter volumes measured with MRI were larger in 43 maltreated children and adolescents compared with controls, but white matter volumes were smaller in the maltreated group. The authors suggested these findings may represent developmental alterations in maltreated children. Other MRI studies have found:

Box 3

DSM-IV-TR: POSTTRAUMATIC STRESS DISORDER Criterion C: Avoidance and numbing

Persistent avoidance of stimuli associated with the trauma and numbing of general responsiveness (not present before the trauma), as indicated by three (or more) of the following:

  1. efforts to avoid thoughts, feelings, or conversations associated with the trauma
  2. efforts to avoid activities, places, or people that arouse recollections of the trauma
  3. inability to recall an important aspect of the trauma
  4. markedly diminished interest toward participation in significant activity
  5. feeling of detachment or estrangement from others
  6. restricted range of affect (e.g., unable to have loving feelings)
  7. sense of a foreshortened future (e.g., does not expect to have a career, marriage, children, or a normal life span)

PROPOSED CHANGE FOR YOUNG CHILDREN

Only one symptom is needed from the following:

  1. constriction of play
  2. socially more withdrawn
  3. restricted range of affect
  4. loss of acquired developmental skills (especially language and toilet training)

Source: Adapted from DSM-IV-TR and Scheeringa et al. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1995;34:191-200.

 

 

  • attenuation in frontal lobe asymmetry and smaller total brain and cerebral volumes in children with PTSD, compared with controls17
  • a lower N-acetylaspartate/creatine ratio in children with PTSD, which suggests altered anterior cingulate neuronal metabolism.18

These apparent changes in brain architecture and metabolism may have functional implications. Children with PTSD have been found to perform more poorly than do controls on measures of attention, abstract reasoning, and executive functioning.16

PTSD treatment in children

Treatment of PTSD in children is strongly influenced by the adult literature and practice guidelines. Most psychiatrists who treat children endorse drug therapy as the first line of treatment, followed by psychodynamic psychotherapy and cognitive-behavioral therapy (CBT). In a recent survey of treatment practices in childhood PTSD, 95% of psychiatrists endorsed the use of medications such as selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs) (47 to 49%), alpha-agonists (16 to 38%), tricyclic antidepressants (11 to 15%), and anxiolytics (12%).

Nonmedical therapists who were included in the survey endorsed the use of eye movement desensitization and reprocessing, CBT, family therapy, and nondirective play therapy.19

Psychotherapy. Preliminary evidence from five controlled trialsindicates that CBT may be an effective first-line treatment for children and adolescents with PTSD:

  • In a study of 100 sexually abused children, PTSD symptoms improved significantly more when children received CBT alone or with their parents, compared with when only their parents received CBT.20 Externalizing and depressive symptoms improved greatly when a parent was included in the child’s treatment, and this improvement was maintained 2 years later.21
  • A randomized study of 80 sexually abused children found little difference between those who received traditional group therapy and others who received group therapy plus CBT.22
  • CBT was found more effective than nondirective supportive therapy in sexually abused preschool children, both initially and at 6- and 12-month intervals, as well as in children ages 7 to 14.23,24
  • After an earthquake in Armenia, children treated with school-based, grief/trauma-focused CBT showed significant improvement on self-reported measures of PTSD and depressive symptoms, compared with children who received no such treatment.25

Pharmacotherapy

Open-label case reports and case series have examined a variety of pharmacotherapies in childhood PTSD, but no double-blind, placebo-controlled studies have been published.

Propranolol. Eleven children with histories of sexual and/or physical abuse exhibited significantly fewer PTSD symptoms during a 5-week regimen of the beta blocker propranolol than either before or after they received the medication.26

Carbamazepine was given to 28 children and adolescents ages 8 to 17 with a primary diagnosis of PTSD. Complete symptom remission was observed in 22 children, and the other 6 had significant improvement—reporting only abuse-related nightmares. Carbamazepine dosages of 300 to 1,200 mg/d yielded serum levels of 10 to 11.5 mcg/ml.

Subjects with comorbid conditions (one-half the sample) required additional medications. Four children with ADHD received stimulants, three with major depressive disorder received SSRIs, and one patient was given imipramine.27

Clonidine treatment resulted in moderate or greater improvement in target symptoms of PTSD in seven preschool children ages 3 to 6 with a history of severe sexual and/or physical abuse. Clonidine dosages ranged from 0.1 mg at bedtime to 0.05 bid plus 0.1 at bedtime.28

SSRIs and other antidepressants. Citalopram was given in a comparison study to 24 children and adolescents and 14 adults with PTSD, with symptoms assessed every 2 weeks based on Clinician Administered PTSD Scale (CAPS) and Clinical Global Impression (CGI) scores. Mean CAPS total score, symptom cluster score, and CGI ratings were significantly reduced in both age groups. Children and adolescents showed greater improvement than adults in hyperarousal symptoms but less in re-experiencing and avoidance symptoms.29

An 8-year-old girl with PTSD and comorbid anxiety disorder initially responded to fluvoxamine. When she relapsed, mirtazapine was added and her overall symptoms improved.30

An adolescent with PTSD treated with nefazodone, up to 600 mg/d, showed improvement in hyperarousal symptoms and anhedonia.31

Summary. In the absence of conclusive scientific evidence—i.e., double-blind, placebo-controlled studies—these case reports reflect common practices in treating PTSD in children and adolescents. American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry practice guidelines defer to the psychiatrist’s judgment to determine the best pharmacologic approach.6 In most cases, evidence from the adult literature influences treatment decisions, and in some cases treatment targets comorbidities such as depression, panic disorder, ADHD, and anxiety.

Box 4

DSM-IV-TR: POSTTRAUMATIC STRESS DISORDER Criterion D: Hyperarousal

Persistent symptoms of increased arousal (not present before the trauma), as indicated by two (or more) of the following:

  1. difficulty falling or staying asleep
  2. irritability or outbursts of anger
  3. difficulty concentrating
  4. hypervigilance
  5. exaggerated startle response

PROPOSED CHANGE FOR YOUNG CHILDREN

  1. night terrors
  2. difficulty going to sleep
  3. night awakening
  4. decreased concentration
  5. hypervigilance
  6. exaggerated startle response

Source: Adapted from DSM-IV-TR and Scheeringa et al. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1995;34:191-200.

 

 

Confronting Steven’s demons. Steven was treated with paroxetine, 15 mg/d, targeting both his depressive and PTSD symptoms; clonidine, 0.05 mg at bedtime, targeting hyperarousal symptoms and ADHD; and risperidone, 0.5 mg bid, which was added last to target his severe aggression and violent behavior.

He also received speech therapy, milieu treatment with the structured setting at the day program, and individual play therapy from the day program’s interns. At home, wrap-around services—including a behavioral specialist and a therapeutic staff support worker—were provided to help his foster family deal with his aggression and difficult behavior.

Conclusion

Current approaches to diagnosis, assessment, and treatment of PTSD in children and adolescents depend in large part on the few available studies conducted in adults, which may not necessarily apply to younger patients. We need more clinical trials involving children and adolescents, better diagnostic instruments, and accurate symptom severity rating scales.

Box 5

DSM-IV-TR: POSTTRAUMATIC STRESS DISORDER Criterion E: Duration of symptoms

Duration of the disturbance (symptoms in Criteria B, C, and D) is more than 1 month.

PROPOSED CHANGE FOR YOUNG CHILDREN

The disturbance has been present for 1 month

Appearance of new symptoms (only one is needed)

  1. new aggression
  2. new separation anxiety
  3. fear of toilet training alone
  4. fear of darkness
  5. any new fears not related to the trauma

Criterion F: Impairment in functioning

The disturbance causes clinically significant distress or impairment in social, occupational, or other important areas of functioning.

PROPOSED CHANGE FOR YOUNG CHILDREN

Function impairment is not needed for the diagnosis

Source: Adapted from DSM-IV-TR and Scheeringa et al. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1995;34:191-200.

Research is leading to new understandings of PTSD in childhood, from more refined diagnostic criteria to observations of changes in brain volume and secretion of stress hormones in maltreated children. Case reports are exploring the safety and efficacy of drug and psychotherapeutic treatments.

Acceptable treatment and management—as indicated by case reports and recommended by the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry—includes CBT or dynamic psychotherapy, group therapy, and drug treatment, especially for PTSD’s comorbidities.

Related resources

Drug brand names

  • Carbamazepine • Tegretol
  • Citalopram • Celexa
  • Clonidine • Catapres
  • Fluvoxamine • Luvox
  • Imipramine • Tofranil
  • Mirtazapine • Remeron
  • Nefazodone • Serzone
  • Paroxetine • Paxil
  • Propranolol • Inderal
  • Risperidone • Risperdal

Disclosure

Dr. Elizabeth Weller reports that she receives research/grant support from Forest Pharmaceuticals, Organon, and Wyeth Pharmaceuticals, and serves as a consultant to Johnson & Johnson, GlaxoSmithKline, and Novartis Pharmaceuticals Corp.

Dr. Shlewiet reports no affiliation or financial arrangement with any of the companies whose products are mentioned in this article, or with manufacturers of competing products.

Dr. Ronald Weller reports that he receives research/grant support from Wyeth Pharmaceuticals, Organon, and Forest Pharmaceuticals.

Steven, age 6, lives in a foster home and attends an intensive day program for treatment of severe aggressive and violent episodes, for which he has been hospitalized several times. The boy has been separated from his biological mother for 2 years, and her parental rights have been terminated because of allegations of neglect and severe abuse.

Steven’s mother has a long history of substance abuse. Her boyfriend, who lived with her, abused Steven physically and sexually. He beat him, tortured him, and burned him. He once inserted a hot curling iron into the boy’s rectum, causing severe burns.

It is not unusual for psychiatrists to encounter children such as Steven who have experienced abuse, trauma, or a life-threatening event, but the psychological aftermath of these experiences has only recently been fully recognized. Diagnostic criteria continue to change with evidence that posttraumatic stress disorder (PTSD) manifests differently in children and adolescents than in adults. Now research is showing changes in brain physiology in children who have experienced maltreatment.

Based on our experience and recent evidence, we discuss important features of PTSD that are being recognized in children and adolescents and describe trends and acceptable practices in treating this chronic, debilitating illness.

Diagnostic criteria

PTSD is reported to occur in 1 to 14% of the general population of children1 and in 3 to 100% of children at risk (those exposed to violence, trauma, or abuse).2,3 As diagnostic criteria have changed over the years, so may have prevalence rates.

PTSD was recognized as a diagnostic entity in adults in DSM-III and in children and adolescents in DSM-III-R. PTSD in children has a somewhat different presentation and expression of symptoms than in adults. According to DSM-IV-TR diagnostic criteria:

  • A child’s response to a stressful event may be expressed as disorganized or agitated behavior instead of intense fear, helplessness, or horror.
  • Children re-experience and express the traumatic event or aspects of it through repetitive play.
  • Children’s dreams may be frightening but without recognizable content, or they may change into generalized nightmares of monsters, of rescuing others, or of threats to self or others.
  • Children also tend to have more psychosomatic complaints, such as headaches and stomachaches, than adults with PTSD.1

Box 1

DSM-IV-TR: POSTTRAUMATIC STRESS DISORDER Criterion A: Exposure to trauma

The person has been exposed to a traumatic event in which both of the following are present:

  1. The person experienced, witnessed, or was confronted with an event or events that involved actual or threatened death or serious injury, or a threat to the physical integrity of self or others.
  2. The person’s response involved intense fear, helplessness, or horror. Note: Children may express this by disorganized or agitated behavior.

PROPOSED CHANGE FOR YOUNG CHILDREN

Children need not exhibit intense fear at the time of the trauma.

Source: Adapted from DSM-IV-TR and Scheeringa et al. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1995;34:191-200.

Age-related symptoms. Appropriate diagnostic criteria for childhood PTSD have been debated for some time, in part because of differences in children’s symptoms at different ages and developmental stages. Since DSM-IV was introduced in 1994, several researchers have recommended modifications to its diagnostic characterizations of childhood PTSD.

To accommodate the developmental stage of children younger than age 4, for example, Scheeringa et al suggested changes to DSM-IV criteria for PTSD.4,5 These changes (Boxes 1-5) are included in the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry’s guidelines for assessing and treating PTSD6 and may be a valuable tool for the clinician treating young children.

Subsyndromal cases. Children whose symptoms fall below the diagnostic criteria for PTSD may demonstrate substantial functional impairment and distress, according to Carrion et al.7 In fact, these researchers found that children who fulfill the requirements for two of three symptom clusters—Cluster B, re-experiencing (Box 2); Cluster C, avoidance and numbing (Box 3); and Cluster D, hyperarousal (Box 4)—do not differ significantly from children who meet criteria for all three symptom clusters. Therefore—the researchers reported—the absence of this triad does not necessarily indicate a lack of posttraumatic stress in children but may stem from “developmental differences in symptom expression.”

Vulnerability. Traumatic experience contributes to PTSD development, and the “vulnerable, anxious child who is exposed to violence appears to be at greater risk,” according to Silva et al.8 After a regression analysis of 59 traumatized children, the research team concluded that PTSD risk is greatest when violence occurs within the family.

A review of 25 studies found that three factors appear to mediate the development of PTSD in children:

  • the severity of the trauma exposure
  • trauma related to parental distress
  • temporal proximity to the traumatic event.9
 

 

Chronicity. PTSD is a long-lasting, chronic disorder for young patients. Symptoms have been found to persist in one-third of children 2 years after the initial diagnosis.10

Comorbidity in childhood PTSD is the norm. Among the conditions frequently encountered with childhood PTSD are major depression, dysthymia, substance abuse, anxiety disorder, attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder (ADHD), conduct disorder, and oppositional defiant disorder.

Steven’s story, continued. At psychiatric referral, Steven had a history of aggression towards other children. He had no friends and usually played alone. He had difficulty sleeping and awoke frequently during the night. Several times daily he displayed temper tantrums with kicking and screaming.

The boy was unable to discuss the abuse that had happened to him but displayed severe aggression when playing with dolls in the office. He stripped off their clothes, examined their private parts, then ripped them apart or threw them across the room. His language development showed significant delays, both in expression and comprehension.

Organic basis for PTSD in children?

Studies of the hypothalamic-pituitary-adrenal (HPA) axis and of brain volume have revealed physiologic changes that may indicate PTSD in children. These changes could be the result of PTSD or a risk factor for its development.

HPA axis dysregulation. One of the first controlled studies of biological and physiologic changes in children with PTSD found elevated levels of dopamine, norepinephrine, and free cortisol in 24-hour urine specimens of maltreated children. Urinary catecholamine and free cortisol concentrations were positively correlated with the duration of PTSD trauma and symptom severity.11,12

Elevated afternoon salivary cortisol levels have been found in depressed, maltreated children compared with depressed children who had not been maltreated.13 Girls ages 5 to 7 who had been abused in the past 2 months were found to have lower salivary cortisol levels than normal controls.14 A controlled study found significantly elevated salivary cortisol levels in 51 children with PTSD, compared with 31 controls. Interestingly, cortisol levels in the PTSD group were significantly higher in girls than in boys.15

The effect of trauma on the HPA axis in children requires more research. Although these studies produced contradicting results, elevated cortisol levels seem to be found more consistently than depressed cortisol levels. The differences in outcome could be related to the groups studied or to variations in adrenal system response among subjects.

Brain volume. Changes in brain volume have been measured in maltreated children using MRI readings analyzed with IMAGE software developed by the National Institutes of Health. Intracranial and cerebral volumes of 44 children with PTSD were found to be smaller than those of 61 matched controls.12 Specifically:

  • Children who experienced abuse at the earliest ages and for the longest periods had the smallest brain volumes.
  • Maltreated children with the smallest brain and corpus callosum volumes displayed the most severe PTSD symptoms (intrusive thoughts, avoidance, hyperarousal, and dissociation).
  • Corpus callosum areas and cerebral volumes were reduced more in maltreated boys than in maltreated girls.
  • Hippocampal volumes were not decreased in maltreated children, unlike findings reported in adults with a history of PTSD.

Box 2

DSM-IV-TR: POSTTRAUMATIC STRESS DISORDER Criterion B: Re-experiencing

The traumatic event is persistently re-experienced in one (or more) of the following ways:

  1. recurrent and intrusive distressing recollections of the event, including images, thoughts, or perceptions. Note: In young children, themes or aspects of the trauma may be expressed in repetitive play.
  2. recurrent distressing dreams of the event. Note: Children may experience frightening dreams without recognizable content.
  3. acting or feeling as if the traumatic event were recurring (includes a sense of reliving the experience, illusions, hallucinations, and dissociative flashback episodes, including those that occur upon awakening or when intoxicated). Note: In young children, trauma-specific re-enactment may occur.
  4. intense psychological distress at exposure to internal or external cues that symbolize or resemble an aspect of the traumatic event.
  5. physiological reactivity on exposure to internal or external cues that symbolize or resemble an aspect of the traumatic event.

PROPOSED CHANGE FOR YOUNG CHILDREN

Only one re-experiencing symptom is required from the following

  1. posttraumatic play
  2. play re-enactment
  3. recurrent recollection
  4. nightmares
  5. episodes of objective features of a flashback or dissociation

Source: Adapted from DSM-IV-TR and Scheeringa et al. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1995;34:191-200.

In a recent study, the same researchers16 reported that superior temporal gyrus gray matter volumes measured with MRI were larger in 43 maltreated children and adolescents compared with controls, but white matter volumes were smaller in the maltreated group. The authors suggested these findings may represent developmental alterations in maltreated children. Other MRI studies have found:

Box 3

DSM-IV-TR: POSTTRAUMATIC STRESS DISORDER Criterion C: Avoidance and numbing

Persistent avoidance of stimuli associated with the trauma and numbing of general responsiveness (not present before the trauma), as indicated by three (or more) of the following:

  1. efforts to avoid thoughts, feelings, or conversations associated with the trauma
  2. efforts to avoid activities, places, or people that arouse recollections of the trauma
  3. inability to recall an important aspect of the trauma
  4. markedly diminished interest toward participation in significant activity
  5. feeling of detachment or estrangement from others
  6. restricted range of affect (e.g., unable to have loving feelings)
  7. sense of a foreshortened future (e.g., does not expect to have a career, marriage, children, or a normal life span)

PROPOSED CHANGE FOR YOUNG CHILDREN

Only one symptom is needed from the following:

  1. constriction of play
  2. socially more withdrawn
  3. restricted range of affect
  4. loss of acquired developmental skills (especially language and toilet training)

Source: Adapted from DSM-IV-TR and Scheeringa et al. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1995;34:191-200.

 

 

  • attenuation in frontal lobe asymmetry and smaller total brain and cerebral volumes in children with PTSD, compared with controls17
  • a lower N-acetylaspartate/creatine ratio in children with PTSD, which suggests altered anterior cingulate neuronal metabolism.18

These apparent changes in brain architecture and metabolism may have functional implications. Children with PTSD have been found to perform more poorly than do controls on measures of attention, abstract reasoning, and executive functioning.16

PTSD treatment in children

Treatment of PTSD in children is strongly influenced by the adult literature and practice guidelines. Most psychiatrists who treat children endorse drug therapy as the first line of treatment, followed by psychodynamic psychotherapy and cognitive-behavioral therapy (CBT). In a recent survey of treatment practices in childhood PTSD, 95% of psychiatrists endorsed the use of medications such as selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs) (47 to 49%), alpha-agonists (16 to 38%), tricyclic antidepressants (11 to 15%), and anxiolytics (12%).

Nonmedical therapists who were included in the survey endorsed the use of eye movement desensitization and reprocessing, CBT, family therapy, and nondirective play therapy.19

Psychotherapy. Preliminary evidence from five controlled trialsindicates that CBT may be an effective first-line treatment for children and adolescents with PTSD:

  • In a study of 100 sexually abused children, PTSD symptoms improved significantly more when children received CBT alone or with their parents, compared with when only their parents received CBT.20 Externalizing and depressive symptoms improved greatly when a parent was included in the child’s treatment, and this improvement was maintained 2 years later.21
  • A randomized study of 80 sexually abused children found little difference between those who received traditional group therapy and others who received group therapy plus CBT.22
  • CBT was found more effective than nondirective supportive therapy in sexually abused preschool children, both initially and at 6- and 12-month intervals, as well as in children ages 7 to 14.23,24
  • After an earthquake in Armenia, children treated with school-based, grief/trauma-focused CBT showed significant improvement on self-reported measures of PTSD and depressive symptoms, compared with children who received no such treatment.25

Pharmacotherapy

Open-label case reports and case series have examined a variety of pharmacotherapies in childhood PTSD, but no double-blind, placebo-controlled studies have been published.

Propranolol. Eleven children with histories of sexual and/or physical abuse exhibited significantly fewer PTSD symptoms during a 5-week regimen of the beta blocker propranolol than either before or after they received the medication.26

Carbamazepine was given to 28 children and adolescents ages 8 to 17 with a primary diagnosis of PTSD. Complete symptom remission was observed in 22 children, and the other 6 had significant improvement—reporting only abuse-related nightmares. Carbamazepine dosages of 300 to 1,200 mg/d yielded serum levels of 10 to 11.5 mcg/ml.

Subjects with comorbid conditions (one-half the sample) required additional medications. Four children with ADHD received stimulants, three with major depressive disorder received SSRIs, and one patient was given imipramine.27

Clonidine treatment resulted in moderate or greater improvement in target symptoms of PTSD in seven preschool children ages 3 to 6 with a history of severe sexual and/or physical abuse. Clonidine dosages ranged from 0.1 mg at bedtime to 0.05 bid plus 0.1 at bedtime.28

SSRIs and other antidepressants. Citalopram was given in a comparison study to 24 children and adolescents and 14 adults with PTSD, with symptoms assessed every 2 weeks based on Clinician Administered PTSD Scale (CAPS) and Clinical Global Impression (CGI) scores. Mean CAPS total score, symptom cluster score, and CGI ratings were significantly reduced in both age groups. Children and adolescents showed greater improvement than adults in hyperarousal symptoms but less in re-experiencing and avoidance symptoms.29

An 8-year-old girl with PTSD and comorbid anxiety disorder initially responded to fluvoxamine. When she relapsed, mirtazapine was added and her overall symptoms improved.30

An adolescent with PTSD treated with nefazodone, up to 600 mg/d, showed improvement in hyperarousal symptoms and anhedonia.31

Summary. In the absence of conclusive scientific evidence—i.e., double-blind, placebo-controlled studies—these case reports reflect common practices in treating PTSD in children and adolescents. American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry practice guidelines defer to the psychiatrist’s judgment to determine the best pharmacologic approach.6 In most cases, evidence from the adult literature influences treatment decisions, and in some cases treatment targets comorbidities such as depression, panic disorder, ADHD, and anxiety.

Box 4

DSM-IV-TR: POSTTRAUMATIC STRESS DISORDER Criterion D: Hyperarousal

Persistent symptoms of increased arousal (not present before the trauma), as indicated by two (or more) of the following:

  1. difficulty falling or staying asleep
  2. irritability or outbursts of anger
  3. difficulty concentrating
  4. hypervigilance
  5. exaggerated startle response

PROPOSED CHANGE FOR YOUNG CHILDREN

  1. night terrors
  2. difficulty going to sleep
  3. night awakening
  4. decreased concentration
  5. hypervigilance
  6. exaggerated startle response

Source: Adapted from DSM-IV-TR and Scheeringa et al. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1995;34:191-200.

 

 

Confronting Steven’s demons. Steven was treated with paroxetine, 15 mg/d, targeting both his depressive and PTSD symptoms; clonidine, 0.05 mg at bedtime, targeting hyperarousal symptoms and ADHD; and risperidone, 0.5 mg bid, which was added last to target his severe aggression and violent behavior.

He also received speech therapy, milieu treatment with the structured setting at the day program, and individual play therapy from the day program’s interns. At home, wrap-around services—including a behavioral specialist and a therapeutic staff support worker—were provided to help his foster family deal with his aggression and difficult behavior.

Conclusion

Current approaches to diagnosis, assessment, and treatment of PTSD in children and adolescents depend in large part on the few available studies conducted in adults, which may not necessarily apply to younger patients. We need more clinical trials involving children and adolescents, better diagnostic instruments, and accurate symptom severity rating scales.

Box 5

DSM-IV-TR: POSTTRAUMATIC STRESS DISORDER Criterion E: Duration of symptoms

Duration of the disturbance (symptoms in Criteria B, C, and D) is more than 1 month.

PROPOSED CHANGE FOR YOUNG CHILDREN

The disturbance has been present for 1 month

Appearance of new symptoms (only one is needed)

  1. new aggression
  2. new separation anxiety
  3. fear of toilet training alone
  4. fear of darkness
  5. any new fears not related to the trauma

Criterion F: Impairment in functioning

The disturbance causes clinically significant distress or impairment in social, occupational, or other important areas of functioning.

PROPOSED CHANGE FOR YOUNG CHILDREN

Function impairment is not needed for the diagnosis

Source: Adapted from DSM-IV-TR and Scheeringa et al. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1995;34:191-200.

Research is leading to new understandings of PTSD in childhood, from more refined diagnostic criteria to observations of changes in brain volume and secretion of stress hormones in maltreated children. Case reports are exploring the safety and efficacy of drug and psychotherapeutic treatments.

Acceptable treatment and management—as indicated by case reports and recommended by the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry—includes CBT or dynamic psychotherapy, group therapy, and drug treatment, especially for PTSD’s comorbidities.

Related resources

Drug brand names

  • Carbamazepine • Tegretol
  • Citalopram • Celexa
  • Clonidine • Catapres
  • Fluvoxamine • Luvox
  • Imipramine • Tofranil
  • Mirtazapine • Remeron
  • Nefazodone • Serzone
  • Paroxetine • Paxil
  • Propranolol • Inderal
  • Risperidone • Risperdal

Disclosure

Dr. Elizabeth Weller reports that she receives research/grant support from Forest Pharmaceuticals, Organon, and Wyeth Pharmaceuticals, and serves as a consultant to Johnson & Johnson, GlaxoSmithKline, and Novartis Pharmaceuticals Corp.

Dr. Shlewiet reports no affiliation or financial arrangement with any of the companies whose products are mentioned in this article, or with manufacturers of competing products.

Dr. Ronald Weller reports that he receives research/grant support from Wyeth Pharmaceuticals, Organon, and Forest Pharmaceuticals.

References

1. American Psychiatric Association. Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders (4th ed). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Association, 1994

2. Frederick CJ. Children traumatized by catastrophic situations. In: Eth S, Pynoos RS (eds). Posttraumatic stress disorder in children. Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Press, 1985;71-100.

3. Garrison CZ, Bryant ES, Addy CL, Spurrier PG, Freedy JR, Kilpatrick DG. Posttraumatic stress disorder in adolescents after Hurricane Andrew. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1995;34:1193-1201.

4. Scheeringa MS, Zeanah CH. Symptom expression and trauma variables in children under 48 months of age. Infant Ment Health J 1995;16:259-70.

5. Scheeringa MS, Zeanah CH, Drell MJ, Larrieu JA. Two approaches to diagnosing post-traumatic stress disorder in infancy and early childhood. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1995;34:191-200.

6. American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry. Practice parameters for the assessment and treatment of posttraumatic stress disorder in children and adolescents. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1998;37(10,suppl):4S-26S.

7. Carrion VG, Weems CF, Ray R, Reiss AL. Toward an empirical definition of pediatric PTSD: the phenomenology of PTSD symptoms in youth. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 2002;41(2):166-73.

8. Silva RR, Alpert M, Munoz DM, Singh S, Matzner F, Dummit S. Stress and vulnerability to posttraumatic stress disorder in children and adolescents. Am J Psychiatry 2000;157(8):1229-35.

9. Foy DW, Madvig BT, et al. Etiologic factors in the development of posttraumatic stress disorders in children and adolescents. J Sch Psychol 1996;34:133-45.

10. Famularo R, Fenton T, Augustyn M, Zuckerman B. Persistence of pediatric posttraumatic stress after two years. Child Abuse Negl 1996;20:1245-8.

11. De Bellis MD, Baum A, Birmaher B, Keshavan MS, Eccard CH, et al. Developmental traumatology part I: Biological stress systems. Biol Psychiatry 1999;45(10):1259-70.

12. De Bellis MD, Keshavan M, Clark DB, Casey BJ, Giedd JN, Boring AM, et al. Developmental traumatology Part II: Brain development. Biol Psychiatry 1999;45:1271-84.

13. Hart J, Gunnar M, Cicchetti D. Altered neuroendocrine activity in maltreated children related to symptoms of depression. Dev Psychopathol 1996;8:201-14.

14. King JA, Madasky D, King S, Fletcher KE, Brewer J. Early sexual abuse and low cortisol. Psychiatry Clin Neurosci 2001;55:71-4.

15. Carrion VG, Weems CF, Ray RD, Glaser B, Hessl D, Reiss AL. Diurnal salivary cortisol in pediatric posttraumatic stress disorder. Biol Psychiatry 2002;51(7):575-82.

16. De Bellis MD, Keshavan M, Frustaci K, Shifflett H, et al. Superior temporal gyrus volumes in maltreated children and adolescents with PTSD. Biol Psychiatry 2002;51:544-52

17. Carrion VG, Weems CF, Eliez S, Patwardhan A, Brown W, et al. Attenuation of frontal asymmetry in pediatric posttraumatic stress disorder. Biol Psychiatry 2001;50:943-51

18. De Bellis MD, Keshavan MS, Spencer S, Hall J. N-acetylaspartate concentration in the anterior cingulate of maltreated children and adolescents with PTSD. Am J Psychiatry 2000;157:1175-7.

19. Cohen JA, Mannarino AP. Treatment outcome study for sexually abused preschool children: initial findings. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1996;35(1):42-50.

20. Deblinger ES, Lippman J, Steer R. Sexually abused children suffering posttraumatic stress symptoms: initial treatment outcome findings. Child Maltreatment 1996;1:310-21.

21. Deblinger ES, Cohen JA. Cognitive behavioral treatment for sexually abused children and their nonoffending parents (workshop) Chicago: American Professional Society on the Abuse of Children, sixth national colloquium,1998.

22. Berliner L, Saunders BE. Treating fear and anxiety in sexually abused children: results of a controlled 2-year follow-up study. Child Maltreatment 1996;1:294-309.

23. Cohen JA, Mannarino AP. Treatment outcome study for sexually abused preschool children: initial findings. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1996;35 (1):42-50.

24. Cohen JA, Mannarino AP. Interventions for sexually abused children: initial treatment findings. Child Maltreatment 1998;3(1):17-26.

25. Goenjian AK, Karayan I, Pynoos RS, Minassian D, Najarian LM, et al. Outcome of psychotherapy among early adolescents after trauma. Am J Psychiatry 1997;154:536-42.

26. Famularo R, Kinscheiff R, Fenton T. Propranolol treatment for childhood PTSD, acute type: a pilot study. Am J Disabled Children 1988;142:1244-7.

27. Looff D, Grimley P, Kuiler F, Martin A, Shunfield L. Carbamazepine for PTSD (letter). J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1995;34 (6):703-4.

28. Harmon RJ, Riggs PD. Clonidine for posttraumatic stress disorder in preschool children. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1996;35(9):1247-9.

29. Seedat S, Lockhat R, Kaminer D, Zungu-Dirwayi N, Stein DJ. An open trial of citalopram in adolescents with post traumatic stress disorder. Int Clin Psychopharmacology 2001;16(1):21-5.

30. Good C, Peterson C. SSRI and mirtazapine in PTSD. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 2001;40:263-4.

31. Domon S, Anderson M. Nefazodone for PTSD. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 2000;39(8):

References

1. American Psychiatric Association. Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders (4th ed). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Association, 1994

2. Frederick CJ. Children traumatized by catastrophic situations. In: Eth S, Pynoos RS (eds). Posttraumatic stress disorder in children. Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Press, 1985;71-100.

3. Garrison CZ, Bryant ES, Addy CL, Spurrier PG, Freedy JR, Kilpatrick DG. Posttraumatic stress disorder in adolescents after Hurricane Andrew. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1995;34:1193-1201.

4. Scheeringa MS, Zeanah CH. Symptom expression and trauma variables in children under 48 months of age. Infant Ment Health J 1995;16:259-70.

5. Scheeringa MS, Zeanah CH, Drell MJ, Larrieu JA. Two approaches to diagnosing post-traumatic stress disorder in infancy and early childhood. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1995;34:191-200.

6. American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry. Practice parameters for the assessment and treatment of posttraumatic stress disorder in children and adolescents. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1998;37(10,suppl):4S-26S.

7. Carrion VG, Weems CF, Ray R, Reiss AL. Toward an empirical definition of pediatric PTSD: the phenomenology of PTSD symptoms in youth. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 2002;41(2):166-73.

8. Silva RR, Alpert M, Munoz DM, Singh S, Matzner F, Dummit S. Stress and vulnerability to posttraumatic stress disorder in children and adolescents. Am J Psychiatry 2000;157(8):1229-35.

9. Foy DW, Madvig BT, et al. Etiologic factors in the development of posttraumatic stress disorders in children and adolescents. J Sch Psychol 1996;34:133-45.

10. Famularo R, Fenton T, Augustyn M, Zuckerman B. Persistence of pediatric posttraumatic stress after two years. Child Abuse Negl 1996;20:1245-8.

11. De Bellis MD, Baum A, Birmaher B, Keshavan MS, Eccard CH, et al. Developmental traumatology part I: Biological stress systems. Biol Psychiatry 1999;45(10):1259-70.

12. De Bellis MD, Keshavan M, Clark DB, Casey BJ, Giedd JN, Boring AM, et al. Developmental traumatology Part II: Brain development. Biol Psychiatry 1999;45:1271-84.

13. Hart J, Gunnar M, Cicchetti D. Altered neuroendocrine activity in maltreated children related to symptoms of depression. Dev Psychopathol 1996;8:201-14.

14. King JA, Madasky D, King S, Fletcher KE, Brewer J. Early sexual abuse and low cortisol. Psychiatry Clin Neurosci 2001;55:71-4.

15. Carrion VG, Weems CF, Ray RD, Glaser B, Hessl D, Reiss AL. Diurnal salivary cortisol in pediatric posttraumatic stress disorder. Biol Psychiatry 2002;51(7):575-82.

16. De Bellis MD, Keshavan M, Frustaci K, Shifflett H, et al. Superior temporal gyrus volumes in maltreated children and adolescents with PTSD. Biol Psychiatry 2002;51:544-52

17. Carrion VG, Weems CF, Eliez S, Patwardhan A, Brown W, et al. Attenuation of frontal asymmetry in pediatric posttraumatic stress disorder. Biol Psychiatry 2001;50:943-51

18. De Bellis MD, Keshavan MS, Spencer S, Hall J. N-acetylaspartate concentration in the anterior cingulate of maltreated children and adolescents with PTSD. Am J Psychiatry 2000;157:1175-7.

19. Cohen JA, Mannarino AP. Treatment outcome study for sexually abused preschool children: initial findings. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1996;35(1):42-50.

20. Deblinger ES, Lippman J, Steer R. Sexually abused children suffering posttraumatic stress symptoms: initial treatment outcome findings. Child Maltreatment 1996;1:310-21.

21. Deblinger ES, Cohen JA. Cognitive behavioral treatment for sexually abused children and their nonoffending parents (workshop) Chicago: American Professional Society on the Abuse of Children, sixth national colloquium,1998.

22. Berliner L, Saunders BE. Treating fear and anxiety in sexually abused children: results of a controlled 2-year follow-up study. Child Maltreatment 1996;1:294-309.

23. Cohen JA, Mannarino AP. Treatment outcome study for sexually abused preschool children: initial findings. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1996;35 (1):42-50.

24. Cohen JA, Mannarino AP. Interventions for sexually abused children: initial treatment findings. Child Maltreatment 1998;3(1):17-26.

25. Goenjian AK, Karayan I, Pynoos RS, Minassian D, Najarian LM, et al. Outcome of psychotherapy among early adolescents after trauma. Am J Psychiatry 1997;154:536-42.

26. Famularo R, Kinscheiff R, Fenton T. Propranolol treatment for childhood PTSD, acute type: a pilot study. Am J Disabled Children 1988;142:1244-7.

27. Looff D, Grimley P, Kuiler F, Martin A, Shunfield L. Carbamazepine for PTSD (letter). J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1995;34 (6):703-4.

28. Harmon RJ, Riggs PD. Clonidine for posttraumatic stress disorder in preschool children. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1996;35(9):1247-9.

29. Seedat S, Lockhat R, Kaminer D, Zungu-Dirwayi N, Stein DJ. An open trial of citalopram in adolescents with post traumatic stress disorder. Int Clin Psychopharmacology 2001;16(1):21-5.

30. Good C, Peterson C. SSRI and mirtazapine in PTSD. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 2001;40:263-4.

31. Domon S, Anderson M. Nefazodone for PTSD. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 2000;39(8):

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(01)
Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(01)
Page Number
30-39
Page Number
30-39
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Traumatized children: Why victims of violence live out their nightmares
Display Headline
Traumatized children: Why victims of violence live out their nightmares
Sections
Article Source

PURLs Copyright

Inside the Article

Article PDF Media

Sport psychiatry: How to keep athletes in the game of life, on or off the field

Article Type
Changed
Tue, 12/11/2018 - 15:12
Display Headline
Sport psychiatry: How to keep athletes in the game of life, on or off the field

Sport psychiatry—a relatively new subspecialty—emphasizes treating mental illness caused in athletes by a pre-existing disposition, stressors unique to sports, or use of anabolic steroids or other substances. Sport psychiatrists do not set out to enhance an athlete’s performance, although effective therapy may produce that outcome.

Athletes of all ages and levels, from Little League to the Olympics, are vulnerable to psychiatric disorders. Using real-life examples, let’s look at the practice of sport psychiatry and examine common psychopathologies in athletes.

Psychiatry in the gym

Psychiatric illness in an amateur or professional athlete may arise from coincidence, a predisposing pathology that first attracted the athlete to the arena, or a psychopathology caused by the sport itself. Some athletes succumb to suicide (Box 1),1 although insufficient data exist to establish the prevalence.

Educating athletes, their families, coaches, and trainers about mental illness is key to identifying at-risk athletes and referring them for treatment. To that end, think of sports and psychiatry in a consultation-liaison model.2 A psychiatrist working alongside an orthopedist at the gym would help remove the stigma of psychiatric illness in sports and allow for timely diagnosis and treatment.

Box 1

NO MORE FOOTBALL, NO MORE MEANING

An article in Sports Illustrated describes a history consistent with attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder in a young man named “Kenny,” who played high school football and ultimately took his own life. In the sportswriter’s words:

“…to be in sports, to be active—that was always what motivated him, diverted him from the less active pleasures of life. His grades were invariably better during the football season. The only time he really floundered was after he finished school, and there was no more football to point to in the fall.”1

Special stressors of athletes

Stressors unique to athletes that may cause, trigger, or worsen psychopathology include pressure to win, constant risk of injury, and the specter of sudden retirement at an early age.

Pressure to win. Parents and coaches pursuing vicarious aspirations may push a child athlete to physical and emotional extremes, a dynamic that Tofler calls “achievement by proxy.”3 These adults may send children away from home for training or remove them from school in the hope that they will excel at a sport. Intense training may preclude normal childhood friendships and pursuits and may become frankly abusive.4

Gymnast Christy Henrich competed in one World Cup gymnastics meet with a broken foot and ultimately died of complications of anorexia nervosa. During the girl’s training, her mother was quoted as saying, “A gymnast without a high pain threshold is a gymnast without a career. Their body is a machine, and they are a person. The two are separate.”5

Injuries can threaten the athlete’s career and are a major cause of stress. Olympic diver Greg Louganis was devastated by knee injuries that ended his gymnastics career at a young age, before he switched to diving.6

Retirement. Even in the absence of injuries, most athletic careers are relatively short because of their physical demands. Professional athletes may be so focused on their sports careers that they are ill-equipped to face life without athletic competition. Retirement, with its abrupt change in emotional support and finances, can be overwhelming.

Golden Gloves boxer Gerry Cooney recalls a difficult descent into retirement, complicated by alcohol. He received treatment and now runs an organization designed to help other boxers through the transition to a life without sports.

Affective disorders in athletes

Unipolar and bipolar affective disorders occur in athletes, as in any population. Sometimes athletes with depression find temporary relief in athletic involvement—in some cases for substantial periods.

Depression. U.S. Olympic diver Wendy Williams describes years of denying and coping with depression. Eventually, however, her affective symptoms required psychiatric intervention. Refusing medication, she first tried psychotherapy alone. Several years later, after a worsening of symptoms and several episodes of suicidal ideation, Williams relented to drug therapy to good effect.7

Bipolar disorder. Bipolar mania can cause the same behavioral disturbances in athletes as in anyone else. Stressors in professional athletes’ lives can trigger a manic episode, however, and the public may witness the episode’s manifestations. When this occurs, the athlete’s mental illness is generally misunderstood by the public and misrepresented in the media.

In discussing the use of psychological screens for prospective National Football League players, for example, a sportswriter explained the rationale as going for “…the right mix of on-field aggression and off-field character. No team wants to draft the next Dimitrius Underwood.”8

Underwood, who reportedly has bipolar disorder, slashed his throat under the pressure of being a first-round draft pick while a member of the Miami Dolphins. He survived and went on to play 19 NFL games before being released this season by the Dallas Cowboys.9

 

 

Anxiety disorders

Obsessive-compulsive disorder may have unique manifestations on the baseball diamond, where the batter wears his “lucky socks” to every game, spits his tobacco juice in a particular pattern, or taps his bat on the ground a requisite number of times before approaching the plate. It is easy to imagine that the features of obsessive-compulsive personality disorder, present in a subset of those with obsessive-compulsive disorder, can contribute to athletic success.

Repetition and perfectionism are required for the athlete who aspires to succeed at the elite level. U.S. speed skater Eric Hayden wore grooves into a wooden board on which he tirelessly practiced the side-to-side motion that hypertrophied his quadriceps en route to the Olympic gold medal.

Social phobia. Some athletes with social phobia appear to express a counterphobic response on the field or find an escape from their anxiety in this forum. Perhaps Ricky Williams, who has acknowledged that he is being treated for social anxiety disorder, takes refuge behind the armor of his helmet and uniform as a running back for the NFL’s Miami Dolphins.10

Panic disorder. Earl Campbell, a former NFL running back, developed panic disorder after his retirement from professional football. The chest pain and palpitations he experienced caused him to seek help, but he told a newspaper reporter, “I didn’t realize I was going to a shrink, and when I found out, I almost slugged him.”11 After an initial prescription of alprazolam, Campbell’s panic symptoms were well managed through relaxation techniques and exercise.

Posttraumatic stress disorder (PTSD). Julie Krone, the celebrated female jockey, developed PTSD after two falls from her mount: a serious spill from which she recovered, and later a more minor fall that resulted in two broken wrists.12 Her anxiety symptoms were treated, and she went on to race horses again before her retirement. She now participates in the Women’s Sports Foundation-sponsored Minds in Motion Depression Campaign to remove the stigma of PTSD.

Other disorders in athletes

ADHD. Children and adolescents with attention-deficit/ hyperactivity disorder (ADHD) may find sports to be adaptive, even therapeutic. Though this theory is untested, anecdotal reports, as in Box 1, are suggestive.

Eating disorders. Certain athletic environments foster eating disorders, especially in athletes who are psychodynamically or genetically predisposed to disordered eating. Eating disorders appear to arise in three major sports categories:

  • Where low body fat provides an advantage, including track and field, swimming, and distance running. Distance runner Mary Wazeter developed an eating disorder while attending Georgetown University on a track scholarship.13
  • Where it is imperative to “make weight,” including wrestling, horse racing, and crew. Thoroughbred jockey Herb McCauley recalls his bulimia developing when he was a high school wrestler, running in rubber suits and vomiting to keep his weight down. Later he won more than 3,000 races at major horse tracks, using diuretics and laxatives on his way to less than 2% body fat.14
  • Where scoring may be based in part on aesthetics, including gymnastics, figure skating, diving, synchronized swimming, and—though not a competitive sport—ballet.

In aesthetic sports, the onset of an athlete’s eating disorder often can be traced to a single, critical comment (Box 2).5

Box 2

‘YOU’RE SO FAT!’, HE SAID, AND SHE STARTED PURGING

In Little Girls in Pretty Boxes—her book about the rigors of gymnastics training and competition—news columnist Joan Ryan reported that one morning coach Bela Karolyi caught gymnast Erica Stokes eating a peach after several hours in the gym. “You’re so lazy!” he bellowed. “You’re so fat! You just come in and pig out after workouts. All you think about is food.” He then made the entire team train an extra 2 hours.

According to Ryan, Stokes began purging after that tirade: “Like stress fractures and torn muscles, vomiting was simply another unavoidable insult her body would have to tolerate if she was going to survive in elite gymnastics.” Ultimately, Stokes’ bulimia became so severe that after 12 years she quit gymnastics, just 9 months before the 1992 Olympic games for which she had been expected to qualify.5

Psychotic disorders also arise in athletes, sometimes after abuse of anabolic steroids or other substances or in association with bipolar disorder or schizophrenia. There is nothing more poignant than treating a first episode of schizophrenia in an adolescent who dreams of becoming the high school’s next great quarterback. The illness itself and necessary drug interventions can pose insurmountable obstacles, although the newer antipsychotics offer reduced side effects compared with older medications.

Substance abuse

Anabolic steroids. At the start of the 2002 baseball season, former Atlanta Braves third baseman Ken Caminiti shocked the sports world with allegations that “at least 50 percent” of Major League Baseball players use anabolic steroids to enhance their performance. Use of anabolic steroids is illegal without a prescription; the National Football League requires screening for steroid use, but Major League Baseball does not.

 

 

The use of performance-enhancing drugs is not unique to baseball15 or to professional athletes. A significant percentage of high school athletes also is believed to be using anabolic steroids,16 which cause psychiatric symptoms ranging from depression to psychosis (“roid rage”) to suicide. Other commonly used performance-enhancing drugs include caffeine, human growth hormone, and erythropoietin.16

Alcohol and drugs. For some professional athletes, alcohol and drug abuse is as much a part of sports culture as sweat and fame. Former Major League Baseball outfielder Darryl Strawberry spent more time in treatment for alcohol and cocaine addiction than he did playing baseball toward the end of his career. He was sentenced in April 2002 to 18 months in prison after 3 years of repeated drug-related offenses and probation violations.

Psychiatric therapy for athletes

Psychotherapy. A range of psychotherapeutic techniques—from cognitive-behavioral and family therapy to insight-oriented psychotherapy—can help the troubled athlete.

Drug therapy. When prescribing psychotropic medications to an athlete, remember that the physiologic effects of exertion—such as fluid loss, increases in VO2 max, and cardiac output—can alter drug metabolism and distribution. These effects need to be assessed case by case.

Psychotropic side effects to avoid in the athlete include sedation, extrapyramidal symptoms, orthostasis, tremor, and cardiac arrhythmias. We know little about the potential for psychotropic drugs to enhance athletic performance, and research is needed.1\7

Related resources

  • Mind Body and Sports (promotes sportsmanship and addresses the emotional needs of athletes of all ages). www.mindbodyandsports.com
  • USA Gymnastics Athlete Wellness Program. www.usa-gymnastics.org/wellness
  • Fuentes RJ, Rosenberg JM (eds). Athletic drug reference. Durham, NC: Clean Data, Inc., 1999.

Drug brand names

  • Alprazolam • Xanax

Disclosure

The author reports no financial relationship with any company whose products are mentioned in this article, or with manufacturers of competing products.

References

1. Deford F. Kenny, dying young. Sports Illustrated March 9, 1981;30-2.

2. Baum AL. Sports psychiatry: An outpatient consultation-liaison model. Psychosomatics 1998;39(4):395-6.

3. Tofler IR, Knapp PK, Drell MJ. The achievement by proxy spectrum in youth sports. Child Adolesc Clin North Am, Sport Psychiatry 1998;7(4):803-20.

4. Klein FC. In gymnastics, younger isn’t always better. Wall Street Journal June 28, 1996.

5. Ryan J. Little girls in pretty boxes. New York: Warner Books, 1995;75-81.

6. Dolen C. In his own words…Greg Louganis. Knight-Ridder/Tribune News Service Nov. 1, 1999:K0485.

7. Hersh P. Ex-olympic diver recovers from the depths. Chicago Tribune April 26, 2001;6-7.

8. Hruby P. Tests of character. Insight on the news. 2000;16:28.-

9. Scorecard. OJ calls the cops—Godzilla attacks—Scalp treatment—Ali vs. Gretzky. Sports Illustrated. Oct. 25, 1999;91(16):33.-

10. Peter J. Plenty of company. Times-Picayune. (New Orleans). May 21, 2001.

11. Hall of Famer fights panic disorder. The Seattle Times. Nov. 1, 1992.

12. Krone J. Symposium on sport psychiatry. Chicago: American Psychiatric Association, 2000.

13. Mannhardt M (Wazeter), Lewis G. Dark marathon:The Mary Wazeter story. The ongoing struggle of a world-class runner. Grand Rapids, MI: Zondervan Publishing, 1989.

14. McCauley H. Psychiatric disorders in a special population: the athlete (part 2). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Association annual meeting, 1999.

15. Shipley A. Baseball players say steroid use is heavy Washington Post May 29,2002: D1.

16. Heath T. Crackdown continues. Washington Post. Sept. 8,2000:D1.

17. Baum AL. Psychopathology in athletes. In: Begel D, Burton R (eds). Sport psychiatry. New York: WW Norton & Co, 2000;249-59.

Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

Antonia L. Baum, MD
Clinical faculty Department of psychiatry George Washington University Medical Center Washington, DC

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(01)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
51-58
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

Antonia L. Baum, MD
Clinical faculty Department of psychiatry George Washington University Medical Center Washington, DC

Author and Disclosure Information

Antonia L. Baum, MD
Clinical faculty Department of psychiatry George Washington University Medical Center Washington, DC

Article PDF
Article PDF

Sport psychiatry—a relatively new subspecialty—emphasizes treating mental illness caused in athletes by a pre-existing disposition, stressors unique to sports, or use of anabolic steroids or other substances. Sport psychiatrists do not set out to enhance an athlete’s performance, although effective therapy may produce that outcome.

Athletes of all ages and levels, from Little League to the Olympics, are vulnerable to psychiatric disorders. Using real-life examples, let’s look at the practice of sport psychiatry and examine common psychopathologies in athletes.

Psychiatry in the gym

Psychiatric illness in an amateur or professional athlete may arise from coincidence, a predisposing pathology that first attracted the athlete to the arena, or a psychopathology caused by the sport itself. Some athletes succumb to suicide (Box 1),1 although insufficient data exist to establish the prevalence.

Educating athletes, their families, coaches, and trainers about mental illness is key to identifying at-risk athletes and referring them for treatment. To that end, think of sports and psychiatry in a consultation-liaison model.2 A psychiatrist working alongside an orthopedist at the gym would help remove the stigma of psychiatric illness in sports and allow for timely diagnosis and treatment.

Box 1

NO MORE FOOTBALL, NO MORE MEANING

An article in Sports Illustrated describes a history consistent with attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder in a young man named “Kenny,” who played high school football and ultimately took his own life. In the sportswriter’s words:

“…to be in sports, to be active—that was always what motivated him, diverted him from the less active pleasures of life. His grades were invariably better during the football season. The only time he really floundered was after he finished school, and there was no more football to point to in the fall.”1

Special stressors of athletes

Stressors unique to athletes that may cause, trigger, or worsen psychopathology include pressure to win, constant risk of injury, and the specter of sudden retirement at an early age.

Pressure to win. Parents and coaches pursuing vicarious aspirations may push a child athlete to physical and emotional extremes, a dynamic that Tofler calls “achievement by proxy.”3 These adults may send children away from home for training or remove them from school in the hope that they will excel at a sport. Intense training may preclude normal childhood friendships and pursuits and may become frankly abusive.4

Gymnast Christy Henrich competed in one World Cup gymnastics meet with a broken foot and ultimately died of complications of anorexia nervosa. During the girl’s training, her mother was quoted as saying, “A gymnast without a high pain threshold is a gymnast without a career. Their body is a machine, and they are a person. The two are separate.”5

Injuries can threaten the athlete’s career and are a major cause of stress. Olympic diver Greg Louganis was devastated by knee injuries that ended his gymnastics career at a young age, before he switched to diving.6

Retirement. Even in the absence of injuries, most athletic careers are relatively short because of their physical demands. Professional athletes may be so focused on their sports careers that they are ill-equipped to face life without athletic competition. Retirement, with its abrupt change in emotional support and finances, can be overwhelming.

Golden Gloves boxer Gerry Cooney recalls a difficult descent into retirement, complicated by alcohol. He received treatment and now runs an organization designed to help other boxers through the transition to a life without sports.

Affective disorders in athletes

Unipolar and bipolar affective disorders occur in athletes, as in any population. Sometimes athletes with depression find temporary relief in athletic involvement—in some cases for substantial periods.

Depression. U.S. Olympic diver Wendy Williams describes years of denying and coping with depression. Eventually, however, her affective symptoms required psychiatric intervention. Refusing medication, she first tried psychotherapy alone. Several years later, after a worsening of symptoms and several episodes of suicidal ideation, Williams relented to drug therapy to good effect.7

Bipolar disorder. Bipolar mania can cause the same behavioral disturbances in athletes as in anyone else. Stressors in professional athletes’ lives can trigger a manic episode, however, and the public may witness the episode’s manifestations. When this occurs, the athlete’s mental illness is generally misunderstood by the public and misrepresented in the media.

In discussing the use of psychological screens for prospective National Football League players, for example, a sportswriter explained the rationale as going for “…the right mix of on-field aggression and off-field character. No team wants to draft the next Dimitrius Underwood.”8

Underwood, who reportedly has bipolar disorder, slashed his throat under the pressure of being a first-round draft pick while a member of the Miami Dolphins. He survived and went on to play 19 NFL games before being released this season by the Dallas Cowboys.9

 

 

Anxiety disorders

Obsessive-compulsive disorder may have unique manifestations on the baseball diamond, where the batter wears his “lucky socks” to every game, spits his tobacco juice in a particular pattern, or taps his bat on the ground a requisite number of times before approaching the plate. It is easy to imagine that the features of obsessive-compulsive personality disorder, present in a subset of those with obsessive-compulsive disorder, can contribute to athletic success.

Repetition and perfectionism are required for the athlete who aspires to succeed at the elite level. U.S. speed skater Eric Hayden wore grooves into a wooden board on which he tirelessly practiced the side-to-side motion that hypertrophied his quadriceps en route to the Olympic gold medal.

Social phobia. Some athletes with social phobia appear to express a counterphobic response on the field or find an escape from their anxiety in this forum. Perhaps Ricky Williams, who has acknowledged that he is being treated for social anxiety disorder, takes refuge behind the armor of his helmet and uniform as a running back for the NFL’s Miami Dolphins.10

Panic disorder. Earl Campbell, a former NFL running back, developed panic disorder after his retirement from professional football. The chest pain and palpitations he experienced caused him to seek help, but he told a newspaper reporter, “I didn’t realize I was going to a shrink, and when I found out, I almost slugged him.”11 After an initial prescription of alprazolam, Campbell’s panic symptoms were well managed through relaxation techniques and exercise.

Posttraumatic stress disorder (PTSD). Julie Krone, the celebrated female jockey, developed PTSD after two falls from her mount: a serious spill from which she recovered, and later a more minor fall that resulted in two broken wrists.12 Her anxiety symptoms were treated, and she went on to race horses again before her retirement. She now participates in the Women’s Sports Foundation-sponsored Minds in Motion Depression Campaign to remove the stigma of PTSD.

Other disorders in athletes

ADHD. Children and adolescents with attention-deficit/ hyperactivity disorder (ADHD) may find sports to be adaptive, even therapeutic. Though this theory is untested, anecdotal reports, as in Box 1, are suggestive.

Eating disorders. Certain athletic environments foster eating disorders, especially in athletes who are psychodynamically or genetically predisposed to disordered eating. Eating disorders appear to arise in three major sports categories:

  • Where low body fat provides an advantage, including track and field, swimming, and distance running. Distance runner Mary Wazeter developed an eating disorder while attending Georgetown University on a track scholarship.13
  • Where it is imperative to “make weight,” including wrestling, horse racing, and crew. Thoroughbred jockey Herb McCauley recalls his bulimia developing when he was a high school wrestler, running in rubber suits and vomiting to keep his weight down. Later he won more than 3,000 races at major horse tracks, using diuretics and laxatives on his way to less than 2% body fat.14
  • Where scoring may be based in part on aesthetics, including gymnastics, figure skating, diving, synchronized swimming, and—though not a competitive sport—ballet.

In aesthetic sports, the onset of an athlete’s eating disorder often can be traced to a single, critical comment (Box 2).5

Box 2

‘YOU’RE SO FAT!’, HE SAID, AND SHE STARTED PURGING

In Little Girls in Pretty Boxes—her book about the rigors of gymnastics training and competition—news columnist Joan Ryan reported that one morning coach Bela Karolyi caught gymnast Erica Stokes eating a peach after several hours in the gym. “You’re so lazy!” he bellowed. “You’re so fat! You just come in and pig out after workouts. All you think about is food.” He then made the entire team train an extra 2 hours.

According to Ryan, Stokes began purging after that tirade: “Like stress fractures and torn muscles, vomiting was simply another unavoidable insult her body would have to tolerate if she was going to survive in elite gymnastics.” Ultimately, Stokes’ bulimia became so severe that after 12 years she quit gymnastics, just 9 months before the 1992 Olympic games for which she had been expected to qualify.5

Psychotic disorders also arise in athletes, sometimes after abuse of anabolic steroids or other substances or in association with bipolar disorder or schizophrenia. There is nothing more poignant than treating a first episode of schizophrenia in an adolescent who dreams of becoming the high school’s next great quarterback. The illness itself and necessary drug interventions can pose insurmountable obstacles, although the newer antipsychotics offer reduced side effects compared with older medications.

Substance abuse

Anabolic steroids. At the start of the 2002 baseball season, former Atlanta Braves third baseman Ken Caminiti shocked the sports world with allegations that “at least 50 percent” of Major League Baseball players use anabolic steroids to enhance their performance. Use of anabolic steroids is illegal without a prescription; the National Football League requires screening for steroid use, but Major League Baseball does not.

 

 

The use of performance-enhancing drugs is not unique to baseball15 or to professional athletes. A significant percentage of high school athletes also is believed to be using anabolic steroids,16 which cause psychiatric symptoms ranging from depression to psychosis (“roid rage”) to suicide. Other commonly used performance-enhancing drugs include caffeine, human growth hormone, and erythropoietin.16

Alcohol and drugs. For some professional athletes, alcohol and drug abuse is as much a part of sports culture as sweat and fame. Former Major League Baseball outfielder Darryl Strawberry spent more time in treatment for alcohol and cocaine addiction than he did playing baseball toward the end of his career. He was sentenced in April 2002 to 18 months in prison after 3 years of repeated drug-related offenses and probation violations.

Psychiatric therapy for athletes

Psychotherapy. A range of psychotherapeutic techniques—from cognitive-behavioral and family therapy to insight-oriented psychotherapy—can help the troubled athlete.

Drug therapy. When prescribing psychotropic medications to an athlete, remember that the physiologic effects of exertion—such as fluid loss, increases in VO2 max, and cardiac output—can alter drug metabolism and distribution. These effects need to be assessed case by case.

Psychotropic side effects to avoid in the athlete include sedation, extrapyramidal symptoms, orthostasis, tremor, and cardiac arrhythmias. We know little about the potential for psychotropic drugs to enhance athletic performance, and research is needed.1\7

Related resources

  • Mind Body and Sports (promotes sportsmanship and addresses the emotional needs of athletes of all ages). www.mindbodyandsports.com
  • USA Gymnastics Athlete Wellness Program. www.usa-gymnastics.org/wellness
  • Fuentes RJ, Rosenberg JM (eds). Athletic drug reference. Durham, NC: Clean Data, Inc., 1999.

Drug brand names

  • Alprazolam • Xanax

Disclosure

The author reports no financial relationship with any company whose products are mentioned in this article, or with manufacturers of competing products.

Sport psychiatry—a relatively new subspecialty—emphasizes treating mental illness caused in athletes by a pre-existing disposition, stressors unique to sports, or use of anabolic steroids or other substances. Sport psychiatrists do not set out to enhance an athlete’s performance, although effective therapy may produce that outcome.

Athletes of all ages and levels, from Little League to the Olympics, are vulnerable to psychiatric disorders. Using real-life examples, let’s look at the practice of sport psychiatry and examine common psychopathologies in athletes.

Psychiatry in the gym

Psychiatric illness in an amateur or professional athlete may arise from coincidence, a predisposing pathology that first attracted the athlete to the arena, or a psychopathology caused by the sport itself. Some athletes succumb to suicide (Box 1),1 although insufficient data exist to establish the prevalence.

Educating athletes, their families, coaches, and trainers about mental illness is key to identifying at-risk athletes and referring them for treatment. To that end, think of sports and psychiatry in a consultation-liaison model.2 A psychiatrist working alongside an orthopedist at the gym would help remove the stigma of psychiatric illness in sports and allow for timely diagnosis and treatment.

Box 1

NO MORE FOOTBALL, NO MORE MEANING

An article in Sports Illustrated describes a history consistent with attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder in a young man named “Kenny,” who played high school football and ultimately took his own life. In the sportswriter’s words:

“…to be in sports, to be active—that was always what motivated him, diverted him from the less active pleasures of life. His grades were invariably better during the football season. The only time he really floundered was after he finished school, and there was no more football to point to in the fall.”1

Special stressors of athletes

Stressors unique to athletes that may cause, trigger, or worsen psychopathology include pressure to win, constant risk of injury, and the specter of sudden retirement at an early age.

Pressure to win. Parents and coaches pursuing vicarious aspirations may push a child athlete to physical and emotional extremes, a dynamic that Tofler calls “achievement by proxy.”3 These adults may send children away from home for training or remove them from school in the hope that they will excel at a sport. Intense training may preclude normal childhood friendships and pursuits and may become frankly abusive.4

Gymnast Christy Henrich competed in one World Cup gymnastics meet with a broken foot and ultimately died of complications of anorexia nervosa. During the girl’s training, her mother was quoted as saying, “A gymnast without a high pain threshold is a gymnast without a career. Their body is a machine, and they are a person. The two are separate.”5

Injuries can threaten the athlete’s career and are a major cause of stress. Olympic diver Greg Louganis was devastated by knee injuries that ended his gymnastics career at a young age, before he switched to diving.6

Retirement. Even in the absence of injuries, most athletic careers are relatively short because of their physical demands. Professional athletes may be so focused on their sports careers that they are ill-equipped to face life without athletic competition. Retirement, with its abrupt change in emotional support and finances, can be overwhelming.

Golden Gloves boxer Gerry Cooney recalls a difficult descent into retirement, complicated by alcohol. He received treatment and now runs an organization designed to help other boxers through the transition to a life without sports.

Affective disorders in athletes

Unipolar and bipolar affective disorders occur in athletes, as in any population. Sometimes athletes with depression find temporary relief in athletic involvement—in some cases for substantial periods.

Depression. U.S. Olympic diver Wendy Williams describes years of denying and coping with depression. Eventually, however, her affective symptoms required psychiatric intervention. Refusing medication, she first tried psychotherapy alone. Several years later, after a worsening of symptoms and several episodes of suicidal ideation, Williams relented to drug therapy to good effect.7

Bipolar disorder. Bipolar mania can cause the same behavioral disturbances in athletes as in anyone else. Stressors in professional athletes’ lives can trigger a manic episode, however, and the public may witness the episode’s manifestations. When this occurs, the athlete’s mental illness is generally misunderstood by the public and misrepresented in the media.

In discussing the use of psychological screens for prospective National Football League players, for example, a sportswriter explained the rationale as going for “…the right mix of on-field aggression and off-field character. No team wants to draft the next Dimitrius Underwood.”8

Underwood, who reportedly has bipolar disorder, slashed his throat under the pressure of being a first-round draft pick while a member of the Miami Dolphins. He survived and went on to play 19 NFL games before being released this season by the Dallas Cowboys.9

 

 

Anxiety disorders

Obsessive-compulsive disorder may have unique manifestations on the baseball diamond, where the batter wears his “lucky socks” to every game, spits his tobacco juice in a particular pattern, or taps his bat on the ground a requisite number of times before approaching the plate. It is easy to imagine that the features of obsessive-compulsive personality disorder, present in a subset of those with obsessive-compulsive disorder, can contribute to athletic success.

Repetition and perfectionism are required for the athlete who aspires to succeed at the elite level. U.S. speed skater Eric Hayden wore grooves into a wooden board on which he tirelessly practiced the side-to-side motion that hypertrophied his quadriceps en route to the Olympic gold medal.

Social phobia. Some athletes with social phobia appear to express a counterphobic response on the field or find an escape from their anxiety in this forum. Perhaps Ricky Williams, who has acknowledged that he is being treated for social anxiety disorder, takes refuge behind the armor of his helmet and uniform as a running back for the NFL’s Miami Dolphins.10

Panic disorder. Earl Campbell, a former NFL running back, developed panic disorder after his retirement from professional football. The chest pain and palpitations he experienced caused him to seek help, but he told a newspaper reporter, “I didn’t realize I was going to a shrink, and when I found out, I almost slugged him.”11 After an initial prescription of alprazolam, Campbell’s panic symptoms were well managed through relaxation techniques and exercise.

Posttraumatic stress disorder (PTSD). Julie Krone, the celebrated female jockey, developed PTSD after two falls from her mount: a serious spill from which she recovered, and later a more minor fall that resulted in two broken wrists.12 Her anxiety symptoms were treated, and she went on to race horses again before her retirement. She now participates in the Women’s Sports Foundation-sponsored Minds in Motion Depression Campaign to remove the stigma of PTSD.

Other disorders in athletes

ADHD. Children and adolescents with attention-deficit/ hyperactivity disorder (ADHD) may find sports to be adaptive, even therapeutic. Though this theory is untested, anecdotal reports, as in Box 1, are suggestive.

Eating disorders. Certain athletic environments foster eating disorders, especially in athletes who are psychodynamically or genetically predisposed to disordered eating. Eating disorders appear to arise in three major sports categories:

  • Where low body fat provides an advantage, including track and field, swimming, and distance running. Distance runner Mary Wazeter developed an eating disorder while attending Georgetown University on a track scholarship.13
  • Where it is imperative to “make weight,” including wrestling, horse racing, and crew. Thoroughbred jockey Herb McCauley recalls his bulimia developing when he was a high school wrestler, running in rubber suits and vomiting to keep his weight down. Later he won more than 3,000 races at major horse tracks, using diuretics and laxatives on his way to less than 2% body fat.14
  • Where scoring may be based in part on aesthetics, including gymnastics, figure skating, diving, synchronized swimming, and—though not a competitive sport—ballet.

In aesthetic sports, the onset of an athlete’s eating disorder often can be traced to a single, critical comment (Box 2).5

Box 2

‘YOU’RE SO FAT!’, HE SAID, AND SHE STARTED PURGING

In Little Girls in Pretty Boxes—her book about the rigors of gymnastics training and competition—news columnist Joan Ryan reported that one morning coach Bela Karolyi caught gymnast Erica Stokes eating a peach after several hours in the gym. “You’re so lazy!” he bellowed. “You’re so fat! You just come in and pig out after workouts. All you think about is food.” He then made the entire team train an extra 2 hours.

According to Ryan, Stokes began purging after that tirade: “Like stress fractures and torn muscles, vomiting was simply another unavoidable insult her body would have to tolerate if she was going to survive in elite gymnastics.” Ultimately, Stokes’ bulimia became so severe that after 12 years she quit gymnastics, just 9 months before the 1992 Olympic games for which she had been expected to qualify.5

Psychotic disorders also arise in athletes, sometimes after abuse of anabolic steroids or other substances or in association with bipolar disorder or schizophrenia. There is nothing more poignant than treating a first episode of schizophrenia in an adolescent who dreams of becoming the high school’s next great quarterback. The illness itself and necessary drug interventions can pose insurmountable obstacles, although the newer antipsychotics offer reduced side effects compared with older medications.

Substance abuse

Anabolic steroids. At the start of the 2002 baseball season, former Atlanta Braves third baseman Ken Caminiti shocked the sports world with allegations that “at least 50 percent” of Major League Baseball players use anabolic steroids to enhance their performance. Use of anabolic steroids is illegal without a prescription; the National Football League requires screening for steroid use, but Major League Baseball does not.

 

 

The use of performance-enhancing drugs is not unique to baseball15 or to professional athletes. A significant percentage of high school athletes also is believed to be using anabolic steroids,16 which cause psychiatric symptoms ranging from depression to psychosis (“roid rage”) to suicide. Other commonly used performance-enhancing drugs include caffeine, human growth hormone, and erythropoietin.16

Alcohol and drugs. For some professional athletes, alcohol and drug abuse is as much a part of sports culture as sweat and fame. Former Major League Baseball outfielder Darryl Strawberry spent more time in treatment for alcohol and cocaine addiction than he did playing baseball toward the end of his career. He was sentenced in April 2002 to 18 months in prison after 3 years of repeated drug-related offenses and probation violations.

Psychiatric therapy for athletes

Psychotherapy. A range of psychotherapeutic techniques—from cognitive-behavioral and family therapy to insight-oriented psychotherapy—can help the troubled athlete.

Drug therapy. When prescribing psychotropic medications to an athlete, remember that the physiologic effects of exertion—such as fluid loss, increases in VO2 max, and cardiac output—can alter drug metabolism and distribution. These effects need to be assessed case by case.

Psychotropic side effects to avoid in the athlete include sedation, extrapyramidal symptoms, orthostasis, tremor, and cardiac arrhythmias. We know little about the potential for psychotropic drugs to enhance athletic performance, and research is needed.1\7

Related resources

  • Mind Body and Sports (promotes sportsmanship and addresses the emotional needs of athletes of all ages). www.mindbodyandsports.com
  • USA Gymnastics Athlete Wellness Program. www.usa-gymnastics.org/wellness
  • Fuentes RJ, Rosenberg JM (eds). Athletic drug reference. Durham, NC: Clean Data, Inc., 1999.

Drug brand names

  • Alprazolam • Xanax

Disclosure

The author reports no financial relationship with any company whose products are mentioned in this article, or with manufacturers of competing products.

References

1. Deford F. Kenny, dying young. Sports Illustrated March 9, 1981;30-2.

2. Baum AL. Sports psychiatry: An outpatient consultation-liaison model. Psychosomatics 1998;39(4):395-6.

3. Tofler IR, Knapp PK, Drell MJ. The achievement by proxy spectrum in youth sports. Child Adolesc Clin North Am, Sport Psychiatry 1998;7(4):803-20.

4. Klein FC. In gymnastics, younger isn’t always better. Wall Street Journal June 28, 1996.

5. Ryan J. Little girls in pretty boxes. New York: Warner Books, 1995;75-81.

6. Dolen C. In his own words…Greg Louganis. Knight-Ridder/Tribune News Service Nov. 1, 1999:K0485.

7. Hersh P. Ex-olympic diver recovers from the depths. Chicago Tribune April 26, 2001;6-7.

8. Hruby P. Tests of character. Insight on the news. 2000;16:28.-

9. Scorecard. OJ calls the cops—Godzilla attacks—Scalp treatment—Ali vs. Gretzky. Sports Illustrated. Oct. 25, 1999;91(16):33.-

10. Peter J. Plenty of company. Times-Picayune. (New Orleans). May 21, 2001.

11. Hall of Famer fights panic disorder. The Seattle Times. Nov. 1, 1992.

12. Krone J. Symposium on sport psychiatry. Chicago: American Psychiatric Association, 2000.

13. Mannhardt M (Wazeter), Lewis G. Dark marathon:The Mary Wazeter story. The ongoing struggle of a world-class runner. Grand Rapids, MI: Zondervan Publishing, 1989.

14. McCauley H. Psychiatric disorders in a special population: the athlete (part 2). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Association annual meeting, 1999.

15. Shipley A. Baseball players say steroid use is heavy Washington Post May 29,2002: D1.

16. Heath T. Crackdown continues. Washington Post. Sept. 8,2000:D1.

17. Baum AL. Psychopathology in athletes. In: Begel D, Burton R (eds). Sport psychiatry. New York: WW Norton & Co, 2000;249-59.

References

1. Deford F. Kenny, dying young. Sports Illustrated March 9, 1981;30-2.

2. Baum AL. Sports psychiatry: An outpatient consultation-liaison model. Psychosomatics 1998;39(4):395-6.

3. Tofler IR, Knapp PK, Drell MJ. The achievement by proxy spectrum in youth sports. Child Adolesc Clin North Am, Sport Psychiatry 1998;7(4):803-20.

4. Klein FC. In gymnastics, younger isn’t always better. Wall Street Journal June 28, 1996.

5. Ryan J. Little girls in pretty boxes. New York: Warner Books, 1995;75-81.

6. Dolen C. In his own words…Greg Louganis. Knight-Ridder/Tribune News Service Nov. 1, 1999:K0485.

7. Hersh P. Ex-olympic diver recovers from the depths. Chicago Tribune April 26, 2001;6-7.

8. Hruby P. Tests of character. Insight on the news. 2000;16:28.-

9. Scorecard. OJ calls the cops—Godzilla attacks—Scalp treatment—Ali vs. Gretzky. Sports Illustrated. Oct. 25, 1999;91(16):33.-

10. Peter J. Plenty of company. Times-Picayune. (New Orleans). May 21, 2001.

11. Hall of Famer fights panic disorder. The Seattle Times. Nov. 1, 1992.

12. Krone J. Symposium on sport psychiatry. Chicago: American Psychiatric Association, 2000.

13. Mannhardt M (Wazeter), Lewis G. Dark marathon:The Mary Wazeter story. The ongoing struggle of a world-class runner. Grand Rapids, MI: Zondervan Publishing, 1989.

14. McCauley H. Psychiatric disorders in a special population: the athlete (part 2). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Association annual meeting, 1999.

15. Shipley A. Baseball players say steroid use is heavy Washington Post May 29,2002: D1.

16. Heath T. Crackdown continues. Washington Post. Sept. 8,2000:D1.

17. Baum AL. Psychopathology in athletes. In: Begel D, Burton R (eds). Sport psychiatry. New York: WW Norton & Co, 2000;249-59.

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(01)
Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(01)
Page Number
51-58
Page Number
51-58
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Sport psychiatry: How to keep athletes in the game of life, on or off the field
Display Headline
Sport psychiatry: How to keep athletes in the game of life, on or off the field
Sections
Article Source

PURLs Copyright

Inside the Article

Article PDF Media

Schizoaffective disorder: Which symptoms should be treated first?

Article Type
Changed
Tue, 12/11/2018 - 15:12
Display Headline
Schizoaffective disorder: Which symptoms should be treated first?

Psychiatry has used the term “schizoaffective disorder” for more than 60 years, but its specific meaning remains uncertain. Patients who meet its diagnostic criteria typically present with a confusing blend of mood and psychotic symptoms, and we often classify them as being schizoaffective because we don’t know where else to put them.

Much of our difficulty in trying to determine what schizoaffective disorder is can be blamed on insufficient data. We do not know the specific cause of either schizophrenic or mood disorders, and today’s concepts of these broad diagnoses probably encompass multiple etiologies.

Based on the evidence and clinical experience, this article presents:

  • the evolution of schizoaffective disorder as a psychiatric diagnosis
  • the four main concepts that attempt to explain the disorder’s cause
  • and a practical approach for managing these patients’ complicated symptoms.

Origins of schizoaffective disorder

When Jacob Kasanin1 riginated the term schizoaffective disorder in 1933, psychiatry was struggling to integrate Emil Kraepelin’s and Eugene Bleuler’s two competing and complementary schemes for understanding psychotic disorders.

Kraepelin had proposed that the major psychoses could be divided between dementia praecox and manic-depressive insanity (and to a lesser extent, paraphrenia), based on the presenting symptoms and—importantly—course of illness:2

  • Manic-depressive insanity typically included periods of full recovery of mental functions between episodes.
  • Dementia praecox was defined by a steady deterioration of mental function and personality from which patients rarely recovered.

Box

DSM-IV CRITERIA FOR SCHIZOAFFECTIVE DISORDER

  1. An uninterrupted period of illness during which, at some time, there is either a major depressive episode, a manic episode, or a mixed episode concurrent with symptoms that meet Criterion A for schizophrenia:
  2. During the same period of illness, there have been delusions or hallucinations for at least 2 weeks in the absence of prominent mood symptoms.
  3. Symptoms that meet criteria for a mood episode are present for a substantial portion of the total duration of the active and residual periods of the illness.
  4. The disturbance is not due to the direct physiological effects of a substance (e.g., a drug of abuse, a medication) or a general medical condition.

Specific type:

Bipolar type: If the disturbance includes a manic or a mixed episode (or a manic or a mixed episode and major depressive episodes)

Depressive type: If the disturbance only includes major depressive episodes.

Source: Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders (4th ed., TR). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Association, 2000.

This distinction was a landmark in psychiatry but did not offer a specific understanding of the mental or brain dysfunctions underlying these conditions nor a cross-sectional means to diagnose a patient’s condition.

Bleuler was less concerned with predicting course and outcome. Instead, he wished to understand his observations that patients commonly exhibited a disjunction among psychological processes that were integrated in healthy individuals.3 He described the cause of this loss of psychological integration as the “schizophrenias” or, literally, “split mind.” In the schizophrenias, he identified symptoms that seemed to reflect this psychological disjunction, such as flat affect, ambivalence, and splitting of cognition from emotion and behavior.

Because Kraepelin described many of these same symptoms in dementia praecox, clinicians tended to equate the schizophrenias with dementia praecox. However, many more patients with Bleuler’s schizophrenia recovered than did those with Kraepelin’s dementia praecox (essentially by definition). Therefore, some “schizophrenic” patients appeared to meet Kraepelin’s diagnosis of manic-depressive insanity. At this point, Kasanin stepped into the fray with his concept of schizoaffective disorder.

Kasanin’s conceptualization

Kasanin recognized that many patients exhibited a blending of Bleuler’s schizophrenia symptoms with those of Kraepelin’s manic-depressive (affective) illness.1 Moreover, unlike patients with dementia praecox, these blended patients exhibited:

  • good premorbid adjustment
  • typically a sudden illness onset with marked emotional turmoil
  • few symptoms of withdrawal or passivity
  • and a relatively short course with complete recovery.

In reporting these patients and subsequently originating the term “schizoaffective psychosis,” Kasanin tried to identify a homogeneous patient population that could be distinguished from the more broadly conceptualized Bleulerian schizophrenias and the more narrowly defined Kraepelinian categories.

The term “schizoaffective disorder” has evolved from this beginning. Interestingly, most—if not all—of the nine cases reported by Kasanin would be diagnosed with an affective disorder with psychotic features under today’s diagnostic criteria.4 Nonetheless, the term “schizoaffective disorder” was adopted by psychiatry (particularly in the United States) and has been used to classify patients who present with features of both schizophrenia and affective illness but cannot be clearly described as having either.

Evolutions from DSM-I to DSM-III

In American nosology, schizoaffective disorder was included as a subtype of schizophrenia in DSM-I (1952)5 and DSM-II (1968)6 and then reclassified in DSM-III (1980)7 as a “psychotic disorder not elsewhere classified.” Remarkably, none of these classifications provided criteria for diagnosing schizoaffective disorder.

 

 

Shortly before publication of DSM-III, Robert Spitzer, MD, and colleagues at the New York Neuropsychiatric Institute developed diagnostic criteria for schizoaffective disorder as part of their research diagnostic criteria (RDC).8 The RDC separated patients with affective and certain types of psychotic symptoms, suggestive of schizophrenia at that time, into two types—schizoaffective mania and schizoaffective depression—based on the polarity of the mood symptoms.

The psychotic symptoms identified as “schizophrenic” by the RDC were certain first-rank symptoms designated by Kurt Schneider, such as delusions of being controlled or mood-incongruent hallucinations. [Note: In recent studies, neither first-rank symptoms nor other subtypes of psychotic symptoms (moodincongruent delusions or hallucinations) have been shown to specifically identify patients with schizophrenia.9,10 In fact, no psychotic symptoms are considered pathognomonic for any specific disorder at this time.]

The RDC also introduced the idea that schizoaffective disorder was distinct from psychotic mood disorder in that:

  • psychotic symptoms persisted for a specific period (1 week), during which mood symptoms were absent
  • and mood and psychotic symptoms overlapped at some time during the course of illness.

These criteria were then adopted with modifications in DSM-III-R,11 which provided the first widely-accepted, well-defined criteria for schizoaffective disorder.

DSM-III-R and DSM-IV

DSM-III-R defined schizoaffective disorder based on relationships between affective syndromes and the criteria for schizophrenia. Specifically, the diagnosis required the presence of a full depressive or manic syndrome while the patient also met criteria for schizophrenia. To distinguish schizoaffective disorder from psychotic mood disorders, DSM-III-R required that psychotic symptoms persist for 2 weeks in the absence of “prominent” mood symptoms.

Unfortunately, “prominent” was not defined, leaving a fair amount of discretion to clinicians and making it difficult to standardize research studies. In addition, the predictive utility of 2 weeks of psychosis has not been strongly validated. In fact, the time span at which psychosis without a mood disorder identifies a new syndrome is not known.

To rule out schizophrenia, the mood syndrome could not have been “brief” relative to the psychosis; again, what “brief” meant was difficult to put into practice. Notably, there was no specific requirement to rule out mood disorders (i.e., that the psychosis was not brief relative to the duration of mood symptoms).

DSM-IV slightly modified these criteria,12 but their basic flavor from DSM-III-R was retained. Despite their limitations, the diagnostic criteria in DSM-III-R and DSM-IV at least provided clinicians and scientists the means to consistently identify schizoaffective disorder. The diagnostic criteria (Box) are still considered reliable today.13

Four concepts of schizoaffective disorder

Relatively few studies of schizoaffective disorder exist, so the diagnosis remains poorly validated. At least four concepts have been developed (Figure).4

Concept 1: Schizoaffective disorder is a variant of schizophrenia. Many of the characteristics of schizoaffective disorder that Kasanin first described, such as rapid onset and confusion, were identified as good prognostic indicators in later concepts of schizophrenia. Some family history studies also suggest a link between schizophrenic and schizoaffective disorders.15

Concept 2: Schizoaffective disorder is a variant of mood disorder. 9 Schizoaffective disorder represents a pernicious type of mood disorder in which psychotic symptoms persist and the course of illness is worse than in other variants (although better than in schizophrenia).16 Family studies are unclear about links between mood and schizoaffective disorders.17

Figure FOUR CONCEPTS THAT SEEK TO EXPLAIN SCHIZOAFFECTIVE DISORDER


Figure. Four conceptualizations explain schizoaffective disorder as (1) a type of schizophrenia; (2) a type of mood disorder; (3) a heterogeneous combination of patients with schizophrenia, mood disorder, and “real” schizoaffective disorder; and (4) as part of a continuum of psychotic disorders from worst prognosis (schizophrenia) to best prognosis (major depression).Concept 3: Schizoaffective disorder represents a heterogeneous combination of schizophrenia and mood disorder. Specifically, schizoaffective disorder may comprise a group of patients with severe psychotic mood disorders and either good-prognosis schizophrenia or schizophrenia with numerous affective symptoms.

A subgroup of patients with “true” schizoaffective disorder (distinct from schizophrenic or mood disorders) might also exist.18 As a twist on this idea, others have suggested that schizoaffective disorder, bipolar type is simply a variant of bipolar disorder, whereas schizoaffective disorder, depressed type is more closely akin to schizophrenia. The fact that depression occurs at some time in most patients with schizophrenia supports this view.

Concept 4: Psychotic disorders share a genetic vulnerability and exist on a continuum (from worst to best prognosis) from schizophrenia, to schizoaffective disorder, to psychotic then nonpsychotic bipolar and major depressive disorders.19

A lack of definitive evidence prevents us from choosing among these concepts; good studies support and discount each possibility.

 

 

Patient management

When faced with a patient who meets criteria for schizoaffective disorder, I believe practical considerations can guide treatment. The label “schizoaffective disorder” reminds us to consider treatment of these patients broadly (in contrast, for example, to the label “schizophreniform disorder,” which implies a stronger link to schizophrenia than outcome studies support21).

Treat the mood component first. In most patients with schizoaffective disorder, it is difficult to distinguish between diagnoses of schizophrenia or mood disorder. It is prudent to begin by aggressively treating the mood component, because psychotic mood disorders generally respond more favorably to treatment than does schizophrenia. Use mood stabilizers for patients with a history of mania and antidepressants in depressed patients with no history of mania.

As is true for psychotic mood disorders, concurrent administration of an antipsychotic is often warranted. Recent studies strongly suggest that atypical antipsychotics are preferred over traditional neuroleptics to treat psychotic patients in general, and this preference extends to patients with schizoaffective disorder.4,14,20

Some—if not most—atypical antipsychotics may have mood-stabilizing or antidepressant properties and may permit monotherapy of patients with schizoaffective disorder. Controlled clinical trials have not examined these agents as long-term maintenance therapy for the mood component of schizoaffective disorder, however. Until such studies are completed, many patients may require long-term mood-stabilizer or antidepressant therapy, with or without ongoing antipsychotic treatment.4,14

The next step. Alternate treatments should be considered for patients in whom trials of atypical antipsychotics have failed, both in combination with thymoleptics and in monotherapy. Conventional antipsychotics, particularly depot formulations, are a reasonable intervention, particularly in schizoaffective patients with minimal mood symptoms.

Clozapine remains a first-line choice for patients with treatment-resistant psychotic disorders and should be considered in patients with treatment-resistant schizoaffective disorder as well.

Conclusion

Patients meeting criteria for schizoaffective disorder typically present with a complex and confusing combination of affective and psychotic symptoms. The diagnosis continues to be applied predominantly to patients who are otherwise difficult to classify, and the diagnostic criteria supporting the presence of a distinct condition remain poorly validated.

Schizoaffective disorder probably defines a heterogeneous group of patients, but—practically speaking—they can often be managed by following algorithms for psychotic mood disorders.4,13 The most prudent long-term approach seems to be to keep treatment options flexible, with careful attention to managing symptoms as they wax and wane, rather than rigidly fixing on a single medication or type of medication.

Related resources

  • National Mental Health Association factsheet on schizoaffective disorder www.nmha.org/infoctr/factsheets/52.cfm
  • Reichenberg A, Weiser M, Rabinowitz, J, et al. A population-based cohort study of premorbid intellectual, language, and behavioral functioning in patients with schizophrenia, schizoaffective disorder, and nonpsychotic bipolar disorder. Am J Psychiatry 2002;159(12):2027-35.
  • Robinson DG, Woerner, MG, Alvir JM, et al. Predictors of medication discontinuation by patients with first-episode schizophrenia and schizoaffective disorder. Schizophr Res 2002;57(2-3):209-19.
References

1. Kasanin J. The acute schizoaffective psychoses. Am J Psychiatry 1933;113:97-126.

2. Kraepelin E. Dementia praecox and paraphrenia, together with manic depressive insanity. Translated from original texts by The Classics of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences Library. Delran, NJ; Gryphon Editions, 1993.

3. Bleuler E. Text-book of psychiatry. Translated from original texts by The Classics of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences Library. Delran, NJ: Gryphon Editions, 1994.

4. Keck PE, Jr, McElroy SL, Strakowski SM/, West SA. Pharmacologic treatment of schizoaffective disorder. Psychopharmacology 1994;114:529-38.

5. Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders. Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Association, 1952.

6. Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders (2nd ed). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Association, 1968.

7. Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders (3rd ed). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Association, 1980.

8. Spitzer RL, Endicott J, Robins E. Research diagnostic criteria. Rationale and reliability. Arch Gen Psychiatry 1978;35:773-82.

9. Pope HG, Jr, Lipinski JF. Diagnosis of schizophrenia and manic-depressive illness: a reassessment of the specificity of ‘schizophrenic’ symptoms in the light of current research. Arch Gen Psychiatry 1978;35:811-28.

10. Strakowski SM, McElroy SL, Keck PE, Jr, West SA. Racial influence on diagnosis in psychotic mania. J Affect Disord 1996;39:157-62.

11. Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders (3rd ed, rev). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Press, 1987.

12. Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders (4th ed). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Press, 1994.

13. Keck PE, Jr., McElroy SL, Strakowski SM. New developments in the pharmacologic treatment of schizoaffective disorder. J Clin Psychiatry 1996;57S:41-8.

14. Clayton PJ. Schizoaffective disorders. J Nerv Ment Dis 1982;170:646-50.

15. Kendler KS, Spitzer RL, Williams JBW. Psychotic disorders in DSM-III-R. Am J Psychiatry 1989;146:953-62.

16. Strakowski SM, Keck PE, Jr, Sax KW, McElroy SL, Hawkins JM. Twelve-month outcome of patients with DSM-III-R schizoaffective disorder: comparisons to matched patients with bipolar disorder. Schizophrenia Res 1999;35:167-74.

17. Maier W, Lichtermann D, Minges J, Heun R, Hallmayer J, Benkert O. Schizoaffective disorder and affective disorders with mood-incongruent psychotic feathers: keep separate or combine? Evidence from a family study. Am J Psychiatry 1992;149:1666-73.

18. Kendler KS, McGuire M, Gruenberg AM, Walsh D. Examining the validity of DSM-III-R schizoaffective disorder and its putative subtypes in the Roscommon Family Study. Am J Psychiatry 1995;152:755-64.

19. Crow TJ. A continuum of psychosis, one human gene and not much else—the case for homogeneity. Schizophrenia Res 1995;17:135-45.

20. Strakowski SM, DelBello MP, Adler CM. Comparative tolerability of drug treatments for bipolar disorder. CNS Drugs 2001;15:701-18.

21. Strakowski SM. Diagnostic validity of schizophreniform disorder. Am J Psychiatry 1994;151:815-24.

Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

Stephen M. Strakowski, MD
Professor of psychiatry, psychology, neuroscience, and biomedical engineering University of Cincinnati College of Medicine Cincinnati, OH

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(01)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
22-29
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

Stephen M. Strakowski, MD
Professor of psychiatry, psychology, neuroscience, and biomedical engineering University of Cincinnati College of Medicine Cincinnati, OH

Author and Disclosure Information

Stephen M. Strakowski, MD
Professor of psychiatry, psychology, neuroscience, and biomedical engineering University of Cincinnati College of Medicine Cincinnati, OH

Article PDF
Article PDF

Psychiatry has used the term “schizoaffective disorder” for more than 60 years, but its specific meaning remains uncertain. Patients who meet its diagnostic criteria typically present with a confusing blend of mood and psychotic symptoms, and we often classify them as being schizoaffective because we don’t know where else to put them.

Much of our difficulty in trying to determine what schizoaffective disorder is can be blamed on insufficient data. We do not know the specific cause of either schizophrenic or mood disorders, and today’s concepts of these broad diagnoses probably encompass multiple etiologies.

Based on the evidence and clinical experience, this article presents:

  • the evolution of schizoaffective disorder as a psychiatric diagnosis
  • the four main concepts that attempt to explain the disorder’s cause
  • and a practical approach for managing these patients’ complicated symptoms.

Origins of schizoaffective disorder

When Jacob Kasanin1 riginated the term schizoaffective disorder in 1933, psychiatry was struggling to integrate Emil Kraepelin’s and Eugene Bleuler’s two competing and complementary schemes for understanding psychotic disorders.

Kraepelin had proposed that the major psychoses could be divided between dementia praecox and manic-depressive insanity (and to a lesser extent, paraphrenia), based on the presenting symptoms and—importantly—course of illness:2

  • Manic-depressive insanity typically included periods of full recovery of mental functions between episodes.
  • Dementia praecox was defined by a steady deterioration of mental function and personality from which patients rarely recovered.

Box

DSM-IV CRITERIA FOR SCHIZOAFFECTIVE DISORDER

  1. An uninterrupted period of illness during which, at some time, there is either a major depressive episode, a manic episode, or a mixed episode concurrent with symptoms that meet Criterion A for schizophrenia:
  2. During the same period of illness, there have been delusions or hallucinations for at least 2 weeks in the absence of prominent mood symptoms.
  3. Symptoms that meet criteria for a mood episode are present for a substantial portion of the total duration of the active and residual periods of the illness.
  4. The disturbance is not due to the direct physiological effects of a substance (e.g., a drug of abuse, a medication) or a general medical condition.

Specific type:

Bipolar type: If the disturbance includes a manic or a mixed episode (or a manic or a mixed episode and major depressive episodes)

Depressive type: If the disturbance only includes major depressive episodes.

Source: Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders (4th ed., TR). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Association, 2000.

This distinction was a landmark in psychiatry but did not offer a specific understanding of the mental or brain dysfunctions underlying these conditions nor a cross-sectional means to diagnose a patient’s condition.

Bleuler was less concerned with predicting course and outcome. Instead, he wished to understand his observations that patients commonly exhibited a disjunction among psychological processes that were integrated in healthy individuals.3 He described the cause of this loss of psychological integration as the “schizophrenias” or, literally, “split mind.” In the schizophrenias, he identified symptoms that seemed to reflect this psychological disjunction, such as flat affect, ambivalence, and splitting of cognition from emotion and behavior.

Because Kraepelin described many of these same symptoms in dementia praecox, clinicians tended to equate the schizophrenias with dementia praecox. However, many more patients with Bleuler’s schizophrenia recovered than did those with Kraepelin’s dementia praecox (essentially by definition). Therefore, some “schizophrenic” patients appeared to meet Kraepelin’s diagnosis of manic-depressive insanity. At this point, Kasanin stepped into the fray with his concept of schizoaffective disorder.

Kasanin’s conceptualization

Kasanin recognized that many patients exhibited a blending of Bleuler’s schizophrenia symptoms with those of Kraepelin’s manic-depressive (affective) illness.1 Moreover, unlike patients with dementia praecox, these blended patients exhibited:

  • good premorbid adjustment
  • typically a sudden illness onset with marked emotional turmoil
  • few symptoms of withdrawal or passivity
  • and a relatively short course with complete recovery.

In reporting these patients and subsequently originating the term “schizoaffective psychosis,” Kasanin tried to identify a homogeneous patient population that could be distinguished from the more broadly conceptualized Bleulerian schizophrenias and the more narrowly defined Kraepelinian categories.

The term “schizoaffective disorder” has evolved from this beginning. Interestingly, most—if not all—of the nine cases reported by Kasanin would be diagnosed with an affective disorder with psychotic features under today’s diagnostic criteria.4 Nonetheless, the term “schizoaffective disorder” was adopted by psychiatry (particularly in the United States) and has been used to classify patients who present with features of both schizophrenia and affective illness but cannot be clearly described as having either.

Evolutions from DSM-I to DSM-III

In American nosology, schizoaffective disorder was included as a subtype of schizophrenia in DSM-I (1952)5 and DSM-II (1968)6 and then reclassified in DSM-III (1980)7 as a “psychotic disorder not elsewhere classified.” Remarkably, none of these classifications provided criteria for diagnosing schizoaffective disorder.

 

 

Shortly before publication of DSM-III, Robert Spitzer, MD, and colleagues at the New York Neuropsychiatric Institute developed diagnostic criteria for schizoaffective disorder as part of their research diagnostic criteria (RDC).8 The RDC separated patients with affective and certain types of psychotic symptoms, suggestive of schizophrenia at that time, into two types—schizoaffective mania and schizoaffective depression—based on the polarity of the mood symptoms.

The psychotic symptoms identified as “schizophrenic” by the RDC were certain first-rank symptoms designated by Kurt Schneider, such as delusions of being controlled or mood-incongruent hallucinations. [Note: In recent studies, neither first-rank symptoms nor other subtypes of psychotic symptoms (moodincongruent delusions or hallucinations) have been shown to specifically identify patients with schizophrenia.9,10 In fact, no psychotic symptoms are considered pathognomonic for any specific disorder at this time.]

The RDC also introduced the idea that schizoaffective disorder was distinct from psychotic mood disorder in that:

  • psychotic symptoms persisted for a specific period (1 week), during which mood symptoms were absent
  • and mood and psychotic symptoms overlapped at some time during the course of illness.

These criteria were then adopted with modifications in DSM-III-R,11 which provided the first widely-accepted, well-defined criteria for schizoaffective disorder.

DSM-III-R and DSM-IV

DSM-III-R defined schizoaffective disorder based on relationships between affective syndromes and the criteria for schizophrenia. Specifically, the diagnosis required the presence of a full depressive or manic syndrome while the patient also met criteria for schizophrenia. To distinguish schizoaffective disorder from psychotic mood disorders, DSM-III-R required that psychotic symptoms persist for 2 weeks in the absence of “prominent” mood symptoms.

Unfortunately, “prominent” was not defined, leaving a fair amount of discretion to clinicians and making it difficult to standardize research studies. In addition, the predictive utility of 2 weeks of psychosis has not been strongly validated. In fact, the time span at which psychosis without a mood disorder identifies a new syndrome is not known.

To rule out schizophrenia, the mood syndrome could not have been “brief” relative to the psychosis; again, what “brief” meant was difficult to put into practice. Notably, there was no specific requirement to rule out mood disorders (i.e., that the psychosis was not brief relative to the duration of mood symptoms).

DSM-IV slightly modified these criteria,12 but their basic flavor from DSM-III-R was retained. Despite their limitations, the diagnostic criteria in DSM-III-R and DSM-IV at least provided clinicians and scientists the means to consistently identify schizoaffective disorder. The diagnostic criteria (Box) are still considered reliable today.13

Four concepts of schizoaffective disorder

Relatively few studies of schizoaffective disorder exist, so the diagnosis remains poorly validated. At least four concepts have been developed (Figure).4

Concept 1: Schizoaffective disorder is a variant of schizophrenia. Many of the characteristics of schizoaffective disorder that Kasanin first described, such as rapid onset and confusion, were identified as good prognostic indicators in later concepts of schizophrenia. Some family history studies also suggest a link between schizophrenic and schizoaffective disorders.15

Concept 2: Schizoaffective disorder is a variant of mood disorder. 9 Schizoaffective disorder represents a pernicious type of mood disorder in which psychotic symptoms persist and the course of illness is worse than in other variants (although better than in schizophrenia).16 Family studies are unclear about links between mood and schizoaffective disorders.17

Figure FOUR CONCEPTS THAT SEEK TO EXPLAIN SCHIZOAFFECTIVE DISORDER


Figure. Four conceptualizations explain schizoaffective disorder as (1) a type of schizophrenia; (2) a type of mood disorder; (3) a heterogeneous combination of patients with schizophrenia, mood disorder, and “real” schizoaffective disorder; and (4) as part of a continuum of psychotic disorders from worst prognosis (schizophrenia) to best prognosis (major depression).Concept 3: Schizoaffective disorder represents a heterogeneous combination of schizophrenia and mood disorder. Specifically, schizoaffective disorder may comprise a group of patients with severe psychotic mood disorders and either good-prognosis schizophrenia or schizophrenia with numerous affective symptoms.

A subgroup of patients with “true” schizoaffective disorder (distinct from schizophrenic or mood disorders) might also exist.18 As a twist on this idea, others have suggested that schizoaffective disorder, bipolar type is simply a variant of bipolar disorder, whereas schizoaffective disorder, depressed type is more closely akin to schizophrenia. The fact that depression occurs at some time in most patients with schizophrenia supports this view.

Concept 4: Psychotic disorders share a genetic vulnerability and exist on a continuum (from worst to best prognosis) from schizophrenia, to schizoaffective disorder, to psychotic then nonpsychotic bipolar and major depressive disorders.19

A lack of definitive evidence prevents us from choosing among these concepts; good studies support and discount each possibility.

 

 

Patient management

When faced with a patient who meets criteria for schizoaffective disorder, I believe practical considerations can guide treatment. The label “schizoaffective disorder” reminds us to consider treatment of these patients broadly (in contrast, for example, to the label “schizophreniform disorder,” which implies a stronger link to schizophrenia than outcome studies support21).

Treat the mood component first. In most patients with schizoaffective disorder, it is difficult to distinguish between diagnoses of schizophrenia or mood disorder. It is prudent to begin by aggressively treating the mood component, because psychotic mood disorders generally respond more favorably to treatment than does schizophrenia. Use mood stabilizers for patients with a history of mania and antidepressants in depressed patients with no history of mania.

As is true for psychotic mood disorders, concurrent administration of an antipsychotic is often warranted. Recent studies strongly suggest that atypical antipsychotics are preferred over traditional neuroleptics to treat psychotic patients in general, and this preference extends to patients with schizoaffective disorder.4,14,20

Some—if not most—atypical antipsychotics may have mood-stabilizing or antidepressant properties and may permit monotherapy of patients with schizoaffective disorder. Controlled clinical trials have not examined these agents as long-term maintenance therapy for the mood component of schizoaffective disorder, however. Until such studies are completed, many patients may require long-term mood-stabilizer or antidepressant therapy, with or without ongoing antipsychotic treatment.4,14

The next step. Alternate treatments should be considered for patients in whom trials of atypical antipsychotics have failed, both in combination with thymoleptics and in monotherapy. Conventional antipsychotics, particularly depot formulations, are a reasonable intervention, particularly in schizoaffective patients with minimal mood symptoms.

Clozapine remains a first-line choice for patients with treatment-resistant psychotic disorders and should be considered in patients with treatment-resistant schizoaffective disorder as well.

Conclusion

Patients meeting criteria for schizoaffective disorder typically present with a complex and confusing combination of affective and psychotic symptoms. The diagnosis continues to be applied predominantly to patients who are otherwise difficult to classify, and the diagnostic criteria supporting the presence of a distinct condition remain poorly validated.

Schizoaffective disorder probably defines a heterogeneous group of patients, but—practically speaking—they can often be managed by following algorithms for psychotic mood disorders.4,13 The most prudent long-term approach seems to be to keep treatment options flexible, with careful attention to managing symptoms as they wax and wane, rather than rigidly fixing on a single medication or type of medication.

Related resources

  • National Mental Health Association factsheet on schizoaffective disorder www.nmha.org/infoctr/factsheets/52.cfm
  • Reichenberg A, Weiser M, Rabinowitz, J, et al. A population-based cohort study of premorbid intellectual, language, and behavioral functioning in patients with schizophrenia, schizoaffective disorder, and nonpsychotic bipolar disorder. Am J Psychiatry 2002;159(12):2027-35.
  • Robinson DG, Woerner, MG, Alvir JM, et al. Predictors of medication discontinuation by patients with first-episode schizophrenia and schizoaffective disorder. Schizophr Res 2002;57(2-3):209-19.

Psychiatry has used the term “schizoaffective disorder” for more than 60 years, but its specific meaning remains uncertain. Patients who meet its diagnostic criteria typically present with a confusing blend of mood and psychotic symptoms, and we often classify them as being schizoaffective because we don’t know where else to put them.

Much of our difficulty in trying to determine what schizoaffective disorder is can be blamed on insufficient data. We do not know the specific cause of either schizophrenic or mood disorders, and today’s concepts of these broad diagnoses probably encompass multiple etiologies.

Based on the evidence and clinical experience, this article presents:

  • the evolution of schizoaffective disorder as a psychiatric diagnosis
  • the four main concepts that attempt to explain the disorder’s cause
  • and a practical approach for managing these patients’ complicated symptoms.

Origins of schizoaffective disorder

When Jacob Kasanin1 riginated the term schizoaffective disorder in 1933, psychiatry was struggling to integrate Emil Kraepelin’s and Eugene Bleuler’s two competing and complementary schemes for understanding psychotic disorders.

Kraepelin had proposed that the major psychoses could be divided between dementia praecox and manic-depressive insanity (and to a lesser extent, paraphrenia), based on the presenting symptoms and—importantly—course of illness:2

  • Manic-depressive insanity typically included periods of full recovery of mental functions between episodes.
  • Dementia praecox was defined by a steady deterioration of mental function and personality from which patients rarely recovered.

Box

DSM-IV CRITERIA FOR SCHIZOAFFECTIVE DISORDER

  1. An uninterrupted period of illness during which, at some time, there is either a major depressive episode, a manic episode, or a mixed episode concurrent with symptoms that meet Criterion A for schizophrenia:
  2. During the same period of illness, there have been delusions or hallucinations for at least 2 weeks in the absence of prominent mood symptoms.
  3. Symptoms that meet criteria for a mood episode are present for a substantial portion of the total duration of the active and residual periods of the illness.
  4. The disturbance is not due to the direct physiological effects of a substance (e.g., a drug of abuse, a medication) or a general medical condition.

Specific type:

Bipolar type: If the disturbance includes a manic or a mixed episode (or a manic or a mixed episode and major depressive episodes)

Depressive type: If the disturbance only includes major depressive episodes.

Source: Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders (4th ed., TR). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Association, 2000.

This distinction was a landmark in psychiatry but did not offer a specific understanding of the mental or brain dysfunctions underlying these conditions nor a cross-sectional means to diagnose a patient’s condition.

Bleuler was less concerned with predicting course and outcome. Instead, he wished to understand his observations that patients commonly exhibited a disjunction among psychological processes that were integrated in healthy individuals.3 He described the cause of this loss of psychological integration as the “schizophrenias” or, literally, “split mind.” In the schizophrenias, he identified symptoms that seemed to reflect this psychological disjunction, such as flat affect, ambivalence, and splitting of cognition from emotion and behavior.

Because Kraepelin described many of these same symptoms in dementia praecox, clinicians tended to equate the schizophrenias with dementia praecox. However, many more patients with Bleuler’s schizophrenia recovered than did those with Kraepelin’s dementia praecox (essentially by definition). Therefore, some “schizophrenic” patients appeared to meet Kraepelin’s diagnosis of manic-depressive insanity. At this point, Kasanin stepped into the fray with his concept of schizoaffective disorder.

Kasanin’s conceptualization

Kasanin recognized that many patients exhibited a blending of Bleuler’s schizophrenia symptoms with those of Kraepelin’s manic-depressive (affective) illness.1 Moreover, unlike patients with dementia praecox, these blended patients exhibited:

  • good premorbid adjustment
  • typically a sudden illness onset with marked emotional turmoil
  • few symptoms of withdrawal or passivity
  • and a relatively short course with complete recovery.

In reporting these patients and subsequently originating the term “schizoaffective psychosis,” Kasanin tried to identify a homogeneous patient population that could be distinguished from the more broadly conceptualized Bleulerian schizophrenias and the more narrowly defined Kraepelinian categories.

The term “schizoaffective disorder” has evolved from this beginning. Interestingly, most—if not all—of the nine cases reported by Kasanin would be diagnosed with an affective disorder with psychotic features under today’s diagnostic criteria.4 Nonetheless, the term “schizoaffective disorder” was adopted by psychiatry (particularly in the United States) and has been used to classify patients who present with features of both schizophrenia and affective illness but cannot be clearly described as having either.

Evolutions from DSM-I to DSM-III

In American nosology, schizoaffective disorder was included as a subtype of schizophrenia in DSM-I (1952)5 and DSM-II (1968)6 and then reclassified in DSM-III (1980)7 as a “psychotic disorder not elsewhere classified.” Remarkably, none of these classifications provided criteria for diagnosing schizoaffective disorder.

 

 

Shortly before publication of DSM-III, Robert Spitzer, MD, and colleagues at the New York Neuropsychiatric Institute developed diagnostic criteria for schizoaffective disorder as part of their research diagnostic criteria (RDC).8 The RDC separated patients with affective and certain types of psychotic symptoms, suggestive of schizophrenia at that time, into two types—schizoaffective mania and schizoaffective depression—based on the polarity of the mood symptoms.

The psychotic symptoms identified as “schizophrenic” by the RDC were certain first-rank symptoms designated by Kurt Schneider, such as delusions of being controlled or mood-incongruent hallucinations. [Note: In recent studies, neither first-rank symptoms nor other subtypes of psychotic symptoms (moodincongruent delusions or hallucinations) have been shown to specifically identify patients with schizophrenia.9,10 In fact, no psychotic symptoms are considered pathognomonic for any specific disorder at this time.]

The RDC also introduced the idea that schizoaffective disorder was distinct from psychotic mood disorder in that:

  • psychotic symptoms persisted for a specific period (1 week), during which mood symptoms were absent
  • and mood and psychotic symptoms overlapped at some time during the course of illness.

These criteria were then adopted with modifications in DSM-III-R,11 which provided the first widely-accepted, well-defined criteria for schizoaffective disorder.

DSM-III-R and DSM-IV

DSM-III-R defined schizoaffective disorder based on relationships between affective syndromes and the criteria for schizophrenia. Specifically, the diagnosis required the presence of a full depressive or manic syndrome while the patient also met criteria for schizophrenia. To distinguish schizoaffective disorder from psychotic mood disorders, DSM-III-R required that psychotic symptoms persist for 2 weeks in the absence of “prominent” mood symptoms.

Unfortunately, “prominent” was not defined, leaving a fair amount of discretion to clinicians and making it difficult to standardize research studies. In addition, the predictive utility of 2 weeks of psychosis has not been strongly validated. In fact, the time span at which psychosis without a mood disorder identifies a new syndrome is not known.

To rule out schizophrenia, the mood syndrome could not have been “brief” relative to the psychosis; again, what “brief” meant was difficult to put into practice. Notably, there was no specific requirement to rule out mood disorders (i.e., that the psychosis was not brief relative to the duration of mood symptoms).

DSM-IV slightly modified these criteria,12 but their basic flavor from DSM-III-R was retained. Despite their limitations, the diagnostic criteria in DSM-III-R and DSM-IV at least provided clinicians and scientists the means to consistently identify schizoaffective disorder. The diagnostic criteria (Box) are still considered reliable today.13

Four concepts of schizoaffective disorder

Relatively few studies of schizoaffective disorder exist, so the diagnosis remains poorly validated. At least four concepts have been developed (Figure).4

Concept 1: Schizoaffective disorder is a variant of schizophrenia. Many of the characteristics of schizoaffective disorder that Kasanin first described, such as rapid onset and confusion, were identified as good prognostic indicators in later concepts of schizophrenia. Some family history studies also suggest a link between schizophrenic and schizoaffective disorders.15

Concept 2: Schizoaffective disorder is a variant of mood disorder. 9 Schizoaffective disorder represents a pernicious type of mood disorder in which psychotic symptoms persist and the course of illness is worse than in other variants (although better than in schizophrenia).16 Family studies are unclear about links between mood and schizoaffective disorders.17

Figure FOUR CONCEPTS THAT SEEK TO EXPLAIN SCHIZOAFFECTIVE DISORDER


Figure. Four conceptualizations explain schizoaffective disorder as (1) a type of schizophrenia; (2) a type of mood disorder; (3) a heterogeneous combination of patients with schizophrenia, mood disorder, and “real” schizoaffective disorder; and (4) as part of a continuum of psychotic disorders from worst prognosis (schizophrenia) to best prognosis (major depression).Concept 3: Schizoaffective disorder represents a heterogeneous combination of schizophrenia and mood disorder. Specifically, schizoaffective disorder may comprise a group of patients with severe psychotic mood disorders and either good-prognosis schizophrenia or schizophrenia with numerous affective symptoms.

A subgroup of patients with “true” schizoaffective disorder (distinct from schizophrenic or mood disorders) might also exist.18 As a twist on this idea, others have suggested that schizoaffective disorder, bipolar type is simply a variant of bipolar disorder, whereas schizoaffective disorder, depressed type is more closely akin to schizophrenia. The fact that depression occurs at some time in most patients with schizophrenia supports this view.

Concept 4: Psychotic disorders share a genetic vulnerability and exist on a continuum (from worst to best prognosis) from schizophrenia, to schizoaffective disorder, to psychotic then nonpsychotic bipolar and major depressive disorders.19

A lack of definitive evidence prevents us from choosing among these concepts; good studies support and discount each possibility.

 

 

Patient management

When faced with a patient who meets criteria for schizoaffective disorder, I believe practical considerations can guide treatment. The label “schizoaffective disorder” reminds us to consider treatment of these patients broadly (in contrast, for example, to the label “schizophreniform disorder,” which implies a stronger link to schizophrenia than outcome studies support21).

Treat the mood component first. In most patients with schizoaffective disorder, it is difficult to distinguish between diagnoses of schizophrenia or mood disorder. It is prudent to begin by aggressively treating the mood component, because psychotic mood disorders generally respond more favorably to treatment than does schizophrenia. Use mood stabilizers for patients with a history of mania and antidepressants in depressed patients with no history of mania.

As is true for psychotic mood disorders, concurrent administration of an antipsychotic is often warranted. Recent studies strongly suggest that atypical antipsychotics are preferred over traditional neuroleptics to treat psychotic patients in general, and this preference extends to patients with schizoaffective disorder.4,14,20

Some—if not most—atypical antipsychotics may have mood-stabilizing or antidepressant properties and may permit monotherapy of patients with schizoaffective disorder. Controlled clinical trials have not examined these agents as long-term maintenance therapy for the mood component of schizoaffective disorder, however. Until such studies are completed, many patients may require long-term mood-stabilizer or antidepressant therapy, with or without ongoing antipsychotic treatment.4,14

The next step. Alternate treatments should be considered for patients in whom trials of atypical antipsychotics have failed, both in combination with thymoleptics and in monotherapy. Conventional antipsychotics, particularly depot formulations, are a reasonable intervention, particularly in schizoaffective patients with minimal mood symptoms.

Clozapine remains a first-line choice for patients with treatment-resistant psychotic disorders and should be considered in patients with treatment-resistant schizoaffective disorder as well.

Conclusion

Patients meeting criteria for schizoaffective disorder typically present with a complex and confusing combination of affective and psychotic symptoms. The diagnosis continues to be applied predominantly to patients who are otherwise difficult to classify, and the diagnostic criteria supporting the presence of a distinct condition remain poorly validated.

Schizoaffective disorder probably defines a heterogeneous group of patients, but—practically speaking—they can often be managed by following algorithms for psychotic mood disorders.4,13 The most prudent long-term approach seems to be to keep treatment options flexible, with careful attention to managing symptoms as they wax and wane, rather than rigidly fixing on a single medication or type of medication.

Related resources

  • National Mental Health Association factsheet on schizoaffective disorder www.nmha.org/infoctr/factsheets/52.cfm
  • Reichenberg A, Weiser M, Rabinowitz, J, et al. A population-based cohort study of premorbid intellectual, language, and behavioral functioning in patients with schizophrenia, schizoaffective disorder, and nonpsychotic bipolar disorder. Am J Psychiatry 2002;159(12):2027-35.
  • Robinson DG, Woerner, MG, Alvir JM, et al. Predictors of medication discontinuation by patients with first-episode schizophrenia and schizoaffective disorder. Schizophr Res 2002;57(2-3):209-19.
References

1. Kasanin J. The acute schizoaffective psychoses. Am J Psychiatry 1933;113:97-126.

2. Kraepelin E. Dementia praecox and paraphrenia, together with manic depressive insanity. Translated from original texts by The Classics of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences Library. Delran, NJ; Gryphon Editions, 1993.

3. Bleuler E. Text-book of psychiatry. Translated from original texts by The Classics of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences Library. Delran, NJ: Gryphon Editions, 1994.

4. Keck PE, Jr, McElroy SL, Strakowski SM/, West SA. Pharmacologic treatment of schizoaffective disorder. Psychopharmacology 1994;114:529-38.

5. Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders. Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Association, 1952.

6. Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders (2nd ed). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Association, 1968.

7. Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders (3rd ed). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Association, 1980.

8. Spitzer RL, Endicott J, Robins E. Research diagnostic criteria. Rationale and reliability. Arch Gen Psychiatry 1978;35:773-82.

9. Pope HG, Jr, Lipinski JF. Diagnosis of schizophrenia and manic-depressive illness: a reassessment of the specificity of ‘schizophrenic’ symptoms in the light of current research. Arch Gen Psychiatry 1978;35:811-28.

10. Strakowski SM, McElroy SL, Keck PE, Jr, West SA. Racial influence on diagnosis in psychotic mania. J Affect Disord 1996;39:157-62.

11. Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders (3rd ed, rev). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Press, 1987.

12. Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders (4th ed). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Press, 1994.

13. Keck PE, Jr., McElroy SL, Strakowski SM. New developments in the pharmacologic treatment of schizoaffective disorder. J Clin Psychiatry 1996;57S:41-8.

14. Clayton PJ. Schizoaffective disorders. J Nerv Ment Dis 1982;170:646-50.

15. Kendler KS, Spitzer RL, Williams JBW. Psychotic disorders in DSM-III-R. Am J Psychiatry 1989;146:953-62.

16. Strakowski SM, Keck PE, Jr, Sax KW, McElroy SL, Hawkins JM. Twelve-month outcome of patients with DSM-III-R schizoaffective disorder: comparisons to matched patients with bipolar disorder. Schizophrenia Res 1999;35:167-74.

17. Maier W, Lichtermann D, Minges J, Heun R, Hallmayer J, Benkert O. Schizoaffective disorder and affective disorders with mood-incongruent psychotic feathers: keep separate or combine? Evidence from a family study. Am J Psychiatry 1992;149:1666-73.

18. Kendler KS, McGuire M, Gruenberg AM, Walsh D. Examining the validity of DSM-III-R schizoaffective disorder and its putative subtypes in the Roscommon Family Study. Am J Psychiatry 1995;152:755-64.

19. Crow TJ. A continuum of psychosis, one human gene and not much else—the case for homogeneity. Schizophrenia Res 1995;17:135-45.

20. Strakowski SM, DelBello MP, Adler CM. Comparative tolerability of drug treatments for bipolar disorder. CNS Drugs 2001;15:701-18.

21. Strakowski SM. Diagnostic validity of schizophreniform disorder. Am J Psychiatry 1994;151:815-24.

References

1. Kasanin J. The acute schizoaffective psychoses. Am J Psychiatry 1933;113:97-126.

2. Kraepelin E. Dementia praecox and paraphrenia, together with manic depressive insanity. Translated from original texts by The Classics of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences Library. Delran, NJ; Gryphon Editions, 1993.

3. Bleuler E. Text-book of psychiatry. Translated from original texts by The Classics of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences Library. Delran, NJ: Gryphon Editions, 1994.

4. Keck PE, Jr, McElroy SL, Strakowski SM/, West SA. Pharmacologic treatment of schizoaffective disorder. Psychopharmacology 1994;114:529-38.

5. Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders. Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Association, 1952.

6. Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders (2nd ed). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Association, 1968.

7. Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders (3rd ed). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Association, 1980.

8. Spitzer RL, Endicott J, Robins E. Research diagnostic criteria. Rationale and reliability. Arch Gen Psychiatry 1978;35:773-82.

9. Pope HG, Jr, Lipinski JF. Diagnosis of schizophrenia and manic-depressive illness: a reassessment of the specificity of ‘schizophrenic’ symptoms in the light of current research. Arch Gen Psychiatry 1978;35:811-28.

10. Strakowski SM, McElroy SL, Keck PE, Jr, West SA. Racial influence on diagnosis in psychotic mania. J Affect Disord 1996;39:157-62.

11. Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders (3rd ed, rev). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Press, 1987.

12. Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders (4th ed). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Press, 1994.

13. Keck PE, Jr., McElroy SL, Strakowski SM. New developments in the pharmacologic treatment of schizoaffective disorder. J Clin Psychiatry 1996;57S:41-8.

14. Clayton PJ. Schizoaffective disorders. J Nerv Ment Dis 1982;170:646-50.

15. Kendler KS, Spitzer RL, Williams JBW. Psychotic disorders in DSM-III-R. Am J Psychiatry 1989;146:953-62.

16. Strakowski SM, Keck PE, Jr, Sax KW, McElroy SL, Hawkins JM. Twelve-month outcome of patients with DSM-III-R schizoaffective disorder: comparisons to matched patients with bipolar disorder. Schizophrenia Res 1999;35:167-74.

17. Maier W, Lichtermann D, Minges J, Heun R, Hallmayer J, Benkert O. Schizoaffective disorder and affective disorders with mood-incongruent psychotic feathers: keep separate or combine? Evidence from a family study. Am J Psychiatry 1992;149:1666-73.

18. Kendler KS, McGuire M, Gruenberg AM, Walsh D. Examining the validity of DSM-III-R schizoaffective disorder and its putative subtypes in the Roscommon Family Study. Am J Psychiatry 1995;152:755-64.

19. Crow TJ. A continuum of psychosis, one human gene and not much else—the case for homogeneity. Schizophrenia Res 1995;17:135-45.

20. Strakowski SM, DelBello MP, Adler CM. Comparative tolerability of drug treatments for bipolar disorder. CNS Drugs 2001;15:701-18.

21. Strakowski SM. Diagnostic validity of schizophreniform disorder. Am J Psychiatry 1994;151:815-24.

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(01)
Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(01)
Page Number
22-29
Page Number
22-29
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Schizoaffective disorder: Which symptoms should be treated first?
Display Headline
Schizoaffective disorder: Which symptoms should be treated first?
Sections
Article Source

PURLs Copyright

Inside the Article

Article PDF Media

When and how to use SSRIs to treat late-life depression

Article Type
Changed
Tue, 12/11/2018 - 15:12
Display Headline
When and how to use SSRIs to treat late-life depression

Despite its impact on individuals and public health, depression in older persons is inadequately diagnosed and treated. Even when depression is diagnosed, only one-third of persons older than 65 receive treatment.1 Reasons for this include:

  • lack of physician awareness that depression presents differently in older than in younger adults
  • patient denial of depressive symptoms
  • patients’ and physicians’ mistaken belief that feeling depressed is a normal part of aging.

The good news is that when geriatric depression is recognized, it usually responds favorably to treatment, although aggressive intervention may be required.2 In this article, we describe our approach to diagnosis and discuss use of selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs) as first-line antidepressants for older patients.

Late-life depression risk factors

Depression is common in older persons, especially in those who have experienced psychosocial or medical losses, including chronic illness. Although its presentation often does not meet criteria for major depression, the more common subsyndromal depression is debilitating and can lead to suicide.

Box

CASE REPORT: DEPRESSED, AT RISK FOR SUICIDE

A 72-year-old man presents with trouble concentrating, decreased appetite, anergy, and anhedonia. He says he frequently awakes at 3 AM, and it takes him 2 hours to return to sleep. Lately, he has thought of shooting himself with his hunting rifle. The patient’s wife died of cancer 1 year ago, and he has developed several medical illnesses within the past 10 years: chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, worsening arthritis, mild ischemic heart disease, and worsening hearing loss.

The patient denies feeling depressed and instead attributes his symptoms to his medical illnesses. He has become progressively isolated in the past year, with less social contact with his friends at the local parish. His older brother, with whom he was close, died recently. Until now, he says his “pride” has made him resist his primary care physician’s recommendation that he see a psychiatrist.

Late-life depressive syndromes commonly present with somatic complaints. Typically, patients deny having a mental illness and perceive that their symptoms are organic in origin (Box).1

Losses. Psychosocial and medical losses are major risk factors for late-life adjustment disorders, subsyndromal depressive disorders, and major depression. Medical losses may include loss of mobility or independent function, chronic pain, or sensory losses that limit one’s ability to read or hear. Psychosocial losses may include the death of a spouse, sibling, or peer or moving from one’s longtime home to a more structured environment (assisted living, nursing home, or living with relatives).

Medical causes to rule out before starting antidepressant therapy include:

  • hypothyroidism
  • medication side effects
  • bipolar disorder, which may require the use of a mood-stabilizing agent to prevent manic symptoms.3

History. Often a history of mood disorder in the individual or a family member can help the clinician determine that mental illness accounts for the patient’s symptoms. In older patients, it is not uncommon for psychotic symptoms to accompany a primary mood disturbance.

Suicide risk is high in depressed older persons, so detection and quick treatment of depression is paramount. Older white men are at particularly high risk for completed suicide using firearms.3

Alcohol abuse may contribute to depressive symptoms in older persons. A second peak of alcoholism occurs in the eighth decade of life and can confound diagnosis of depression in patients of this age.

Making the diagnosis. In patients who present with symptoms and risk factors for late-life depression, depression rating scales can help confirm the diagnosis. Commonly used scales include the Beck Depression Inventory, the Hamilton Depression Rating Scale, and the Zung Self-Rating Depression Scale. Specialized scales for use in older patients include the Geriatric Depression Scale and the Cornell Scale; the latter scale is designed for patients with comorbid depression and dementia.3,4

Treatment

Antidepressant treatment in combination with psychotherapy usually is warranted when treating nonpsychotic late-life depression. In patients with psychosis, electroconvulsive therapy can help achieve remission.

Cognitive-behavioral therapy and interpersonal and insight-oriented psychotherapy have been shown to be effective in late-life depression. Social interventions aimed at preventing isolation also can work. In milder cases of depression, psychotherapy alone may be sufficient.3

Starting dosages. When antidepressant therapy is indicated in an older patient, start low and go slow.5 Older patients generally require prolonged titration rates and a longer course of treatment than do younger patients. Physiologic changes that occur with aging include:

  • altered drug metabolism rate, including slower demethylation
  • increased body fat-to-water ratio, which increases the volume of distribution for lipophilic psychotropic drugs
  • decreased glomerular filtration rate, which may account for higher serum concentrations of drugs and their metabolites
  • increased sensitivity of the older brain to the effects of medications.6
 

 

Thus—with some exceptions—recommended starting dosages for older patients are usually one-half those used in younger adults. For the frail older patient, the starting dosage should probably be even lower—about one-fourth the typical starting dosage in young adults.6 As in younger patients, the treatment goal is to achieve the maximal therapeutic effect with the lowest effective dosage while avoiding side effects.

More time may be required to achieve a therapeutic effect in older than in younger patients. Substantial improvement may not be seen until an older patient has been taking an antidepressant for 9 weeks or longer. In younger patients, responses are seen as early as 2 weeks after starting antidepressant therapy, and remission occurs within 6 to 8 weeks.2

SSRIs versus tricyclics

SSRIs—citalopram, escitalopram, fluoxetine, fluvoxamine, paroxetine, and sertraline (Table 1)7 —are considered first-line antidepressants for late-life depression. Although SSRIs and tricyclic antidepressants (TCAs) demonstrate equivalent efficacy in older adults, SSRIs are associated with lesstroublesome side effects.2

SSRIs are less sedating than tricyclics and are not associated with adverse effects on cognition; both qualities make these agents appropriate for older patients. Risk of overdose with SSRIs also is much lower than with TCAs.2

Both types of agent have been reported to cause movement disorders such as extrapyramidal symptoms and even tardive dyskinesia, but these side effects are much more rare with SSRIs than with TCAs.2 Also—unlike the TCAs— SSRIs do not significantly effect cardiac conduction, which is an important quality in the older population with its relatively high incidence of heart disease.

Table 1

USING SSRIs TO TREAT LATE-LIFE DEPRESSION

DrugHalf-life (hours)*Recommended dosage after age 65 (mg/d) †
Citalopram3520 to 40
Escitalopram27 - 3210 to 20
Fluoxetine96 - 38610 to 60
Fluvoxamine1625 to 300
Paroxetine2110 to 40
Sertraline2625 to 200
* In the older patient, medication half-lives may be extended 1.5to 2-fold.
† The heterogeneity of aging can lead to a wide variation in antidepressant target dosages. Therefore, although starting dosages for older adults are lower, final dosages may be the same as for younger adults.
Source: Physicians’ Desk Reference (56th ed). Montvale, NJ: Medical Economics Co, 2002.

Meta-analyses suggest that patients are more likely to discontinue taking tricyclics than SSRIs.8 Adherence to antidepressant medications by older patients has been associated with lower perceived stigma of mental illness, higher self-rated severity of illness, age over 60, and absence of a personality disorder.9

SSRI side effects

The most common side effect of SSRIs is nausea, which is usually mild and occurs in the first weeks of treatment.2 Dry mouth is related to noradrenergic influences on the salivary gland. Anxiety is usually transient.

Sedation can be a problem in older patients who use SSRIs. Among the six SSRIs indicated for depression, paroxetine appears to be the most sedating.10 Paroxetine exhibits the most muscarinic blockade in vitro, with a binding affinity less than that of imipramine but greater than nortriptyline.11 Studies in older patients have suggested, however, that cognitive function is not compromised with paroxetine, as is observed with other antidepressants with anticholinergic action.6

Table 2

CYTOCHROME P450 ISOZYMES INHIBITED BY SSRI ANTIDEPRESSANTS (IN VITRO)

Drug1A22C92C192D63A4
Fluoxetine+++++++++
Sertraline+++++
Paroxetine+++++++
Citalopram++
Escitalopram
Fluvoxamine+++++++++++
Source: Adapted from Greenblatt et al. J Clin Psychiatry 1998;59(suppl 15):19-27, and von Moltke et al. Drug Metab Dispos 2001;29:1102-9.

Sexual function can be diminished by SSRIs; the most common sexual side effects are anorgasmia and delayed orgasm.12 Preserving sexual function is important to many older men and women who retain their interest in sexual activity well into later life.

Withdrawal syndrome. Abrupt discontinuation of some SSRIs can lead to withdrawal side effects, such as dizziness, fatigue, and nausea. In a study of young and older adults, withdrawal syndrome followed abrupt discontinuation at rates of 14% with fluoxetine and 60% with sertraline or paroxetine.13

Elimination half-life. Medication half-lives tend to be prolonged in older patients because of age-related pharmacokinetic changes. SSRIs with relatively shorter half-lives—such as citalopram, sertraline, paroxetine, and fluvoxamine—could be eliminated fairly rapidly should adverse events arise.

On the other hand, use of a longer-acting agent, such as fluoxetine, may be an advantage if compliance is a problem. In this case, fluoxetine’s prolonged washout rate could help protect a patient from relapse, even when doses are missed.

Potential drug-drug interactions

Individual SSRIs have different effects on the cytochrome P450 system (Table 2).14,15 For example, fluoxetine, sertraline, and paroxetine—but not fluvoxamine—are in vitro inhibitors of the 2D6 isoenzyme system,16 which metabolizes TCAs, type Ic antiarrhythmics, alpha-adrenergic blockers, dextromethorphan, chemotherapeutic agents, and some antipsychotics. Citalopram has minimal inhibitory activity and escitalopram has virtually no inhibitory action on CYP 2D6.17

Cytochrome P450 3A4 metabolizes numerous drugs, including alprazolam, triazolam, carbamazepine, calcium channel blockers, and others. The 3A4 enzymes are inhibited by fluoxetine, sertraline, and fluvoxamine.18

 

 

Cytochrome P450 1A2 is the liver isoenzyme responsible for dealkylating theophylline, caffeine, and phenacetin. This enzyme system also metabolizes tacrine and clozapine. Of the SSRIs, fluvoxamine is the most potent inhibitor of the 1A2 enzyme, while escitalopram is a negligible inhibitor.17

Cytochrome P450 2C is a subfamily of isoenzymes that includes 2C9, 2C10, 2C19, and others. This system metabolizes some antidepressants as well as warfarin, phenytoin, and diazepam. Inhibitors of this system include fluvoxamine, fluoxetine, sertraline, and paroxetine.18

MAO inhibitors. Concomitant use of serotonin-acting drugs and monoamine oxidase inhibitors should be avoided. When used in combination, SSRIs and MAO inhibitors can cause a serotonin syndrome, with potential hyperpyretic crises, seizures, coma, and death. When switching medications, it is important to eliminate any serotonin-acting drug before starting an MAO inhibitor.2

In young adults, a 7-day washout is needed when switching from fluvoxamine and 14 days when switching from sertraline, citalopram, or paroxetine. With fluoxetine, the washout period is 35 days in young adults. Because medication half-lives in older patients may be prolonged two- to three-fold, it is advisable to proceed conservatively and extend these washout periods accordingly.

Related resources

Drug brand names

  • Alprazolam • Xanax
  • Citalopram • Celexa
  • Clozapine • Clozaril
  • Diazepam • Valium
  • Escitalopram • Lexapro
  • Fluoxetine • Prozac
  • Fluvoxamine • Luvox
  • Paroxetine • Paxil
  • Sertraline • Zoloft
  • Tacrine • Cognex
  • Triazolam • Halcion

Disclosure

Dr. Kasckow reports that he receives grant/research support from, serves as a consultant to, or is on the speakers bureau of Eli Lilly and Co., Forest Laboratories, Pharmacia Corp., Solvay Pharmaceuticals, AstraZeneca Pharmaceuticals, Organon, Janssen Pharmaceutica, and Pfizer Inc.

Dr. Mohamed reports that she receives grant/research support from Forest Laboratories and serves on the speakers bureau of Eli Lilly and Co.

Dr. Herman reports that he serves as a consultant to Eli Lilly and Co.

Other co-authors report no financial relationship with any company whose products are mentioned in this article, or with manufacturers of competing products.

References

1. Judd LL, Paulus MP, Wells KB, Rapaport MH. Socioeconomic burden of subsyndromal depressive symptoms and major depression in a sample of the general population. Am J Psychiatry 1996;153:1411-7.

2. Mulchahey JJ, Malik MS, Sabai M, Kasckow JW. Serotonin selective reuptake inhibitors in the treatment of geriatric depression and related disorders. Int J Neuropsychopharmacol 1999;2:121-7.

3. Blazer DG, Koenig HG. Mood disorders. In: Busse EW, Blazer DG (eds). Textbook of geriatric psychiatry (2nd ed). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Press, 1996;235-63.

4. Blazer DG. The psychiatric interview of the geriatric patient. In: Busse EW, Blazer DG (eds). Textbook of geriatric psychiatry (2nd ed). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Press, 1996;175-89.

5. Young RC, Meyers BS. Psychopharmacology. In: Sadovoy J, Lazarus LW, Jarvik LF, Grossberg GP (eds). Comprehensive review of geriatric psychiatry, vol. II. Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Publishing, 1996;755:817.-

6. Dunner DL. Therapeutic considerations in treating depression in the elderly. J Clin Psychiatry 1994;55(suppl):48-58.

7. Physicians’ desk reference (56th ed). Montvale, NJ: Medical Economics Co, 2002.

8. Montgomery SA, Henry J, McDonald G, et al. Selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors: meta-analysis of discontinuation rates. Int Clin Psychopharmacol 1994;9:47-53.

9. Sirey JA, Bruce ML, Alexopoulos GS, Perlick DA, Friedman SJ, Meyers BS. Stigma as a barrier to recovery. Perceived stigma and patient-rated severity of illness as predictors of antidepressant drug adherence. Psychiatry Serv 2001;52:1615-20.

10. Dechant KL, Clissold SP. Paroxetine: a review of its pharmacodynamic and pharmacokinetic properties and therapeutic potential in depressive illness Drugs 1991;41:225-53.

11. Richelson E. Pharmacology of antidepressants: characteristics of the ideal drug. Mayo Clin Proc 1994;69:1069-81.

12. Herman JB, Brotman AW, Pollack MH, Falk WE, Biederman J, Rosenbaum JF. Fluoxetine-induced sexual dysfunction. J Clin Psychiatry 1990;51:25-7.

13. Rosenbaum JF, Fava M, Hoog SL, Ascroft RC, Krebs WB. Selective serotonin reuptake inhibitor discontinuation syndrome: a randomized clinical trial. Biol Psychiatry 1998;44:77-87.

14. Greenblatt DJ, von Moltke LL, Harmatz JS, Shader RI. Drug interactions with newer antidepressants: role of human cytochromes P450. J Clin Psychiatry 1998;59(suppl 15):19-27.

15. von Moltke LL, Greenblatt DJ, Giancarlo GM, Granda BW, Harmatz JS, Shader RI. Escitalopram (s-citalopram) and its metabolites in vitro: cytochromes mediating biotransformation, inhibitory effects, and comparison to r-citalopram. Drug Metab Dispos 2001;29:1102-9.

16. Nemeroff CB, DeVane CL, Pollock BG. Newer antidepressants and the cytochrome P450 system. Am J Psychiatry 1996;153:311-20.

17. Owens MJ, Rosenbaum JF. Escitalopram: a second-generation SSRI. CNS Spectrums 2002;7(suppl 1):4.-

18. Preskorn SH. Recent pharmacologic advances in antidepressant therapy for the elderly. Am J Med 1993;94(suppl 5A):2S-12S.

Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

John W. Kasckow, MD, PhD
Jeffrey J. Mulchahey, PhD
Associate professors
Jim Herman, PhD
Professor

Muhammed Aslam, MD
Assistant professor

Mya Sabia, MD
Resident in geropsychiatry

Department of Psychiatry University of Cincinnati College of Medicine Cincinnati, OH

Somaia Mohamed, MD, PhD
Director, Division of General Psychiatry Cincinnati VA Medical Center

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(01)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
43-47
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

John W. Kasckow, MD, PhD
Jeffrey J. Mulchahey, PhD
Associate professors
Jim Herman, PhD
Professor

Muhammed Aslam, MD
Assistant professor

Mya Sabia, MD
Resident in geropsychiatry

Department of Psychiatry University of Cincinnati College of Medicine Cincinnati, OH

Somaia Mohamed, MD, PhD
Director, Division of General Psychiatry Cincinnati VA Medical Center

Author and Disclosure Information

John W. Kasckow, MD, PhD
Jeffrey J. Mulchahey, PhD
Associate professors
Jim Herman, PhD
Professor

Muhammed Aslam, MD
Assistant professor

Mya Sabia, MD
Resident in geropsychiatry

Department of Psychiatry University of Cincinnati College of Medicine Cincinnati, OH

Somaia Mohamed, MD, PhD
Director, Division of General Psychiatry Cincinnati VA Medical Center

Article PDF
Article PDF

Despite its impact on individuals and public health, depression in older persons is inadequately diagnosed and treated. Even when depression is diagnosed, only one-third of persons older than 65 receive treatment.1 Reasons for this include:

  • lack of physician awareness that depression presents differently in older than in younger adults
  • patient denial of depressive symptoms
  • patients’ and physicians’ mistaken belief that feeling depressed is a normal part of aging.

The good news is that when geriatric depression is recognized, it usually responds favorably to treatment, although aggressive intervention may be required.2 In this article, we describe our approach to diagnosis and discuss use of selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs) as first-line antidepressants for older patients.

Late-life depression risk factors

Depression is common in older persons, especially in those who have experienced psychosocial or medical losses, including chronic illness. Although its presentation often does not meet criteria for major depression, the more common subsyndromal depression is debilitating and can lead to suicide.

Box

CASE REPORT: DEPRESSED, AT RISK FOR SUICIDE

A 72-year-old man presents with trouble concentrating, decreased appetite, anergy, and anhedonia. He says he frequently awakes at 3 AM, and it takes him 2 hours to return to sleep. Lately, he has thought of shooting himself with his hunting rifle. The patient’s wife died of cancer 1 year ago, and he has developed several medical illnesses within the past 10 years: chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, worsening arthritis, mild ischemic heart disease, and worsening hearing loss.

The patient denies feeling depressed and instead attributes his symptoms to his medical illnesses. He has become progressively isolated in the past year, with less social contact with his friends at the local parish. His older brother, with whom he was close, died recently. Until now, he says his “pride” has made him resist his primary care physician’s recommendation that he see a psychiatrist.

Late-life depressive syndromes commonly present with somatic complaints. Typically, patients deny having a mental illness and perceive that their symptoms are organic in origin (Box).1

Losses. Psychosocial and medical losses are major risk factors for late-life adjustment disorders, subsyndromal depressive disorders, and major depression. Medical losses may include loss of mobility or independent function, chronic pain, or sensory losses that limit one’s ability to read or hear. Psychosocial losses may include the death of a spouse, sibling, or peer or moving from one’s longtime home to a more structured environment (assisted living, nursing home, or living with relatives).

Medical causes to rule out before starting antidepressant therapy include:

  • hypothyroidism
  • medication side effects
  • bipolar disorder, which may require the use of a mood-stabilizing agent to prevent manic symptoms.3

History. Often a history of mood disorder in the individual or a family member can help the clinician determine that mental illness accounts for the patient’s symptoms. In older patients, it is not uncommon for psychotic symptoms to accompany a primary mood disturbance.

Suicide risk is high in depressed older persons, so detection and quick treatment of depression is paramount. Older white men are at particularly high risk for completed suicide using firearms.3

Alcohol abuse may contribute to depressive symptoms in older persons. A second peak of alcoholism occurs in the eighth decade of life and can confound diagnosis of depression in patients of this age.

Making the diagnosis. In patients who present with symptoms and risk factors for late-life depression, depression rating scales can help confirm the diagnosis. Commonly used scales include the Beck Depression Inventory, the Hamilton Depression Rating Scale, and the Zung Self-Rating Depression Scale. Specialized scales for use in older patients include the Geriatric Depression Scale and the Cornell Scale; the latter scale is designed for patients with comorbid depression and dementia.3,4

Treatment

Antidepressant treatment in combination with psychotherapy usually is warranted when treating nonpsychotic late-life depression. In patients with psychosis, electroconvulsive therapy can help achieve remission.

Cognitive-behavioral therapy and interpersonal and insight-oriented psychotherapy have been shown to be effective in late-life depression. Social interventions aimed at preventing isolation also can work. In milder cases of depression, psychotherapy alone may be sufficient.3

Starting dosages. When antidepressant therapy is indicated in an older patient, start low and go slow.5 Older patients generally require prolonged titration rates and a longer course of treatment than do younger patients. Physiologic changes that occur with aging include:

  • altered drug metabolism rate, including slower demethylation
  • increased body fat-to-water ratio, which increases the volume of distribution for lipophilic psychotropic drugs
  • decreased glomerular filtration rate, which may account for higher serum concentrations of drugs and their metabolites
  • increased sensitivity of the older brain to the effects of medications.6
 

 

Thus—with some exceptions—recommended starting dosages for older patients are usually one-half those used in younger adults. For the frail older patient, the starting dosage should probably be even lower—about one-fourth the typical starting dosage in young adults.6 As in younger patients, the treatment goal is to achieve the maximal therapeutic effect with the lowest effective dosage while avoiding side effects.

More time may be required to achieve a therapeutic effect in older than in younger patients. Substantial improvement may not be seen until an older patient has been taking an antidepressant for 9 weeks or longer. In younger patients, responses are seen as early as 2 weeks after starting antidepressant therapy, and remission occurs within 6 to 8 weeks.2

SSRIs versus tricyclics

SSRIs—citalopram, escitalopram, fluoxetine, fluvoxamine, paroxetine, and sertraline (Table 1)7 —are considered first-line antidepressants for late-life depression. Although SSRIs and tricyclic antidepressants (TCAs) demonstrate equivalent efficacy in older adults, SSRIs are associated with lesstroublesome side effects.2

SSRIs are less sedating than tricyclics and are not associated with adverse effects on cognition; both qualities make these agents appropriate for older patients. Risk of overdose with SSRIs also is much lower than with TCAs.2

Both types of agent have been reported to cause movement disorders such as extrapyramidal symptoms and even tardive dyskinesia, but these side effects are much more rare with SSRIs than with TCAs.2 Also—unlike the TCAs— SSRIs do not significantly effect cardiac conduction, which is an important quality in the older population with its relatively high incidence of heart disease.

Table 1

USING SSRIs TO TREAT LATE-LIFE DEPRESSION

DrugHalf-life (hours)*Recommended dosage after age 65 (mg/d) †
Citalopram3520 to 40
Escitalopram27 - 3210 to 20
Fluoxetine96 - 38610 to 60
Fluvoxamine1625 to 300
Paroxetine2110 to 40
Sertraline2625 to 200
* In the older patient, medication half-lives may be extended 1.5to 2-fold.
† The heterogeneity of aging can lead to a wide variation in antidepressant target dosages. Therefore, although starting dosages for older adults are lower, final dosages may be the same as for younger adults.
Source: Physicians’ Desk Reference (56th ed). Montvale, NJ: Medical Economics Co, 2002.

Meta-analyses suggest that patients are more likely to discontinue taking tricyclics than SSRIs.8 Adherence to antidepressant medications by older patients has been associated with lower perceived stigma of mental illness, higher self-rated severity of illness, age over 60, and absence of a personality disorder.9

SSRI side effects

The most common side effect of SSRIs is nausea, which is usually mild and occurs in the first weeks of treatment.2 Dry mouth is related to noradrenergic influences on the salivary gland. Anxiety is usually transient.

Sedation can be a problem in older patients who use SSRIs. Among the six SSRIs indicated for depression, paroxetine appears to be the most sedating.10 Paroxetine exhibits the most muscarinic blockade in vitro, with a binding affinity less than that of imipramine but greater than nortriptyline.11 Studies in older patients have suggested, however, that cognitive function is not compromised with paroxetine, as is observed with other antidepressants with anticholinergic action.6

Table 2

CYTOCHROME P450 ISOZYMES INHIBITED BY SSRI ANTIDEPRESSANTS (IN VITRO)

Drug1A22C92C192D63A4
Fluoxetine+++++++++
Sertraline+++++
Paroxetine+++++++
Citalopram++
Escitalopram
Fluvoxamine+++++++++++
Source: Adapted from Greenblatt et al. J Clin Psychiatry 1998;59(suppl 15):19-27, and von Moltke et al. Drug Metab Dispos 2001;29:1102-9.

Sexual function can be diminished by SSRIs; the most common sexual side effects are anorgasmia and delayed orgasm.12 Preserving sexual function is important to many older men and women who retain their interest in sexual activity well into later life.

Withdrawal syndrome. Abrupt discontinuation of some SSRIs can lead to withdrawal side effects, such as dizziness, fatigue, and nausea. In a study of young and older adults, withdrawal syndrome followed abrupt discontinuation at rates of 14% with fluoxetine and 60% with sertraline or paroxetine.13

Elimination half-life. Medication half-lives tend to be prolonged in older patients because of age-related pharmacokinetic changes. SSRIs with relatively shorter half-lives—such as citalopram, sertraline, paroxetine, and fluvoxamine—could be eliminated fairly rapidly should adverse events arise.

On the other hand, use of a longer-acting agent, such as fluoxetine, may be an advantage if compliance is a problem. In this case, fluoxetine’s prolonged washout rate could help protect a patient from relapse, even when doses are missed.

Potential drug-drug interactions

Individual SSRIs have different effects on the cytochrome P450 system (Table 2).14,15 For example, fluoxetine, sertraline, and paroxetine—but not fluvoxamine—are in vitro inhibitors of the 2D6 isoenzyme system,16 which metabolizes TCAs, type Ic antiarrhythmics, alpha-adrenergic blockers, dextromethorphan, chemotherapeutic agents, and some antipsychotics. Citalopram has minimal inhibitory activity and escitalopram has virtually no inhibitory action on CYP 2D6.17

Cytochrome P450 3A4 metabolizes numerous drugs, including alprazolam, triazolam, carbamazepine, calcium channel blockers, and others. The 3A4 enzymes are inhibited by fluoxetine, sertraline, and fluvoxamine.18

 

 

Cytochrome P450 1A2 is the liver isoenzyme responsible for dealkylating theophylline, caffeine, and phenacetin. This enzyme system also metabolizes tacrine and clozapine. Of the SSRIs, fluvoxamine is the most potent inhibitor of the 1A2 enzyme, while escitalopram is a negligible inhibitor.17

Cytochrome P450 2C is a subfamily of isoenzymes that includes 2C9, 2C10, 2C19, and others. This system metabolizes some antidepressants as well as warfarin, phenytoin, and diazepam. Inhibitors of this system include fluvoxamine, fluoxetine, sertraline, and paroxetine.18

MAO inhibitors. Concomitant use of serotonin-acting drugs and monoamine oxidase inhibitors should be avoided. When used in combination, SSRIs and MAO inhibitors can cause a serotonin syndrome, with potential hyperpyretic crises, seizures, coma, and death. When switching medications, it is important to eliminate any serotonin-acting drug before starting an MAO inhibitor.2

In young adults, a 7-day washout is needed when switching from fluvoxamine and 14 days when switching from sertraline, citalopram, or paroxetine. With fluoxetine, the washout period is 35 days in young adults. Because medication half-lives in older patients may be prolonged two- to three-fold, it is advisable to proceed conservatively and extend these washout periods accordingly.

Related resources

Drug brand names

  • Alprazolam • Xanax
  • Citalopram • Celexa
  • Clozapine • Clozaril
  • Diazepam • Valium
  • Escitalopram • Lexapro
  • Fluoxetine • Prozac
  • Fluvoxamine • Luvox
  • Paroxetine • Paxil
  • Sertraline • Zoloft
  • Tacrine • Cognex
  • Triazolam • Halcion

Disclosure

Dr. Kasckow reports that he receives grant/research support from, serves as a consultant to, or is on the speakers bureau of Eli Lilly and Co., Forest Laboratories, Pharmacia Corp., Solvay Pharmaceuticals, AstraZeneca Pharmaceuticals, Organon, Janssen Pharmaceutica, and Pfizer Inc.

Dr. Mohamed reports that she receives grant/research support from Forest Laboratories and serves on the speakers bureau of Eli Lilly and Co.

Dr. Herman reports that he serves as a consultant to Eli Lilly and Co.

Other co-authors report no financial relationship with any company whose products are mentioned in this article, or with manufacturers of competing products.

Despite its impact on individuals and public health, depression in older persons is inadequately diagnosed and treated. Even when depression is diagnosed, only one-third of persons older than 65 receive treatment.1 Reasons for this include:

  • lack of physician awareness that depression presents differently in older than in younger adults
  • patient denial of depressive symptoms
  • patients’ and physicians’ mistaken belief that feeling depressed is a normal part of aging.

The good news is that when geriatric depression is recognized, it usually responds favorably to treatment, although aggressive intervention may be required.2 In this article, we describe our approach to diagnosis and discuss use of selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs) as first-line antidepressants for older patients.

Late-life depression risk factors

Depression is common in older persons, especially in those who have experienced psychosocial or medical losses, including chronic illness. Although its presentation often does not meet criteria for major depression, the more common subsyndromal depression is debilitating and can lead to suicide.

Box

CASE REPORT: DEPRESSED, AT RISK FOR SUICIDE

A 72-year-old man presents with trouble concentrating, decreased appetite, anergy, and anhedonia. He says he frequently awakes at 3 AM, and it takes him 2 hours to return to sleep. Lately, he has thought of shooting himself with his hunting rifle. The patient’s wife died of cancer 1 year ago, and he has developed several medical illnesses within the past 10 years: chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, worsening arthritis, mild ischemic heart disease, and worsening hearing loss.

The patient denies feeling depressed and instead attributes his symptoms to his medical illnesses. He has become progressively isolated in the past year, with less social contact with his friends at the local parish. His older brother, with whom he was close, died recently. Until now, he says his “pride” has made him resist his primary care physician’s recommendation that he see a psychiatrist.

Late-life depressive syndromes commonly present with somatic complaints. Typically, patients deny having a mental illness and perceive that their symptoms are organic in origin (Box).1

Losses. Psychosocial and medical losses are major risk factors for late-life adjustment disorders, subsyndromal depressive disorders, and major depression. Medical losses may include loss of mobility or independent function, chronic pain, or sensory losses that limit one’s ability to read or hear. Psychosocial losses may include the death of a spouse, sibling, or peer or moving from one’s longtime home to a more structured environment (assisted living, nursing home, or living with relatives).

Medical causes to rule out before starting antidepressant therapy include:

  • hypothyroidism
  • medication side effects
  • bipolar disorder, which may require the use of a mood-stabilizing agent to prevent manic symptoms.3

History. Often a history of mood disorder in the individual or a family member can help the clinician determine that mental illness accounts for the patient’s symptoms. In older patients, it is not uncommon for psychotic symptoms to accompany a primary mood disturbance.

Suicide risk is high in depressed older persons, so detection and quick treatment of depression is paramount. Older white men are at particularly high risk for completed suicide using firearms.3

Alcohol abuse may contribute to depressive symptoms in older persons. A second peak of alcoholism occurs in the eighth decade of life and can confound diagnosis of depression in patients of this age.

Making the diagnosis. In patients who present with symptoms and risk factors for late-life depression, depression rating scales can help confirm the diagnosis. Commonly used scales include the Beck Depression Inventory, the Hamilton Depression Rating Scale, and the Zung Self-Rating Depression Scale. Specialized scales for use in older patients include the Geriatric Depression Scale and the Cornell Scale; the latter scale is designed for patients with comorbid depression and dementia.3,4

Treatment

Antidepressant treatment in combination with psychotherapy usually is warranted when treating nonpsychotic late-life depression. In patients with psychosis, electroconvulsive therapy can help achieve remission.

Cognitive-behavioral therapy and interpersonal and insight-oriented psychotherapy have been shown to be effective in late-life depression. Social interventions aimed at preventing isolation also can work. In milder cases of depression, psychotherapy alone may be sufficient.3

Starting dosages. When antidepressant therapy is indicated in an older patient, start low and go slow.5 Older patients generally require prolonged titration rates and a longer course of treatment than do younger patients. Physiologic changes that occur with aging include:

  • altered drug metabolism rate, including slower demethylation
  • increased body fat-to-water ratio, which increases the volume of distribution for lipophilic psychotropic drugs
  • decreased glomerular filtration rate, which may account for higher serum concentrations of drugs and their metabolites
  • increased sensitivity of the older brain to the effects of medications.6
 

 

Thus—with some exceptions—recommended starting dosages for older patients are usually one-half those used in younger adults. For the frail older patient, the starting dosage should probably be even lower—about one-fourth the typical starting dosage in young adults.6 As in younger patients, the treatment goal is to achieve the maximal therapeutic effect with the lowest effective dosage while avoiding side effects.

More time may be required to achieve a therapeutic effect in older than in younger patients. Substantial improvement may not be seen until an older patient has been taking an antidepressant for 9 weeks or longer. In younger patients, responses are seen as early as 2 weeks after starting antidepressant therapy, and remission occurs within 6 to 8 weeks.2

SSRIs versus tricyclics

SSRIs—citalopram, escitalopram, fluoxetine, fluvoxamine, paroxetine, and sertraline (Table 1)7 —are considered first-line antidepressants for late-life depression. Although SSRIs and tricyclic antidepressants (TCAs) demonstrate equivalent efficacy in older adults, SSRIs are associated with lesstroublesome side effects.2

SSRIs are less sedating than tricyclics and are not associated with adverse effects on cognition; both qualities make these agents appropriate for older patients. Risk of overdose with SSRIs also is much lower than with TCAs.2

Both types of agent have been reported to cause movement disorders such as extrapyramidal symptoms and even tardive dyskinesia, but these side effects are much more rare with SSRIs than with TCAs.2 Also—unlike the TCAs— SSRIs do not significantly effect cardiac conduction, which is an important quality in the older population with its relatively high incidence of heart disease.

Table 1

USING SSRIs TO TREAT LATE-LIFE DEPRESSION

DrugHalf-life (hours)*Recommended dosage after age 65 (mg/d) †
Citalopram3520 to 40
Escitalopram27 - 3210 to 20
Fluoxetine96 - 38610 to 60
Fluvoxamine1625 to 300
Paroxetine2110 to 40
Sertraline2625 to 200
* In the older patient, medication half-lives may be extended 1.5to 2-fold.
† The heterogeneity of aging can lead to a wide variation in antidepressant target dosages. Therefore, although starting dosages for older adults are lower, final dosages may be the same as for younger adults.
Source: Physicians’ Desk Reference (56th ed). Montvale, NJ: Medical Economics Co, 2002.

Meta-analyses suggest that patients are more likely to discontinue taking tricyclics than SSRIs.8 Adherence to antidepressant medications by older patients has been associated with lower perceived stigma of mental illness, higher self-rated severity of illness, age over 60, and absence of a personality disorder.9

SSRI side effects

The most common side effect of SSRIs is nausea, which is usually mild and occurs in the first weeks of treatment.2 Dry mouth is related to noradrenergic influences on the salivary gland. Anxiety is usually transient.

Sedation can be a problem in older patients who use SSRIs. Among the six SSRIs indicated for depression, paroxetine appears to be the most sedating.10 Paroxetine exhibits the most muscarinic blockade in vitro, with a binding affinity less than that of imipramine but greater than nortriptyline.11 Studies in older patients have suggested, however, that cognitive function is not compromised with paroxetine, as is observed with other antidepressants with anticholinergic action.6

Table 2

CYTOCHROME P450 ISOZYMES INHIBITED BY SSRI ANTIDEPRESSANTS (IN VITRO)

Drug1A22C92C192D63A4
Fluoxetine+++++++++
Sertraline+++++
Paroxetine+++++++
Citalopram++
Escitalopram
Fluvoxamine+++++++++++
Source: Adapted from Greenblatt et al. J Clin Psychiatry 1998;59(suppl 15):19-27, and von Moltke et al. Drug Metab Dispos 2001;29:1102-9.

Sexual function can be diminished by SSRIs; the most common sexual side effects are anorgasmia and delayed orgasm.12 Preserving sexual function is important to many older men and women who retain their interest in sexual activity well into later life.

Withdrawal syndrome. Abrupt discontinuation of some SSRIs can lead to withdrawal side effects, such as dizziness, fatigue, and nausea. In a study of young and older adults, withdrawal syndrome followed abrupt discontinuation at rates of 14% with fluoxetine and 60% with sertraline or paroxetine.13

Elimination half-life. Medication half-lives tend to be prolonged in older patients because of age-related pharmacokinetic changes. SSRIs with relatively shorter half-lives—such as citalopram, sertraline, paroxetine, and fluvoxamine—could be eliminated fairly rapidly should adverse events arise.

On the other hand, use of a longer-acting agent, such as fluoxetine, may be an advantage if compliance is a problem. In this case, fluoxetine’s prolonged washout rate could help protect a patient from relapse, even when doses are missed.

Potential drug-drug interactions

Individual SSRIs have different effects on the cytochrome P450 system (Table 2).14,15 For example, fluoxetine, sertraline, and paroxetine—but not fluvoxamine—are in vitro inhibitors of the 2D6 isoenzyme system,16 which metabolizes TCAs, type Ic antiarrhythmics, alpha-adrenergic blockers, dextromethorphan, chemotherapeutic agents, and some antipsychotics. Citalopram has minimal inhibitory activity and escitalopram has virtually no inhibitory action on CYP 2D6.17

Cytochrome P450 3A4 metabolizes numerous drugs, including alprazolam, triazolam, carbamazepine, calcium channel blockers, and others. The 3A4 enzymes are inhibited by fluoxetine, sertraline, and fluvoxamine.18

 

 

Cytochrome P450 1A2 is the liver isoenzyme responsible for dealkylating theophylline, caffeine, and phenacetin. This enzyme system also metabolizes tacrine and clozapine. Of the SSRIs, fluvoxamine is the most potent inhibitor of the 1A2 enzyme, while escitalopram is a negligible inhibitor.17

Cytochrome P450 2C is a subfamily of isoenzymes that includes 2C9, 2C10, 2C19, and others. This system metabolizes some antidepressants as well as warfarin, phenytoin, and diazepam. Inhibitors of this system include fluvoxamine, fluoxetine, sertraline, and paroxetine.18

MAO inhibitors. Concomitant use of serotonin-acting drugs and monoamine oxidase inhibitors should be avoided. When used in combination, SSRIs and MAO inhibitors can cause a serotonin syndrome, with potential hyperpyretic crises, seizures, coma, and death. When switching medications, it is important to eliminate any serotonin-acting drug before starting an MAO inhibitor.2

In young adults, a 7-day washout is needed when switching from fluvoxamine and 14 days when switching from sertraline, citalopram, or paroxetine. With fluoxetine, the washout period is 35 days in young adults. Because medication half-lives in older patients may be prolonged two- to three-fold, it is advisable to proceed conservatively and extend these washout periods accordingly.

Related resources

Drug brand names

  • Alprazolam • Xanax
  • Citalopram • Celexa
  • Clozapine • Clozaril
  • Diazepam • Valium
  • Escitalopram • Lexapro
  • Fluoxetine • Prozac
  • Fluvoxamine • Luvox
  • Paroxetine • Paxil
  • Sertraline • Zoloft
  • Tacrine • Cognex
  • Triazolam • Halcion

Disclosure

Dr. Kasckow reports that he receives grant/research support from, serves as a consultant to, or is on the speakers bureau of Eli Lilly and Co., Forest Laboratories, Pharmacia Corp., Solvay Pharmaceuticals, AstraZeneca Pharmaceuticals, Organon, Janssen Pharmaceutica, and Pfizer Inc.

Dr. Mohamed reports that she receives grant/research support from Forest Laboratories and serves on the speakers bureau of Eli Lilly and Co.

Dr. Herman reports that he serves as a consultant to Eli Lilly and Co.

Other co-authors report no financial relationship with any company whose products are mentioned in this article, or with manufacturers of competing products.

References

1. Judd LL, Paulus MP, Wells KB, Rapaport MH. Socioeconomic burden of subsyndromal depressive symptoms and major depression in a sample of the general population. Am J Psychiatry 1996;153:1411-7.

2. Mulchahey JJ, Malik MS, Sabai M, Kasckow JW. Serotonin selective reuptake inhibitors in the treatment of geriatric depression and related disorders. Int J Neuropsychopharmacol 1999;2:121-7.

3. Blazer DG, Koenig HG. Mood disorders. In: Busse EW, Blazer DG (eds). Textbook of geriatric psychiatry (2nd ed). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Press, 1996;235-63.

4. Blazer DG. The psychiatric interview of the geriatric patient. In: Busse EW, Blazer DG (eds). Textbook of geriatric psychiatry (2nd ed). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Press, 1996;175-89.

5. Young RC, Meyers BS. Psychopharmacology. In: Sadovoy J, Lazarus LW, Jarvik LF, Grossberg GP (eds). Comprehensive review of geriatric psychiatry, vol. II. Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Publishing, 1996;755:817.-

6. Dunner DL. Therapeutic considerations in treating depression in the elderly. J Clin Psychiatry 1994;55(suppl):48-58.

7. Physicians’ desk reference (56th ed). Montvale, NJ: Medical Economics Co, 2002.

8. Montgomery SA, Henry J, McDonald G, et al. Selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors: meta-analysis of discontinuation rates. Int Clin Psychopharmacol 1994;9:47-53.

9. Sirey JA, Bruce ML, Alexopoulos GS, Perlick DA, Friedman SJ, Meyers BS. Stigma as a barrier to recovery. Perceived stigma and patient-rated severity of illness as predictors of antidepressant drug adherence. Psychiatry Serv 2001;52:1615-20.

10. Dechant KL, Clissold SP. Paroxetine: a review of its pharmacodynamic and pharmacokinetic properties and therapeutic potential in depressive illness Drugs 1991;41:225-53.

11. Richelson E. Pharmacology of antidepressants: characteristics of the ideal drug. Mayo Clin Proc 1994;69:1069-81.

12. Herman JB, Brotman AW, Pollack MH, Falk WE, Biederman J, Rosenbaum JF. Fluoxetine-induced sexual dysfunction. J Clin Psychiatry 1990;51:25-7.

13. Rosenbaum JF, Fava M, Hoog SL, Ascroft RC, Krebs WB. Selective serotonin reuptake inhibitor discontinuation syndrome: a randomized clinical trial. Biol Psychiatry 1998;44:77-87.

14. Greenblatt DJ, von Moltke LL, Harmatz JS, Shader RI. Drug interactions with newer antidepressants: role of human cytochromes P450. J Clin Psychiatry 1998;59(suppl 15):19-27.

15. von Moltke LL, Greenblatt DJ, Giancarlo GM, Granda BW, Harmatz JS, Shader RI. Escitalopram (s-citalopram) and its metabolites in vitro: cytochromes mediating biotransformation, inhibitory effects, and comparison to r-citalopram. Drug Metab Dispos 2001;29:1102-9.

16. Nemeroff CB, DeVane CL, Pollock BG. Newer antidepressants and the cytochrome P450 system. Am J Psychiatry 1996;153:311-20.

17. Owens MJ, Rosenbaum JF. Escitalopram: a second-generation SSRI. CNS Spectrums 2002;7(suppl 1):4.-

18. Preskorn SH. Recent pharmacologic advances in antidepressant therapy for the elderly. Am J Med 1993;94(suppl 5A):2S-12S.

References

1. Judd LL, Paulus MP, Wells KB, Rapaport MH. Socioeconomic burden of subsyndromal depressive symptoms and major depression in a sample of the general population. Am J Psychiatry 1996;153:1411-7.

2. Mulchahey JJ, Malik MS, Sabai M, Kasckow JW. Serotonin selective reuptake inhibitors in the treatment of geriatric depression and related disorders. Int J Neuropsychopharmacol 1999;2:121-7.

3. Blazer DG, Koenig HG. Mood disorders. In: Busse EW, Blazer DG (eds). Textbook of geriatric psychiatry (2nd ed). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Press, 1996;235-63.

4. Blazer DG. The psychiatric interview of the geriatric patient. In: Busse EW, Blazer DG (eds). Textbook of geriatric psychiatry (2nd ed). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Press, 1996;175-89.

5. Young RC, Meyers BS. Psychopharmacology. In: Sadovoy J, Lazarus LW, Jarvik LF, Grossberg GP (eds). Comprehensive review of geriatric psychiatry, vol. II. Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Publishing, 1996;755:817.-

6. Dunner DL. Therapeutic considerations in treating depression in the elderly. J Clin Psychiatry 1994;55(suppl):48-58.

7. Physicians’ desk reference (56th ed). Montvale, NJ: Medical Economics Co, 2002.

8. Montgomery SA, Henry J, McDonald G, et al. Selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors: meta-analysis of discontinuation rates. Int Clin Psychopharmacol 1994;9:47-53.

9. Sirey JA, Bruce ML, Alexopoulos GS, Perlick DA, Friedman SJ, Meyers BS. Stigma as a barrier to recovery. Perceived stigma and patient-rated severity of illness as predictors of antidepressant drug adherence. Psychiatry Serv 2001;52:1615-20.

10. Dechant KL, Clissold SP. Paroxetine: a review of its pharmacodynamic and pharmacokinetic properties and therapeutic potential in depressive illness Drugs 1991;41:225-53.

11. Richelson E. Pharmacology of antidepressants: characteristics of the ideal drug. Mayo Clin Proc 1994;69:1069-81.

12. Herman JB, Brotman AW, Pollack MH, Falk WE, Biederman J, Rosenbaum JF. Fluoxetine-induced sexual dysfunction. J Clin Psychiatry 1990;51:25-7.

13. Rosenbaum JF, Fava M, Hoog SL, Ascroft RC, Krebs WB. Selective serotonin reuptake inhibitor discontinuation syndrome: a randomized clinical trial. Biol Psychiatry 1998;44:77-87.

14. Greenblatt DJ, von Moltke LL, Harmatz JS, Shader RI. Drug interactions with newer antidepressants: role of human cytochromes P450. J Clin Psychiatry 1998;59(suppl 15):19-27.

15. von Moltke LL, Greenblatt DJ, Giancarlo GM, Granda BW, Harmatz JS, Shader RI. Escitalopram (s-citalopram) and its metabolites in vitro: cytochromes mediating biotransformation, inhibitory effects, and comparison to r-citalopram. Drug Metab Dispos 2001;29:1102-9.

16. Nemeroff CB, DeVane CL, Pollock BG. Newer antidepressants and the cytochrome P450 system. Am J Psychiatry 1996;153:311-20.

17. Owens MJ, Rosenbaum JF. Escitalopram: a second-generation SSRI. CNS Spectrums 2002;7(suppl 1):4.-

18. Preskorn SH. Recent pharmacologic advances in antidepressant therapy for the elderly. Am J Med 1993;94(suppl 5A):2S-12S.

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(01)
Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(01)
Page Number
43-47
Page Number
43-47
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
When and how to use SSRIs to treat late-life depression
Display Headline
When and how to use SSRIs to treat late-life depression
Sections
Article Source

PURLs Copyright

Inside the Article

Article PDF Media

Who’s at greatest risk for delirium tremens

Article Type
Changed
Tue, 12/11/2018 - 15:12
Display Headline
Who’s at greatest risk for delirium tremens

Ms. J, 42, was admitted to the OB-GYN service for a routine vaginal hysterectomy to treat dysfunctional uterine bleeding. In the presurgical history, she described having a few drinks daily. Shortly after a successful uncomplicated procedure, the patient became tremulous and was given several doses of lorazepam.

Two days after surgery, the patient became delirious. She complained of tactile and visual hallucinations, her level of consciousness waxed and waned, and she showed significant autonomic instability. A psychiatry consult was ordered. The consult team recommended IV fluids, IV diazepam, and haloperidol, supplemented with a multivitamin and 100 mg/d of thiamine. When the patient’s delirium resolved within 4 days, a more detailed discussion revealed a history of alcohol abuse and withdrawal seizures.

It is not uncommon for a patient to develop acute alcohol withdrawal and delirium tremens (DTs) while recovering from routine surgery. Delirium tremens remains a medical emergency, even though advances have reduced its associated mortality rates (Box).1-7

Psychiatrists who know the risk factors for DTs—also termed alcohol withdrawal delirium—can identify and protect patients who are susceptible to this life-threatening complication. We describe the clinical features of DTs, potential predisposing factors, theories behind its mechanisms, and strategies for preventing and managing DTs in patients experiencing alcohol withdrawal.

Clinical features

Disorientation and confusion are the hallmark features of DTs. Other clinical manifestations include vivid hallucinations, extreme tremulousness, autonomic hyperactivity, sweating, tachycardia, and agitation. Men experiencing DTs seem to demonstrate a greater degree of autonomic hyperactivity than women.8

Symptoms usually arise in the alcoholic patient between the third and fifth days of abstinence but have been known to occur several weeks after a patient’s last drink. Symptoms usually resolve within a few days9 but have been known to resolve within hours in some patients and to persist for several months in others.10

Differential diagnosis. Clinicians often fail to differentiate alcohol hallucinosis from DTs. Alcohol hallucinosis—which occurs in 3 to 10% of patients with severe alcohol withdrawal11 —manifests as auditory, visual, or tactile hallucinations with a clear sensorium. Patients experiencing DTs also may experience hallucinations but with confusion, disorientation, and severe autonomic hyperactivity. Unlike DTs, alcohol hallucinosis is not fatal.9

DTs also should be differentiated from:

  • other causes of delirium, such as medication or infection. If the cause is identified and removed, the delirium should gradually resolve.
  • Wernicke’s encephalopathy—caused by glucose exposure in the thiamine-deficient alcoholic—which is characterized by confusion, ophthalmoplegia, and ataxia.

Completing a thorough history and physical exam, talking to family members, and reviewing past medical charts are often the best ways to differentiate DTs from other conditions.

What causes DTs?

Vitamin deficiencies were initially thought to cause alcohol withdrawal.3 More recent evidence points toward multiple neuroadaptive changes in the brain associated with chronic alcohol exposure.12 Although numerous neurotransmitter systems may play a role in alcohol withdrawal, recent research has focused on glutamate13 and gamma-aminobutyric acid (GABA).14

Box

DTs: MORTALITY RATE AS HIGH AS 15%

Approximately 1.5 to 2 million Americans seek treatment for alcohol abuse or dependence each year.1 As many as 71% of these patients manifest symptoms of alcohol withdrawal.2 Of those individuals who experience alcohol withdrawal, delirium tremens (DTs) may occur in up to 5%.3-5 Utilizing these percentages, it can be estimated that as many as 50,000 to 70,000 individuals develop DTs each year in the United States alone.

Although the incidence of DTs can be assumed to be relatively low, the condition should be considered a medical emergency. Studies list mortality rates for DTs as high as 15% and as low as 2 to 3%.7,8

The brain seems to compensate for alcohol’s enhancement of GABA (inhibitory) neurons by up-regulating excitatory neurons (glutamate). Alcohol has been shown to have some effects on neurons.15 The implication is that withdrawing alcohol triggers an “excitatory state” until the brain can readjust the fine balance between excitation and inhibition, a process that takes weeks to months. Some changes may never reverse because of the neurotoxic effects of alcohol and alcohol withdrawal.

Repeated alcohol exposure and withdrawal may lead to neuroadaptive changes in the brain and to more severe withdrawal symptoms, such as DTs. Repeated alcohol withdrawal episodes can produce a kindling effect. As outlined by Becker, kindling occurs “when a weak electrical or chemical stimulus, which initially causes no overt behavioral responses, results in the appearance of behavioral effects, such as seizures, when it is administered repeatedly.”16 Thus, repeated alcohol withdrawal worsens future episodes and eventually leads to alcohol withdrawal seizures.

Whereas most of these theories apply to alcohol withdrawal, they are also compatible with the neuronal mechanisms that may underlie DTs. Alcohol withdrawal and DTs share the presence of a “hyperactive state.” Most likely, DTs is the progression to more severe or pronounced neuroadaptive changes seen in mild to moderate alcohol withdrawal. One could certainly imagine that the possible neurotoxic effects of alcohol, alcohol withdrawal, and repeated detoxifications could sensitize the CNS to the more severe symptoms seen in DTs. Infection and metabolic abnormalities may also enhance the progression. Unfortunately, why some but not all patients experiencing alcohol withdrawal progress to DTs is unknown.

 

 

Table 1

RISK FACTORS FOR DELIRIUM TREMENS

Comorbid medical illness (with electrolyte, fluid abnormalities)*
History of delirium tremens*
Blood alcohol level >300 mg/dL on presentation*
Presentation after an alcohol withdrawal seizure*
Older age*
Longer history of alcohol dependence
Intense alcohol craving
Abnormal liver function
* Supported with studies and/or in the medical literature
Source: Saitz R. Introduction to alcohol withdrawal. Alcohol Health Res World 1998;22(1):5-12.

Table 2

STRATEGIES TO PREVENT AND TREAT DELIRIUM TREMENS

Assess risk for DTs with a thorough history, including collaborative family information and medical charts
Admit patients with a history of serious withdrawal symptoms or potential for inpatient detoxification (based on degree of tolerance)
Check complete lab values (chemistry panel, liver function tests including ALT and AST, complete blood count, blood alcohol level, GGT, and others if relevant), and correct any fluid, vitamin, or electrolyte abnormalities
Treat comorbid medical conditions
Differentiate DTs from alcohol hallucinosis, other causes of delirium, and Wernicke’s encephalopathy
Consider giving benzodiazepines along with low-dose neuroleptics, if appropriate, and monitor for disinhibition/ confusion and extrapyramidal symptoms, respectively
Place the patient in a low-stimulation environment with frequent monitoring

Predisposing risk factors

Past withdrawal complicated by seizures or DTs is the single best predictor of future alcohol withdrawal symptoms.17 Also consider the following patients to be at elevated risk:

  • any individual who presents with a blood alcohol level >300 mg/dl or after experiencing a withdrawal seizure9
  • patients with comorbid medical conditions, such as electrolyte abnormalities, infection, or poorly treated cardiovascular or respiratory diseases
  • older persons, who tend to be susceptible to delirium associated with hospitalization, medical illnesses such as urinary tract infections or pneumonia, or use of certain medications.18

Potential risk factors for developing DTs are summarized in Table 1.1 Although few studies have been done, clinicians can use these factors as a guide for aggressively preventing DTs in at-risk patients.

Managing and preventing DTs

Management. Drug therapy is considered crucial to quell withdrawal symptoms and reduce the risk of death.19 Patients usually are treated with one of several benzodiazepines (such as chlordiazepoxide, diazepam, oxazepam, or lorazepam) to decrease autonomic instability and reduce seizure risk during acute alcohol withdrawal. Although dosages of these medications are estimated based on drinking history, some general starting ranges are often used in clinical practice:

  • chlordiazepoxide, 50 to 100 mg tid
  • lorazepam, 1 to 2 mg every 4 hours
  • oxazepam, 15 to 30 mg qid
  • diazepam, 10 to 20 mg tid/qid.

Treating DTs often requires the use of IV benzodiazepines because of their quick onset of action and benefit for acutely agitated patients who have difficulty taking medications by mouth.

Prevention. Correcting fluid and electrolyte abnormalities may be critical in preventing DTs (Table 2). In one study of patients who died while experiencing DTs, only 25% received adequate fluid replacement, which can be as much as 6 liters per day.20 Ideally, comorbid conditions should be addressed early in presentation and before DTs develop.21

High-dose benzodiazepine therapy does not completely protect a patient from DTs or reduce its duration,22 but it may reduce mortality. A meta-analysis of prospective, placebocontrolled trials reported a risk reduction of 4.9 cases of DTs per 100 patients treated with benzodiazepines. Mortality also seems to have been reduced in patients with DTs who were treated with sedative hypnotics.9 Benzodiazepines may cause increased confusion and disinhibition, as is frequently seen when patients with dementia are treated with these agents.23

Neuroleptics such as haloperidol have been used to prevent and treat DTs, but studies of their ability to reduce mortality have produced inconsistent results. What’s more, neuroleptics can reduce the seizure threshold and produce extrapyramidal symptoms.23 Atypical antipsychotics may offer a safer alternative, although more studies are needed to evaluate whether they decrease the occurrence and severity of DTs.

In summary, a rational approach to preventing and treating DTs is to:

  • manage comorbid medical illnesses, and correct fluid and electrolyte abnormalities
  • place the patient in a safe, low-stimulation environment with frequent monitoring
  • use benzodiazepines judiciously.

Related resources

  • National Institute on Alcohol Abuse and Alcoholism.
  • www.niaaa.nih.gov
  • 1995;30(6):765-70 (a thorough review of benzodiazepine use in alcohol withdrawal).

Drug brand names

  • Chlordiazepoxide • Librium
  • Diazepam • Valium
  • Haloperidol • Haldol
  • Lorazepam • Ativan
  • Oxazepam • Serax

Disclosure

The authors report no financial relationship with any company whose products are mentioned in this article, or with manufacturers of competing products.

References

1. Saitz R. Introduction to alcohol withdrawal. Alcohol Health Res World 1998;22(1):5-12.

2. Saitz R, Redmond MS, Mayo-Smith MF, et al. Individualized treatment for alcohol withdrawal. Randomized, double-blind, controlled trial. JAMA 1994;272:519-23.

3. Victor M, Adams RD. The effect of alcoholism on the nervous system. Research Publication of the Association for Research on Nervous and Mental Disorders 1953;32:526-73.

4. Victor M, Braush C. The role of abstinence in the genesis of alcoholic epilepsy. Epilepsia 1967;8:1-20.

5. Sellars EM, Kalant H. Alcohol intoxication and withdrawal. N Engl J Med 1976;294:757-62.

6. Victor M. Treatment of alcoholic intoxication and the withdrawal syndrome. Psychosomat Med 1966;28:636-50.

7. Guthrie S. The treatment of alcohol withdrawal. Pharmacotherapy 1989;9:131-43.

8. Trevisan LA, Boutrous N, Petrakis I, Krystal JH. Complications of alcohol withdrawal. Alcohol World 1998;22(1):61-66.

9. Mayo-Smith MF. Management of alcohol intoxication, overdose, and withdrawal. In: Graham AW, Schultz TK (eds). Principles of addiction medicine (2nd ed). Chevy Chase, MD: American Society of Addiction Medicine, 1998;434-41.

10. Wolf KM, Shaughnessy AF, Middleton DB. Prolonged delirium tremens requiring massive doses of medication. J Am Board Fam Pract 1993;6:502-4.

11. Platz WE, Oberlaender FA, Seidel ML. The phenomenology of perceptual hallucinations in alcohol-induced delirium tremens. Psychopathology 1995;28:247-55.

12. Littleton J. Neurochemical mechanisms underlying alcohol withdrawal. Alcohol Health Res World 1998;22(1):13-24.

13. Hoffman PL, Rabe CS, Grant KA, Valverius P, Hudspith M, Tabakoff B. Ethanol and the NMDA receptor. Alcohol 1990;7(3):229-31.

14. Morrow AL, Montpied P, Lingford-Hughes A, Paul SM. Chronic ethanol and pentobarbital administration in the rat: effects on GABAA receptor function and expression in brain. Alcohol 1990;7(3):237-44.

15. Begleiter H Kissin B (eds) The pharmacology of alcohol and alcohol dependence. New York: Oxford University Press, 1996.

16. Becker HC. Kindling in alcohol withdrawal. Alcohol World 1998;22(1):25-33.

17. Gold M, Miller N. Management of withdrawal syndromes and relapse prevention in drug and alcohol dependence. Am Fam Phys 1998;58:139-46.

18. Kraemer K, Mayo-Smith MF, Calkins R. Pharmacological management of alcohol withdrawal: a meta analysis of evidence-based practical guidelines. JAMA 1997;278:144-51.

19. Shaw GK. Detoxification: the use of benzodiazepines. Alcohol Alcohol 1995;30(6):765-70.

20. Victor M. Diagnosis and treatment of alcohol withdrawal states. Pract Gastroenteritis 1983;7(5):6-15.

21. Myrick H, Anton R. Treatment of alcohol withdrawal. Alcohol Health Res World 1998;22(1):38-43.

22. Hersh D, Kranzler HR, Meyer RE. Persistent delirium following cessation of heavy alcohol consumption: diagnostic and treatment implications. Am J Psychiatry 1997;154(6):846-51.

23. Myrick H, Anton R. Clinical management of alcohol withdrawal. CNS Spectrums 2000;5(2):22-32.

Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

Christopher Pelic, MD
Third-year resident in psychiatry

Hugh Myrick, MD
Assistant professor of psychiatry

Department of psychiatry and behavioral sciences Medical University of South Carolina Charleston, SC

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(01)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
14-19
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

Christopher Pelic, MD
Third-year resident in psychiatry

Hugh Myrick, MD
Assistant professor of psychiatry

Department of psychiatry and behavioral sciences Medical University of South Carolina Charleston, SC

Author and Disclosure Information

Christopher Pelic, MD
Third-year resident in psychiatry

Hugh Myrick, MD
Assistant professor of psychiatry

Department of psychiatry and behavioral sciences Medical University of South Carolina Charleston, SC

Article PDF
Article PDF

Ms. J, 42, was admitted to the OB-GYN service for a routine vaginal hysterectomy to treat dysfunctional uterine bleeding. In the presurgical history, she described having a few drinks daily. Shortly after a successful uncomplicated procedure, the patient became tremulous and was given several doses of lorazepam.

Two days after surgery, the patient became delirious. She complained of tactile and visual hallucinations, her level of consciousness waxed and waned, and she showed significant autonomic instability. A psychiatry consult was ordered. The consult team recommended IV fluids, IV diazepam, and haloperidol, supplemented with a multivitamin and 100 mg/d of thiamine. When the patient’s delirium resolved within 4 days, a more detailed discussion revealed a history of alcohol abuse and withdrawal seizures.

It is not uncommon for a patient to develop acute alcohol withdrawal and delirium tremens (DTs) while recovering from routine surgery. Delirium tremens remains a medical emergency, even though advances have reduced its associated mortality rates (Box).1-7

Psychiatrists who know the risk factors for DTs—also termed alcohol withdrawal delirium—can identify and protect patients who are susceptible to this life-threatening complication. We describe the clinical features of DTs, potential predisposing factors, theories behind its mechanisms, and strategies for preventing and managing DTs in patients experiencing alcohol withdrawal.

Clinical features

Disorientation and confusion are the hallmark features of DTs. Other clinical manifestations include vivid hallucinations, extreme tremulousness, autonomic hyperactivity, sweating, tachycardia, and agitation. Men experiencing DTs seem to demonstrate a greater degree of autonomic hyperactivity than women.8

Symptoms usually arise in the alcoholic patient between the third and fifth days of abstinence but have been known to occur several weeks after a patient’s last drink. Symptoms usually resolve within a few days9 but have been known to resolve within hours in some patients and to persist for several months in others.10

Differential diagnosis. Clinicians often fail to differentiate alcohol hallucinosis from DTs. Alcohol hallucinosis—which occurs in 3 to 10% of patients with severe alcohol withdrawal11 —manifests as auditory, visual, or tactile hallucinations with a clear sensorium. Patients experiencing DTs also may experience hallucinations but with confusion, disorientation, and severe autonomic hyperactivity. Unlike DTs, alcohol hallucinosis is not fatal.9

DTs also should be differentiated from:

  • other causes of delirium, such as medication or infection. If the cause is identified and removed, the delirium should gradually resolve.
  • Wernicke’s encephalopathy—caused by glucose exposure in the thiamine-deficient alcoholic—which is characterized by confusion, ophthalmoplegia, and ataxia.

Completing a thorough history and physical exam, talking to family members, and reviewing past medical charts are often the best ways to differentiate DTs from other conditions.

What causes DTs?

Vitamin deficiencies were initially thought to cause alcohol withdrawal.3 More recent evidence points toward multiple neuroadaptive changes in the brain associated with chronic alcohol exposure.12 Although numerous neurotransmitter systems may play a role in alcohol withdrawal, recent research has focused on glutamate13 and gamma-aminobutyric acid (GABA).14

Box

DTs: MORTALITY RATE AS HIGH AS 15%

Approximately 1.5 to 2 million Americans seek treatment for alcohol abuse or dependence each year.1 As many as 71% of these patients manifest symptoms of alcohol withdrawal.2 Of those individuals who experience alcohol withdrawal, delirium tremens (DTs) may occur in up to 5%.3-5 Utilizing these percentages, it can be estimated that as many as 50,000 to 70,000 individuals develop DTs each year in the United States alone.

Although the incidence of DTs can be assumed to be relatively low, the condition should be considered a medical emergency. Studies list mortality rates for DTs as high as 15% and as low as 2 to 3%.7,8

The brain seems to compensate for alcohol’s enhancement of GABA (inhibitory) neurons by up-regulating excitatory neurons (glutamate). Alcohol has been shown to have some effects on neurons.15 The implication is that withdrawing alcohol triggers an “excitatory state” until the brain can readjust the fine balance between excitation and inhibition, a process that takes weeks to months. Some changes may never reverse because of the neurotoxic effects of alcohol and alcohol withdrawal.

Repeated alcohol exposure and withdrawal may lead to neuroadaptive changes in the brain and to more severe withdrawal symptoms, such as DTs. Repeated alcohol withdrawal episodes can produce a kindling effect. As outlined by Becker, kindling occurs “when a weak electrical or chemical stimulus, which initially causes no overt behavioral responses, results in the appearance of behavioral effects, such as seizures, when it is administered repeatedly.”16 Thus, repeated alcohol withdrawal worsens future episodes and eventually leads to alcohol withdrawal seizures.

Whereas most of these theories apply to alcohol withdrawal, they are also compatible with the neuronal mechanisms that may underlie DTs. Alcohol withdrawal and DTs share the presence of a “hyperactive state.” Most likely, DTs is the progression to more severe or pronounced neuroadaptive changes seen in mild to moderate alcohol withdrawal. One could certainly imagine that the possible neurotoxic effects of alcohol, alcohol withdrawal, and repeated detoxifications could sensitize the CNS to the more severe symptoms seen in DTs. Infection and metabolic abnormalities may also enhance the progression. Unfortunately, why some but not all patients experiencing alcohol withdrawal progress to DTs is unknown.

 

 

Table 1

RISK FACTORS FOR DELIRIUM TREMENS

Comorbid medical illness (with electrolyte, fluid abnormalities)*
History of delirium tremens*
Blood alcohol level >300 mg/dL on presentation*
Presentation after an alcohol withdrawal seizure*
Older age*
Longer history of alcohol dependence
Intense alcohol craving
Abnormal liver function
* Supported with studies and/or in the medical literature
Source: Saitz R. Introduction to alcohol withdrawal. Alcohol Health Res World 1998;22(1):5-12.

Table 2

STRATEGIES TO PREVENT AND TREAT DELIRIUM TREMENS

Assess risk for DTs with a thorough history, including collaborative family information and medical charts
Admit patients with a history of serious withdrawal symptoms or potential for inpatient detoxification (based on degree of tolerance)
Check complete lab values (chemistry panel, liver function tests including ALT and AST, complete blood count, blood alcohol level, GGT, and others if relevant), and correct any fluid, vitamin, or electrolyte abnormalities
Treat comorbid medical conditions
Differentiate DTs from alcohol hallucinosis, other causes of delirium, and Wernicke’s encephalopathy
Consider giving benzodiazepines along with low-dose neuroleptics, if appropriate, and monitor for disinhibition/ confusion and extrapyramidal symptoms, respectively
Place the patient in a low-stimulation environment with frequent monitoring

Predisposing risk factors

Past withdrawal complicated by seizures or DTs is the single best predictor of future alcohol withdrawal symptoms.17 Also consider the following patients to be at elevated risk:

  • any individual who presents with a blood alcohol level >300 mg/dl or after experiencing a withdrawal seizure9
  • patients with comorbid medical conditions, such as electrolyte abnormalities, infection, or poorly treated cardiovascular or respiratory diseases
  • older persons, who tend to be susceptible to delirium associated with hospitalization, medical illnesses such as urinary tract infections or pneumonia, or use of certain medications.18

Potential risk factors for developing DTs are summarized in Table 1.1 Although few studies have been done, clinicians can use these factors as a guide for aggressively preventing DTs in at-risk patients.

Managing and preventing DTs

Management. Drug therapy is considered crucial to quell withdrawal symptoms and reduce the risk of death.19 Patients usually are treated with one of several benzodiazepines (such as chlordiazepoxide, diazepam, oxazepam, or lorazepam) to decrease autonomic instability and reduce seizure risk during acute alcohol withdrawal. Although dosages of these medications are estimated based on drinking history, some general starting ranges are often used in clinical practice:

  • chlordiazepoxide, 50 to 100 mg tid
  • lorazepam, 1 to 2 mg every 4 hours
  • oxazepam, 15 to 30 mg qid
  • diazepam, 10 to 20 mg tid/qid.

Treating DTs often requires the use of IV benzodiazepines because of their quick onset of action and benefit for acutely agitated patients who have difficulty taking medications by mouth.

Prevention. Correcting fluid and electrolyte abnormalities may be critical in preventing DTs (Table 2). In one study of patients who died while experiencing DTs, only 25% received adequate fluid replacement, which can be as much as 6 liters per day.20 Ideally, comorbid conditions should be addressed early in presentation and before DTs develop.21

High-dose benzodiazepine therapy does not completely protect a patient from DTs or reduce its duration,22 but it may reduce mortality. A meta-analysis of prospective, placebocontrolled trials reported a risk reduction of 4.9 cases of DTs per 100 patients treated with benzodiazepines. Mortality also seems to have been reduced in patients with DTs who were treated with sedative hypnotics.9 Benzodiazepines may cause increased confusion and disinhibition, as is frequently seen when patients with dementia are treated with these agents.23

Neuroleptics such as haloperidol have been used to prevent and treat DTs, but studies of their ability to reduce mortality have produced inconsistent results. What’s more, neuroleptics can reduce the seizure threshold and produce extrapyramidal symptoms.23 Atypical antipsychotics may offer a safer alternative, although more studies are needed to evaluate whether they decrease the occurrence and severity of DTs.

In summary, a rational approach to preventing and treating DTs is to:

  • manage comorbid medical illnesses, and correct fluid and electrolyte abnormalities
  • place the patient in a safe, low-stimulation environment with frequent monitoring
  • use benzodiazepines judiciously.

Related resources

  • National Institute on Alcohol Abuse and Alcoholism.
  • www.niaaa.nih.gov
  • 1995;30(6):765-70 (a thorough review of benzodiazepine use in alcohol withdrawal).

Drug brand names

  • Chlordiazepoxide • Librium
  • Diazepam • Valium
  • Haloperidol • Haldol
  • Lorazepam • Ativan
  • Oxazepam • Serax

Disclosure

The authors report no financial relationship with any company whose products are mentioned in this article, or with manufacturers of competing products.

Ms. J, 42, was admitted to the OB-GYN service for a routine vaginal hysterectomy to treat dysfunctional uterine bleeding. In the presurgical history, she described having a few drinks daily. Shortly after a successful uncomplicated procedure, the patient became tremulous and was given several doses of lorazepam.

Two days after surgery, the patient became delirious. She complained of tactile and visual hallucinations, her level of consciousness waxed and waned, and she showed significant autonomic instability. A psychiatry consult was ordered. The consult team recommended IV fluids, IV diazepam, and haloperidol, supplemented with a multivitamin and 100 mg/d of thiamine. When the patient’s delirium resolved within 4 days, a more detailed discussion revealed a history of alcohol abuse and withdrawal seizures.

It is not uncommon for a patient to develop acute alcohol withdrawal and delirium tremens (DTs) while recovering from routine surgery. Delirium tremens remains a medical emergency, even though advances have reduced its associated mortality rates (Box).1-7

Psychiatrists who know the risk factors for DTs—also termed alcohol withdrawal delirium—can identify and protect patients who are susceptible to this life-threatening complication. We describe the clinical features of DTs, potential predisposing factors, theories behind its mechanisms, and strategies for preventing and managing DTs in patients experiencing alcohol withdrawal.

Clinical features

Disorientation and confusion are the hallmark features of DTs. Other clinical manifestations include vivid hallucinations, extreme tremulousness, autonomic hyperactivity, sweating, tachycardia, and agitation. Men experiencing DTs seem to demonstrate a greater degree of autonomic hyperactivity than women.8

Symptoms usually arise in the alcoholic patient between the third and fifth days of abstinence but have been known to occur several weeks after a patient’s last drink. Symptoms usually resolve within a few days9 but have been known to resolve within hours in some patients and to persist for several months in others.10

Differential diagnosis. Clinicians often fail to differentiate alcohol hallucinosis from DTs. Alcohol hallucinosis—which occurs in 3 to 10% of patients with severe alcohol withdrawal11 —manifests as auditory, visual, or tactile hallucinations with a clear sensorium. Patients experiencing DTs also may experience hallucinations but with confusion, disorientation, and severe autonomic hyperactivity. Unlike DTs, alcohol hallucinosis is not fatal.9

DTs also should be differentiated from:

  • other causes of delirium, such as medication or infection. If the cause is identified and removed, the delirium should gradually resolve.
  • Wernicke’s encephalopathy—caused by glucose exposure in the thiamine-deficient alcoholic—which is characterized by confusion, ophthalmoplegia, and ataxia.

Completing a thorough history and physical exam, talking to family members, and reviewing past medical charts are often the best ways to differentiate DTs from other conditions.

What causes DTs?

Vitamin deficiencies were initially thought to cause alcohol withdrawal.3 More recent evidence points toward multiple neuroadaptive changes in the brain associated with chronic alcohol exposure.12 Although numerous neurotransmitter systems may play a role in alcohol withdrawal, recent research has focused on glutamate13 and gamma-aminobutyric acid (GABA).14

Box

DTs: MORTALITY RATE AS HIGH AS 15%

Approximately 1.5 to 2 million Americans seek treatment for alcohol abuse or dependence each year.1 As many as 71% of these patients manifest symptoms of alcohol withdrawal.2 Of those individuals who experience alcohol withdrawal, delirium tremens (DTs) may occur in up to 5%.3-5 Utilizing these percentages, it can be estimated that as many as 50,000 to 70,000 individuals develop DTs each year in the United States alone.

Although the incidence of DTs can be assumed to be relatively low, the condition should be considered a medical emergency. Studies list mortality rates for DTs as high as 15% and as low as 2 to 3%.7,8

The brain seems to compensate for alcohol’s enhancement of GABA (inhibitory) neurons by up-regulating excitatory neurons (glutamate). Alcohol has been shown to have some effects on neurons.15 The implication is that withdrawing alcohol triggers an “excitatory state” until the brain can readjust the fine balance between excitation and inhibition, a process that takes weeks to months. Some changes may never reverse because of the neurotoxic effects of alcohol and alcohol withdrawal.

Repeated alcohol exposure and withdrawal may lead to neuroadaptive changes in the brain and to more severe withdrawal symptoms, such as DTs. Repeated alcohol withdrawal episodes can produce a kindling effect. As outlined by Becker, kindling occurs “when a weak electrical or chemical stimulus, which initially causes no overt behavioral responses, results in the appearance of behavioral effects, such as seizures, when it is administered repeatedly.”16 Thus, repeated alcohol withdrawal worsens future episodes and eventually leads to alcohol withdrawal seizures.

Whereas most of these theories apply to alcohol withdrawal, they are also compatible with the neuronal mechanisms that may underlie DTs. Alcohol withdrawal and DTs share the presence of a “hyperactive state.” Most likely, DTs is the progression to more severe or pronounced neuroadaptive changes seen in mild to moderate alcohol withdrawal. One could certainly imagine that the possible neurotoxic effects of alcohol, alcohol withdrawal, and repeated detoxifications could sensitize the CNS to the more severe symptoms seen in DTs. Infection and metabolic abnormalities may also enhance the progression. Unfortunately, why some but not all patients experiencing alcohol withdrawal progress to DTs is unknown.

 

 

Table 1

RISK FACTORS FOR DELIRIUM TREMENS

Comorbid medical illness (with electrolyte, fluid abnormalities)*
History of delirium tremens*
Blood alcohol level >300 mg/dL on presentation*
Presentation after an alcohol withdrawal seizure*
Older age*
Longer history of alcohol dependence
Intense alcohol craving
Abnormal liver function
* Supported with studies and/or in the medical literature
Source: Saitz R. Introduction to alcohol withdrawal. Alcohol Health Res World 1998;22(1):5-12.

Table 2

STRATEGIES TO PREVENT AND TREAT DELIRIUM TREMENS

Assess risk for DTs with a thorough history, including collaborative family information and medical charts
Admit patients with a history of serious withdrawal symptoms or potential for inpatient detoxification (based on degree of tolerance)
Check complete lab values (chemistry panel, liver function tests including ALT and AST, complete blood count, blood alcohol level, GGT, and others if relevant), and correct any fluid, vitamin, or electrolyte abnormalities
Treat comorbid medical conditions
Differentiate DTs from alcohol hallucinosis, other causes of delirium, and Wernicke’s encephalopathy
Consider giving benzodiazepines along with low-dose neuroleptics, if appropriate, and monitor for disinhibition/ confusion and extrapyramidal symptoms, respectively
Place the patient in a low-stimulation environment with frequent monitoring

Predisposing risk factors

Past withdrawal complicated by seizures or DTs is the single best predictor of future alcohol withdrawal symptoms.17 Also consider the following patients to be at elevated risk:

  • any individual who presents with a blood alcohol level >300 mg/dl or after experiencing a withdrawal seizure9
  • patients with comorbid medical conditions, such as electrolyte abnormalities, infection, or poorly treated cardiovascular or respiratory diseases
  • older persons, who tend to be susceptible to delirium associated with hospitalization, medical illnesses such as urinary tract infections or pneumonia, or use of certain medications.18

Potential risk factors for developing DTs are summarized in Table 1.1 Although few studies have been done, clinicians can use these factors as a guide for aggressively preventing DTs in at-risk patients.

Managing and preventing DTs

Management. Drug therapy is considered crucial to quell withdrawal symptoms and reduce the risk of death.19 Patients usually are treated with one of several benzodiazepines (such as chlordiazepoxide, diazepam, oxazepam, or lorazepam) to decrease autonomic instability and reduce seizure risk during acute alcohol withdrawal. Although dosages of these medications are estimated based on drinking history, some general starting ranges are often used in clinical practice:

  • chlordiazepoxide, 50 to 100 mg tid
  • lorazepam, 1 to 2 mg every 4 hours
  • oxazepam, 15 to 30 mg qid
  • diazepam, 10 to 20 mg tid/qid.

Treating DTs often requires the use of IV benzodiazepines because of their quick onset of action and benefit for acutely agitated patients who have difficulty taking medications by mouth.

Prevention. Correcting fluid and electrolyte abnormalities may be critical in preventing DTs (Table 2). In one study of patients who died while experiencing DTs, only 25% received adequate fluid replacement, which can be as much as 6 liters per day.20 Ideally, comorbid conditions should be addressed early in presentation and before DTs develop.21

High-dose benzodiazepine therapy does not completely protect a patient from DTs or reduce its duration,22 but it may reduce mortality. A meta-analysis of prospective, placebocontrolled trials reported a risk reduction of 4.9 cases of DTs per 100 patients treated with benzodiazepines. Mortality also seems to have been reduced in patients with DTs who were treated with sedative hypnotics.9 Benzodiazepines may cause increased confusion and disinhibition, as is frequently seen when patients with dementia are treated with these agents.23

Neuroleptics such as haloperidol have been used to prevent and treat DTs, but studies of their ability to reduce mortality have produced inconsistent results. What’s more, neuroleptics can reduce the seizure threshold and produce extrapyramidal symptoms.23 Atypical antipsychotics may offer a safer alternative, although more studies are needed to evaluate whether they decrease the occurrence and severity of DTs.

In summary, a rational approach to preventing and treating DTs is to:

  • manage comorbid medical illnesses, and correct fluid and electrolyte abnormalities
  • place the patient in a safe, low-stimulation environment with frequent monitoring
  • use benzodiazepines judiciously.

Related resources

  • National Institute on Alcohol Abuse and Alcoholism.
  • www.niaaa.nih.gov
  • 1995;30(6):765-70 (a thorough review of benzodiazepine use in alcohol withdrawal).

Drug brand names

  • Chlordiazepoxide • Librium
  • Diazepam • Valium
  • Haloperidol • Haldol
  • Lorazepam • Ativan
  • Oxazepam • Serax

Disclosure

The authors report no financial relationship with any company whose products are mentioned in this article, or with manufacturers of competing products.

References

1. Saitz R. Introduction to alcohol withdrawal. Alcohol Health Res World 1998;22(1):5-12.

2. Saitz R, Redmond MS, Mayo-Smith MF, et al. Individualized treatment for alcohol withdrawal. Randomized, double-blind, controlled trial. JAMA 1994;272:519-23.

3. Victor M, Adams RD. The effect of alcoholism on the nervous system. Research Publication of the Association for Research on Nervous and Mental Disorders 1953;32:526-73.

4. Victor M, Braush C. The role of abstinence in the genesis of alcoholic epilepsy. Epilepsia 1967;8:1-20.

5. Sellars EM, Kalant H. Alcohol intoxication and withdrawal. N Engl J Med 1976;294:757-62.

6. Victor M. Treatment of alcoholic intoxication and the withdrawal syndrome. Psychosomat Med 1966;28:636-50.

7. Guthrie S. The treatment of alcohol withdrawal. Pharmacotherapy 1989;9:131-43.

8. Trevisan LA, Boutrous N, Petrakis I, Krystal JH. Complications of alcohol withdrawal. Alcohol World 1998;22(1):61-66.

9. Mayo-Smith MF. Management of alcohol intoxication, overdose, and withdrawal. In: Graham AW, Schultz TK (eds). Principles of addiction medicine (2nd ed). Chevy Chase, MD: American Society of Addiction Medicine, 1998;434-41.

10. Wolf KM, Shaughnessy AF, Middleton DB. Prolonged delirium tremens requiring massive doses of medication. J Am Board Fam Pract 1993;6:502-4.

11. Platz WE, Oberlaender FA, Seidel ML. The phenomenology of perceptual hallucinations in alcohol-induced delirium tremens. Psychopathology 1995;28:247-55.

12. Littleton J. Neurochemical mechanisms underlying alcohol withdrawal. Alcohol Health Res World 1998;22(1):13-24.

13. Hoffman PL, Rabe CS, Grant KA, Valverius P, Hudspith M, Tabakoff B. Ethanol and the NMDA receptor. Alcohol 1990;7(3):229-31.

14. Morrow AL, Montpied P, Lingford-Hughes A, Paul SM. Chronic ethanol and pentobarbital administration in the rat: effects on GABAA receptor function and expression in brain. Alcohol 1990;7(3):237-44.

15. Begleiter H Kissin B (eds) The pharmacology of alcohol and alcohol dependence. New York: Oxford University Press, 1996.

16. Becker HC. Kindling in alcohol withdrawal. Alcohol World 1998;22(1):25-33.

17. Gold M, Miller N. Management of withdrawal syndromes and relapse prevention in drug and alcohol dependence. Am Fam Phys 1998;58:139-46.

18. Kraemer K, Mayo-Smith MF, Calkins R. Pharmacological management of alcohol withdrawal: a meta analysis of evidence-based practical guidelines. JAMA 1997;278:144-51.

19. Shaw GK. Detoxification: the use of benzodiazepines. Alcohol Alcohol 1995;30(6):765-70.

20. Victor M. Diagnosis and treatment of alcohol withdrawal states. Pract Gastroenteritis 1983;7(5):6-15.

21. Myrick H, Anton R. Treatment of alcohol withdrawal. Alcohol Health Res World 1998;22(1):38-43.

22. Hersh D, Kranzler HR, Meyer RE. Persistent delirium following cessation of heavy alcohol consumption: diagnostic and treatment implications. Am J Psychiatry 1997;154(6):846-51.

23. Myrick H, Anton R. Clinical management of alcohol withdrawal. CNS Spectrums 2000;5(2):22-32.

References

1. Saitz R. Introduction to alcohol withdrawal. Alcohol Health Res World 1998;22(1):5-12.

2. Saitz R, Redmond MS, Mayo-Smith MF, et al. Individualized treatment for alcohol withdrawal. Randomized, double-blind, controlled trial. JAMA 1994;272:519-23.

3. Victor M, Adams RD. The effect of alcoholism on the nervous system. Research Publication of the Association for Research on Nervous and Mental Disorders 1953;32:526-73.

4. Victor M, Braush C. The role of abstinence in the genesis of alcoholic epilepsy. Epilepsia 1967;8:1-20.

5. Sellars EM, Kalant H. Alcohol intoxication and withdrawal. N Engl J Med 1976;294:757-62.

6. Victor M. Treatment of alcoholic intoxication and the withdrawal syndrome. Psychosomat Med 1966;28:636-50.

7. Guthrie S. The treatment of alcohol withdrawal. Pharmacotherapy 1989;9:131-43.

8. Trevisan LA, Boutrous N, Petrakis I, Krystal JH. Complications of alcohol withdrawal. Alcohol World 1998;22(1):61-66.

9. Mayo-Smith MF. Management of alcohol intoxication, overdose, and withdrawal. In: Graham AW, Schultz TK (eds). Principles of addiction medicine (2nd ed). Chevy Chase, MD: American Society of Addiction Medicine, 1998;434-41.

10. Wolf KM, Shaughnessy AF, Middleton DB. Prolonged delirium tremens requiring massive doses of medication. J Am Board Fam Pract 1993;6:502-4.

11. Platz WE, Oberlaender FA, Seidel ML. The phenomenology of perceptual hallucinations in alcohol-induced delirium tremens. Psychopathology 1995;28:247-55.

12. Littleton J. Neurochemical mechanisms underlying alcohol withdrawal. Alcohol Health Res World 1998;22(1):13-24.

13. Hoffman PL, Rabe CS, Grant KA, Valverius P, Hudspith M, Tabakoff B. Ethanol and the NMDA receptor. Alcohol 1990;7(3):229-31.

14. Morrow AL, Montpied P, Lingford-Hughes A, Paul SM. Chronic ethanol and pentobarbital administration in the rat: effects on GABAA receptor function and expression in brain. Alcohol 1990;7(3):237-44.

15. Begleiter H Kissin B (eds) The pharmacology of alcohol and alcohol dependence. New York: Oxford University Press, 1996.

16. Becker HC. Kindling in alcohol withdrawal. Alcohol World 1998;22(1):25-33.

17. Gold M, Miller N. Management of withdrawal syndromes and relapse prevention in drug and alcohol dependence. Am Fam Phys 1998;58:139-46.

18. Kraemer K, Mayo-Smith MF, Calkins R. Pharmacological management of alcohol withdrawal: a meta analysis of evidence-based practical guidelines. JAMA 1997;278:144-51.

19. Shaw GK. Detoxification: the use of benzodiazepines. Alcohol Alcohol 1995;30(6):765-70.

20. Victor M. Diagnosis and treatment of alcohol withdrawal states. Pract Gastroenteritis 1983;7(5):6-15.

21. Myrick H, Anton R. Treatment of alcohol withdrawal. Alcohol Health Res World 1998;22(1):38-43.

22. Hersh D, Kranzler HR, Meyer RE. Persistent delirium following cessation of heavy alcohol consumption: diagnostic and treatment implications. Am J Psychiatry 1997;154(6):846-51.

23. Myrick H, Anton R. Clinical management of alcohol withdrawal. CNS Spectrums 2000;5(2):22-32.

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(01)
Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(01)
Page Number
14-19
Page Number
14-19
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Who’s at greatest risk for delirium tremens
Display Headline
Who’s at greatest risk for delirium tremens
Sections
Article Source

PURLs Copyright

Inside the Article

Article PDF Media

Web logs: ‘Blogging’ into the future

Article Type
Changed
Tue, 12/11/2018 - 15:12
Display Headline
Web logs: ‘Blogging’ into the future

Persons who regularly record their thoughts are increasingly reaching for a mouse instead of a pen and paper.

Web logs, or “blogs,” are public online diaries that represent an emerging trend in self-expression and networking. Blogs cover everything from health care and current events to finding Mr. or Ms. Right, and the medium could become a powerful communication tool for mental health professionals and their patients as it becomes more mainstream.

Blogs are similar to personal home pages and newsletters, except that the content is updated more frequently-daily in many cases-and usually focuses on a single topic. The blog of Alex Chernavsky, a critic of psychiatry and the pharmaceutical industry, is one example.1

The medium has emerged as part of the consumer empowerment trend that has characterized the Internet age, and is borne of a philosophy that embraces the exchange of information in cyberspace. Blogs have been employed most extensively in the news industry, where columnists use them to extend their communication with readers.2 More companies today use blog software to collaborate on product development and post updates on market conditions, among other uses. Even the CIA is using Traction Software, an enterprise-based blog software package.3

Blogs are a hybrid form of communication, combining elements of individual and group psychotherapy with a public journal. Blogs not only are an outlet for the writer’s thoughts and feelings, but also provide a forum for ongoing discussion.

For example, one person with schizophrenia and bipolar disorder posts a blog at www.h13.com. Reading his poetry and reflections on his illness is bound to change one’s perspective on how a patient perceives his or her mental illness. The comments by visitors who provide support, find a shared experience, or describe their triumphs and setbacks are equally revealing.

In another blog (www.crazytracy.com), a registered nurse at a psychiatric hospital vents about her experiences in life and at work. Her outrageous rants and raves appear to have attracted a cult following.

A ‘blogring’- a group of blogs identified by a central theme, such as ‘depression’ or ‘self-loathing’-can also promote a sense of belonging for the user. When signing up for the ring, a specialized code on the user’s site will identify the viewer as belonging to that blogring and allow him or her to visit other blogs within the ring. Users select blogrings, visit each other’s blogs, and post comments,4 thus creating a community of support through Internet connectivity.

Many blogs also include specific links to the online diaries of friends or to other blogs or Web sites of interest. Technology such as blogLinker (www.bloglinker.com), myMediaList (www.mymedialist.com), and Blogrolling (www.blogrolling.com) facilitate this process.

Creating a blog once required knowledge of hypertext markup language (HTML), the code commonly used to create a Web page. Now, however, anyone with Netscape, Internet Explorer, or another Web browser can devise a blog using such services as Blog*Spot (www.blogspot.com), Xanga (www.xanga.com), or LiveJournal (www.livejournal.com).

Blog*Spot, Xanga, and CrimsonBlog (www.crimsonblog.com) provide free blog service, but may place ads on your site at their discretion. For users willing to pay for premium service, the ads are removed and additional features are available. The Developer’s Corner (http://fahim.razorsys.com/Blog.htm) is suitable for users who want to use their own site but need software.

Blogs in psychiatry

Blogs can be useful for patients who keep a journal. The patient and therapist can review an online diary and more quickly address issues outside of regular sessions. Postings can also be followed across a historical timeline-a function that e-mail does not offer. What’s more, each user can review comments from other viewers and post responses. For the patient who misses a group session, blogs can help him or her catch up on the current discussion.

Psychiatrists can also use blogs to exchange information with other members of a patient’s multidisciplinary care team. Such communication often is impeded, especially in hospitals that lack an electronic medical records system or do not have the central chart readily available. A blog on the hospital’s Intranet, however, can bridge the communication gap by providing links to articles and reports.

But use of blogs in psychiatry has its drawbacks, with potential lack of privacy the most obvious among them. Most blog software offers password protection, however: Either the entire site is blocked from public access or specific messages can be hidden.

Further, although blogs can be a useful adjunct to therapy, they are not a replacement. For fmany patients, the social interaction and non-verbal cues associated with traditional psychotherapy are crucial to treatment. Blogs may also frustrate therapy by allowing a patient to avoid direct ‘confrontation’ in an interpersonal setting.

 

 

If you have any questions about blogs or comments about Psyber Psychiatry, click here to contact Dr. Luo or send an e-mail to [email protected].

Related Resources

Disclosure:

Dr. Luo reports no financial relationship with any company whose products are mentioned in this article. The opinions expressed by Dr. Luo in this column are his own and do not necessarily reflect those of Current Psychiatry.

References

1. Alex Chernavsky’s Blog. Available at: http://www.astrocyte-design.com/blog/. Accessed Dec. 12, 2002.

2. Cohn M. Blogged down at the workplace. Internet World Dec. 1, 2002. Available at: http://www.internetworld.com/magazine.php?inc=120102/12.01.02upscope.html. Accessed Dec. 16, 2002.

3. Traction Software. Available at: http://www.tractionsoftware.com. Accessed Dec. 16, 2002.

4. Xanga Blogrings. Available at: http://www.xanga.com/blogrings/. Accessed Dec. 16, 2002.

Author and Disclosure Information

John Luo, MD
Assistant clinical professor and director of psychiatric informatics Department of psychiatry University of California, Davis

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(01)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
1-1
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

John Luo, MD
Assistant clinical professor and director of psychiatric informatics Department of psychiatry University of California, Davis

Author and Disclosure Information

John Luo, MD
Assistant clinical professor and director of psychiatric informatics Department of psychiatry University of California, Davis

Persons who regularly record their thoughts are increasingly reaching for a mouse instead of a pen and paper.

Web logs, or “blogs,” are public online diaries that represent an emerging trend in self-expression and networking. Blogs cover everything from health care and current events to finding Mr. or Ms. Right, and the medium could become a powerful communication tool for mental health professionals and their patients as it becomes more mainstream.

Blogs are similar to personal home pages and newsletters, except that the content is updated more frequently-daily in many cases-and usually focuses on a single topic. The blog of Alex Chernavsky, a critic of psychiatry and the pharmaceutical industry, is one example.1

The medium has emerged as part of the consumer empowerment trend that has characterized the Internet age, and is borne of a philosophy that embraces the exchange of information in cyberspace. Blogs have been employed most extensively in the news industry, where columnists use them to extend their communication with readers.2 More companies today use blog software to collaborate on product development and post updates on market conditions, among other uses. Even the CIA is using Traction Software, an enterprise-based blog software package.3

Blogs are a hybrid form of communication, combining elements of individual and group psychotherapy with a public journal. Blogs not only are an outlet for the writer’s thoughts and feelings, but also provide a forum for ongoing discussion.

For example, one person with schizophrenia and bipolar disorder posts a blog at www.h13.com. Reading his poetry and reflections on his illness is bound to change one’s perspective on how a patient perceives his or her mental illness. The comments by visitors who provide support, find a shared experience, or describe their triumphs and setbacks are equally revealing.

In another blog (www.crazytracy.com), a registered nurse at a psychiatric hospital vents about her experiences in life and at work. Her outrageous rants and raves appear to have attracted a cult following.

A ‘blogring’- a group of blogs identified by a central theme, such as ‘depression’ or ‘self-loathing’-can also promote a sense of belonging for the user. When signing up for the ring, a specialized code on the user’s site will identify the viewer as belonging to that blogring and allow him or her to visit other blogs within the ring. Users select blogrings, visit each other’s blogs, and post comments,4 thus creating a community of support through Internet connectivity.

Many blogs also include specific links to the online diaries of friends or to other blogs or Web sites of interest. Technology such as blogLinker (www.bloglinker.com), myMediaList (www.mymedialist.com), and Blogrolling (www.blogrolling.com) facilitate this process.

Creating a blog once required knowledge of hypertext markup language (HTML), the code commonly used to create a Web page. Now, however, anyone with Netscape, Internet Explorer, or another Web browser can devise a blog using such services as Blog*Spot (www.blogspot.com), Xanga (www.xanga.com), or LiveJournal (www.livejournal.com).

Blog*Spot, Xanga, and CrimsonBlog (www.crimsonblog.com) provide free blog service, but may place ads on your site at their discretion. For users willing to pay for premium service, the ads are removed and additional features are available. The Developer’s Corner (http://fahim.razorsys.com/Blog.htm) is suitable for users who want to use their own site but need software.

Blogs in psychiatry

Blogs can be useful for patients who keep a journal. The patient and therapist can review an online diary and more quickly address issues outside of regular sessions. Postings can also be followed across a historical timeline-a function that e-mail does not offer. What’s more, each user can review comments from other viewers and post responses. For the patient who misses a group session, blogs can help him or her catch up on the current discussion.

Psychiatrists can also use blogs to exchange information with other members of a patient’s multidisciplinary care team. Such communication often is impeded, especially in hospitals that lack an electronic medical records system or do not have the central chart readily available. A blog on the hospital’s Intranet, however, can bridge the communication gap by providing links to articles and reports.

But use of blogs in psychiatry has its drawbacks, with potential lack of privacy the most obvious among them. Most blog software offers password protection, however: Either the entire site is blocked from public access or specific messages can be hidden.

Further, although blogs can be a useful adjunct to therapy, they are not a replacement. For fmany patients, the social interaction and non-verbal cues associated with traditional psychotherapy are crucial to treatment. Blogs may also frustrate therapy by allowing a patient to avoid direct ‘confrontation’ in an interpersonal setting.

 

 

If you have any questions about blogs or comments about Psyber Psychiatry, click here to contact Dr. Luo or send an e-mail to [email protected].

Related Resources

Disclosure:

Dr. Luo reports no financial relationship with any company whose products are mentioned in this article. The opinions expressed by Dr. Luo in this column are his own and do not necessarily reflect those of Current Psychiatry.

Persons who regularly record their thoughts are increasingly reaching for a mouse instead of a pen and paper.

Web logs, or “blogs,” are public online diaries that represent an emerging trend in self-expression and networking. Blogs cover everything from health care and current events to finding Mr. or Ms. Right, and the medium could become a powerful communication tool for mental health professionals and their patients as it becomes more mainstream.

Blogs are similar to personal home pages and newsletters, except that the content is updated more frequently-daily in many cases-and usually focuses on a single topic. The blog of Alex Chernavsky, a critic of psychiatry and the pharmaceutical industry, is one example.1

The medium has emerged as part of the consumer empowerment trend that has characterized the Internet age, and is borne of a philosophy that embraces the exchange of information in cyberspace. Blogs have been employed most extensively in the news industry, where columnists use them to extend their communication with readers.2 More companies today use blog software to collaborate on product development and post updates on market conditions, among other uses. Even the CIA is using Traction Software, an enterprise-based blog software package.3

Blogs are a hybrid form of communication, combining elements of individual and group psychotherapy with a public journal. Blogs not only are an outlet for the writer’s thoughts and feelings, but also provide a forum for ongoing discussion.

For example, one person with schizophrenia and bipolar disorder posts a blog at www.h13.com. Reading his poetry and reflections on his illness is bound to change one’s perspective on how a patient perceives his or her mental illness. The comments by visitors who provide support, find a shared experience, or describe their triumphs and setbacks are equally revealing.

In another blog (www.crazytracy.com), a registered nurse at a psychiatric hospital vents about her experiences in life and at work. Her outrageous rants and raves appear to have attracted a cult following.

A ‘blogring’- a group of blogs identified by a central theme, such as ‘depression’ or ‘self-loathing’-can also promote a sense of belonging for the user. When signing up for the ring, a specialized code on the user’s site will identify the viewer as belonging to that blogring and allow him or her to visit other blogs within the ring. Users select blogrings, visit each other’s blogs, and post comments,4 thus creating a community of support through Internet connectivity.

Many blogs also include specific links to the online diaries of friends or to other blogs or Web sites of interest. Technology such as blogLinker (www.bloglinker.com), myMediaList (www.mymedialist.com), and Blogrolling (www.blogrolling.com) facilitate this process.

Creating a blog once required knowledge of hypertext markup language (HTML), the code commonly used to create a Web page. Now, however, anyone with Netscape, Internet Explorer, or another Web browser can devise a blog using such services as Blog*Spot (www.blogspot.com), Xanga (www.xanga.com), or LiveJournal (www.livejournal.com).

Blog*Spot, Xanga, and CrimsonBlog (www.crimsonblog.com) provide free blog service, but may place ads on your site at their discretion. For users willing to pay for premium service, the ads are removed and additional features are available. The Developer’s Corner (http://fahim.razorsys.com/Blog.htm) is suitable for users who want to use their own site but need software.

Blogs in psychiatry

Blogs can be useful for patients who keep a journal. The patient and therapist can review an online diary and more quickly address issues outside of regular sessions. Postings can also be followed across a historical timeline-a function that e-mail does not offer. What’s more, each user can review comments from other viewers and post responses. For the patient who misses a group session, blogs can help him or her catch up on the current discussion.

Psychiatrists can also use blogs to exchange information with other members of a patient’s multidisciplinary care team. Such communication often is impeded, especially in hospitals that lack an electronic medical records system or do not have the central chart readily available. A blog on the hospital’s Intranet, however, can bridge the communication gap by providing links to articles and reports.

But use of blogs in psychiatry has its drawbacks, with potential lack of privacy the most obvious among them. Most blog software offers password protection, however: Either the entire site is blocked from public access or specific messages can be hidden.

Further, although blogs can be a useful adjunct to therapy, they are not a replacement. For fmany patients, the social interaction and non-verbal cues associated with traditional psychotherapy are crucial to treatment. Blogs may also frustrate therapy by allowing a patient to avoid direct ‘confrontation’ in an interpersonal setting.

 

 

If you have any questions about blogs or comments about Psyber Psychiatry, click here to contact Dr. Luo or send an e-mail to [email protected].

Related Resources

Disclosure:

Dr. Luo reports no financial relationship with any company whose products are mentioned in this article. The opinions expressed by Dr. Luo in this column are his own and do not necessarily reflect those of Current Psychiatry.

References

1. Alex Chernavsky’s Blog. Available at: http://www.astrocyte-design.com/blog/. Accessed Dec. 12, 2002.

2. Cohn M. Blogged down at the workplace. Internet World Dec. 1, 2002. Available at: http://www.internetworld.com/magazine.php?inc=120102/12.01.02upscope.html. Accessed Dec. 16, 2002.

3. Traction Software. Available at: http://www.tractionsoftware.com. Accessed Dec. 16, 2002.

4. Xanga Blogrings. Available at: http://www.xanga.com/blogrings/. Accessed Dec. 16, 2002.

References

1. Alex Chernavsky’s Blog. Available at: http://www.astrocyte-design.com/blog/. Accessed Dec. 12, 2002.

2. Cohn M. Blogged down at the workplace. Internet World Dec. 1, 2002. Available at: http://www.internetworld.com/magazine.php?inc=120102/12.01.02upscope.html. Accessed Dec. 16, 2002.

3. Traction Software. Available at: http://www.tractionsoftware.com. Accessed Dec. 16, 2002.

4. Xanga Blogrings. Available at: http://www.xanga.com/blogrings/. Accessed Dec. 16, 2002.

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(01)
Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(01)
Page Number
1-1
Page Number
1-1
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Web logs: ‘Blogging’ into the future
Display Headline
Web logs: ‘Blogging’ into the future
Sections
Article Source

PURLs Copyright

Inside the Article

Seasonal affective disorder: How to help patients beat the winter blues

Article Type
Changed
Tue, 12/11/2018 - 15:12
Display Headline
Seasonal affective disorder: How to help patients beat the winter blues

All of us see patients whose recurrent depressions seem to have a seasonal component. Should we treat them differently than patients whose recurrent depressions are not related to seasons? Is there adequate evidence for the existence of seasonal affective disorder (SAD), or—as it is called in DSM-IV-TR—mood disorder with a seasonal pattern? Is bright light therapy supported by the literature, or is it just some sort of fad?

As December brings the shortest days of the year, we shine the spotlight on SAD and examine the latest evidence on its causes, diagnosis, and treatment.

Moods with a seasonal rhythm

Moods have been observed to change with the seasons since ancient times (Box 1).1 As recently as 25 years ago, however, seasonal affective disorder was not recognized as a psychiatric diagnosis.

In the early 1980s, when researchers at the National Institute of Mental Health (NIMH) were studying the effect of bright light on melatonin secretion, they were contacted by Herbert E. Kern, a research engineer who suffered from recurrent depression. A methodical person, Kern had kept a journal of his mood variations and noticed a pattern that appeared to follow the seasons. His depression worsened in the fall and winter and improved in the spring and summer. Kern subsequently participated in an NIMH trial with phototherapy, his mood improved, and the results were published in 1982.2

Box 1

‘LAPP SICKNESS’ AND THE EFFECT OF LIGHT ON MOOD

Hippocrates, with his knack for keen observation, observed the variation of moods with the seasons. Aretaeus went a step further in the 2nd century by proposing that “lethargics are to be laid in the light and exposed to the rays of the sun.”

More recently, the physicist Angstrom—for whom the unit of light wavelength is named—was one of the first to mention the Swedish word “Lappsjuka,” which means “Lapp sickness” (Lapp refers to Scandinavian aborigines). He wrote, “Many people are sensitive to the lack of light, while others are less so. The former will in arctic winters suffer from Lappsjuka.”1

Two years later, the researchers published the first paper that described SAD as a psychiatric diagnosis.3 Criteria for the diagnosis included:

  • presence of a major affective disorder
  • affective episodes occurring during fall or winter and remitting in spring or summer for at least 2 consecutive years.

The paper also discussed treatment of winter depression with phototherapy.

DSM-IV-TR describes SAD as a course specifier for mood disorders, including major depressive episodes in bipolar I and II disorders and major depressive disorder (Box 2). In other words, as used in DSM-IV-TR and this article, SAD is not an independent disorder but a type of major affective disorder.

Characteristics of SAD

Symptoms. Patients with SAD suffer the typical symptoms of depression—decreased energy, guilt, and decreased libido—as well as atypical symptoms—carbohydrate craving, hypersomnia, and weight gain. They also appear less likely to exhibit psychotic symptoms and may be at lower risk for suicide than persons with major mood disorders but without SAD.1

Changes in sleep patterns also have been observed. Rosenthal et al4 found increased sleep latency and increased total sleep time in patients with SAD. Delta or slow-wave sleep—the restorative part of the sleep cycle—decreased by nearly one-half (mean 46%). REM latency did not change, contrary to typical findings in depressed patients. Anderson et al5 also reported no change in REM latency in patients with SAD.

Comorbid conditions. Eating disorders—particularly bulimia nervosa—are more prevalent in patients with SAD.1 Binge eating tends to worsen in the fall and winter.

Personality disorders are also common in these patients, with cluster C over-represented. Avoidant personality disorder is most common. In a sample of 45 patients with SAD, Reichborn-Kjennerud et al6 found any personality disorder in 58% and avoidant personality disorder in 31%. Patients with comorbid personality disorders were less likely to respond to bright light therapy.

Prevalence. The prevalence of SAD in North America is approximately 1 to 6 %, with four times as many women affected as men.1 Data on the effect of latitude on prevalence of SAD are inconclusive.7

Making the diagnosis

For patients with depression, clinicians should ask about seasonality of symptoms. Onset of major depressive symptoms in the fall or winter for at least two consecutive years or remission of depressive symptoms in the spring for two consecutive years (without onset of depressive syndromes during the spring or summer) probably merits a diagnosis of SAD. The diagnosis is confirmed if seasonal patterns of depressive symptoms substantially outnumber nonseasonal occurrences over the patient’s lifetime. The diagnosis may not be appropriate if there are obvious seasonal psychosocial stressors, such as anniversary reactions in posttraumatic stress disorder.

 

 

Some patients have sub-syndromal depressive symptoms that occur seasonally. DSM-IV would probably classify them as “mood disorder, not otherwise specified,” and that group has not been studied extensively.

Box 2

DSM-IV-TR: SEASONAL PATTERN SPECIFIER FOR MOOD DISORDER

Specify if:

With seasonal pattern (can be applied to the pattern of major depressive episodes in bipolar I disorder, bipolar II disorder, or major depressive disorder, recurrent)

  1. There has been a regular temporal relationship between the onset of major depressive episodes in bipolar I or bipolar II disorder or major depressive disorder, recurrent, and a particular time of the year (e.g., regular appearance of the major depressive episode in the fall or winter). Note: Do not include cases in which seasonal-related psychosocial stressors (e.g., regularly being unemployed every winter) create an obvious effect.
  2. Full remissions (or a change from depression to mania or hypomania) also occur at a characteristic time of the year (e.g., depression disappears in the spring).
  3. In the past 2 years, two major depressive episodes have occurred that demonstrate the temporal seasonal relationships defined in criteria A and B, and no nonseasonal major depressive episodes have occurred during that same period.
  4. Seasonal major depressive episodes (as described above) substantially outnumber the nonseasonal major depressive episodes that may have occurred over the individual’s lifetime.

Source: DSM-IV-TR

What causes SAD?

Research is ongoing, but the cause of SAD is not yet fully understood, although hypotheses have been developed. The four main hypotheses relate to duration of sunlight, changes in the circadian cycle, and secretion of the “hormone of darkness,” melatonin.

Photoperiod hypothesis. The shortening of the photoperiod—duration of sunlight—during autumn and winter may explain winter depression. Some research suggests that patients with SAD have an exaggerated melatonin response to shorter days and longer nights. For example, Wehr et al8 found that SAD patients secrete melatonin approximately 30 minutes longer per day in the winter, compared with controls.

Phase-delay hypothesis. Core body temperature is considered one of the most reliable markers of circadian rhythm. The nadir core body temperature occurs earlier than normal in a person whose circadian rhythm is “phase-advanced” and later than usual in those with “phase-delayed” circadian rhythms. Patients with seasonal affective symptoms generally reach their lowest body temperature of the day earlier than do controls.

Lewy et al,9 who proposed the phase-delay hypothesis, observed that melatonin secretion appeared to be delayed in patients with SAD. Some studies have supported this hypothesis, demonstrating greater benefit of bright light treatment when administered early in the morning than later in the day. Other studies, however, have shown benefit from light exposure late in the day.10

Reduced-amplitude hypothesis. SAD sufferers have dampened circadian rhythms, and bright light may increase the amplitude of the rhythms. There is little evidence for this hypothesis.

Melatonin hypothesis. Melatonin does not appear to cause depression. Looking at melatonin secretion patterns in conjunction with circadian phases, however, may offer new insights.8 Several studies have shown that manipulating the timing of melatonin secretion affects mood.

Cryptochrome, a photoreceptor in the retina, may be responsible for transmitting the photosignal to the elements of the circadian clock that regulate melatonin secretion. The pineal gland modifies its secretion of melatonin in response to the amount of light exposure (Box 3).8,11

Light therapy

Bright light therapy has been supported by placebo-controlled trials and is first-line treatment for patients with SAD.1 Bright light therapy is usually dosed at 2,500 lux for 2 hr/day or 10,000 lux for 30 min/day at eye level.12 The best evidence supports administering light therapy in the morning, generally between 6 and 10 AM. As described by Terman,13 “larks”—people who go to bed early and get up early—need earlier light than “owls”—people who stay up later and sleep later.

Box 3

HOW SUNLIGHT MAY SET THE CIRCADIAN CLOCK

When light strikes the eye, it is well known that vitamin A-based photo pigments, cones, and rods receive the signal and transmit it via the optic tracts to the occipital cortex. But if light plays a role in the pathophysiology of seasonal affective disorder, how does light signal the other elements of the circadian system?

Cryptochrome, a photoreceptor in the retina, may be responsible for transmitting the photosignal to the circadian clock.11 Cryptochrome is a vitamin B2-based pigment found in the ganglion cells and on cells in the inner nuclear layer of the retina. It is thought to transmit light through the optic nerve to the suprachiasmatic nucleus, the circadian pacemaker in the hypothalamus. The signal is then transmitted through the paraventricular nucleus, down the sympathetic chain, through the superior cervical ganglion, up the nervi canarii, to its final destination—the pineal gland.8 The pineal gland then modifies its secretion of melatonin in response to the amount of light exposure.

Although mammals have an intrinsic rhythmicity, the circadian clock must be entrained by exogenous light. The retinohypothalamic tract is believed to be the vehicle that sets the circadian clock. If the optic nerve is cut, a person becomes blind and unable to entrain the circadian rhythm.

 

 

Light therapy can be used alone or in addition to pharmacotherapy in patients whose previously wellcontrolled depressive symptoms worsen in the fall or winter. Light therapy also can be used as prophylaxis—starting in early fall—in patients with a history of a seasonal pattern of depression. Either way, light treatments generally should continue until early spring.

Given the relatively few side effects, light therapy may be used as monotherapy in patients with mild, subsyndromal mood symptoms occurring on a seasonal basis. Light therapy should not be used without pharmacotherapy to treat a full-blown major depressive episode.

Light boxes can be found via the Internet at an average cost of $180 to $300 for a 10,000-lux unit. The boxes are small enough to be placed on a table while the patient reads or eats breakfast. Artificial lights for this therapy do not emit ultraviolet rays, which have been associated with skin cancers.

Light visors also have shown some promise in SAD treatment, as demonstrated by a 2-week, randomized, controlled trial by Joffe et al.14 Compared with light boxes, light visors are more portable, so the patient can move around during treatment. Generally, the patient wears the visor 30 minutes in the morning.

Light visors appear to be as effective as table models, although no studies have compared the two devices. A visor costs $250 to $300.

Dawn simulation in SAD treatment has been examined in a few small studies and one placebo-controlled trial with 95 patients.10 In dawn simulation, a white light gradually increases between 4:30 and 6 AM to a peak intensity of 250 lux. Dawn simulation can be done while the patient is sleeping, whereas other light treatments require the patient to wake up early enough each morning to sit before a light box for 30 minutes. More study is needed to assess this modality’s efficacy.

Light therapy precautions. Review the patient’s medications before starting light therapy. Drugs that can magnify the effects of short wave-length light—leading to severe sunburns or rashes—include tetracycline, sulfonamides, and some older antipsychotics such as chlorpromazine. Some authors recommend an ophthalmologic examination before starting light therapy and every 2 to 3 years afterwards if no complications are apparent.1 Others believe that no ophthalmologic examination is necessary unless the patient is older than 70 or has a history of retinal disease.

Side effects of bright light therapy are usually few and mild and include headaches, eye irritation, and nausea. In some anecdotal cases, patients with bipolar disorder appear to have switched from depression to mania upon starting light therapy,1 but such switches appear to be rare. Still, patients with bipolar disorder and their family members should be advised to watch out for switches when using light therapy.

Pharmacologic therapy

Drug therapy in SAD has not been well studied, and many of the placebo-controlled trials that have examined this mode of treatment have been small. Serotonergic agents have been most studied because serotonin, with its effects on sleep and appetite, is thought to be related to SAD pathogenesis. The largest study of a selective serotonin reuptake inhibitor for SAD15 compared sertraline with placebo. Patients who received sertraline at a mean dosage of 111 mg/d had significantly fewer depressive symptoms than did the placebo group.

A placebo-controlled, double-blind study by Thorell16 found that adding citalopram to light therapy improved measures of depressed mood, compared with light therapy alone. This study is limited by small sample size but provides direction for further research.

An open trial of reboxetine—a noradrenaline reuptake inhibitor not available in the United States—suggests that further research of agents affecting catecholamines may be worthwhile in SAD treatment.17

Psychotherapy

Psychotherapy has not been researched sufficiently to be considered a proven treatment for SAD. However, some have observed that SAD patients have a negative cognitive style that may benefit from cognitive therapy. Thus, behavioral therapy may alter a patient’s response to light.1

Related resources

Drug brand names

  • Citalopram • Celexa
  • Sertraline • Zoloft

Disclosure

Dr. Paradies reports no financial relationship with any company whose products are mentioned in this article, or with manufacturers of competing products.

Dr. Hillard reports that he is a consultant to Pfizer Inc. and Janssen Pharmaceutica, and serves on the speakers bureau of Pfizer Inc., Janssen Pharmaceutica, and Eli Lilly and Co.

References

1. Partonen T, Magnusson A. Seasonal affective disorder New York: Oxford University Press, 2001;3-134.

2. Lewy AJ, Kern HA, Rosenthal NE, Wehr TA. Bright artificial light treatment of a manic-depressive patient with a seasonal mood cycle. Am J Psychiatry 1982;139(11):1496-8.

3. Rosenthal NE, Sack DA, Gillin JC, et al. Seasonal affective disorder: A description of the syndrome and preliminary findings with light therapy. Arch Gen Psychiatry 1984;41(1):72-80.

4. Rosenthal NE, Jacobsen FM, Sack DA, et al. Atenolol in seasonal affective disorder: a test of the melatonin hypothesis. Am J Psychiatry 1988;145:52-6.

5. Anderson JL, Rosen LN, Mendelson WB, et al. Sleep in fall/winter seasonal affective disorder: effects of light and changing seasons. J Psychosom Res 1994;38:323-37.

6. Reichborn-Kjennerud T, Lingjaerde O, Dahl AA. Personality disorders in patients with winter depression. Acta Psychiatrica Scand 1994;90:413-19.

7. Mersch PPA, Middendorp HM, Bouhuys AL, Beersma DGM, van den Hoofdakker RH. Seasonal affective disorder and latitude: a review of the literature. J Affect Disord 1999;53:35-48.

8. Wehr TA, Duncan WC, Sher L, et al. A circadian signal of change in patients with seasonal affective disorder. Arch Gen Psychiatry 2001;58:1108-14.

9. Lewy AJ, Sack RL, Singer CM, White DM, Hoban TM. Winter depression and the phase-shift hypothesis for bright light’s therapeutic effects: history, theory, and experimental evidence. J Biolog Rhythms 1988;3:121-34.

10. Avery DH, Kizer D, Bolte MA, Hellekson C. Bright light therapy of subsyndromal seasonal affective disorder in the workplace: morning vs. afternoon exposure. Acta Psychiatrica Scand 2000;103:267-74.

11. Sancar A. Cryptochrome: the second photoactive pigment in the eye and its role in circadian photoreception. Ann Rev Biochemistry 2000;69:31-67.

12. Meesters Y, Jansen JHC, Beersma DGM, Bouhuys AL, van den Hoofdakker RH. Light therapy for seasonal affective disorder: the effects of timing. Br J Psychiatry 1995;166:607-12.

13. Terman M. Internal night. Arch Gen Psychiatry 2001;58:1115-6.

14. Joffe RT, Moul DE, Lam RW, et al. Light visor treatment for seasonal affective disorder: a multicenter study. Psychiatry Res 1993;46(1):29-39.

15. Blashko CA, Moscovitch A, Eagles JM, Darcourt G, Thompson C, Kasper S. A placebo-controlled study of sertraline in the treatment of outpatients with seasonal affective disorder (unpublished data on file with Pfizer Inc.)

16. Thorell LH, Kjellman B, Arned M, Lindwall-Sundel K, Walinder J, Wetterberg L. Light treatment of seasonal affective disorder in combination with citalopram or placebo with 1-year follow-up. Int Clin Psychopharmacol 1999;14(suppl 2):S7-S11.

17. Hilger E. Reboxetine in seasonal affective disorder: an open trial. Eur Neuropsychopharmacology 2001;11(1):1-5.

Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

Karen Paradies, MD
Resident physician

James Randolph Hillard, MD
Professor and chairman

Department of psychiatry University of Cincinnati College of Medicine

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 01(12)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
13-17
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

Karen Paradies, MD
Resident physician

James Randolph Hillard, MD
Professor and chairman

Department of psychiatry University of Cincinnati College of Medicine

Author and Disclosure Information

Karen Paradies, MD
Resident physician

James Randolph Hillard, MD
Professor and chairman

Department of psychiatry University of Cincinnati College of Medicine

Article PDF
Article PDF

All of us see patients whose recurrent depressions seem to have a seasonal component. Should we treat them differently than patients whose recurrent depressions are not related to seasons? Is there adequate evidence for the existence of seasonal affective disorder (SAD), or—as it is called in DSM-IV-TR—mood disorder with a seasonal pattern? Is bright light therapy supported by the literature, or is it just some sort of fad?

As December brings the shortest days of the year, we shine the spotlight on SAD and examine the latest evidence on its causes, diagnosis, and treatment.

Moods with a seasonal rhythm

Moods have been observed to change with the seasons since ancient times (Box 1).1 As recently as 25 years ago, however, seasonal affective disorder was not recognized as a psychiatric diagnosis.

In the early 1980s, when researchers at the National Institute of Mental Health (NIMH) were studying the effect of bright light on melatonin secretion, they were contacted by Herbert E. Kern, a research engineer who suffered from recurrent depression. A methodical person, Kern had kept a journal of his mood variations and noticed a pattern that appeared to follow the seasons. His depression worsened in the fall and winter and improved in the spring and summer. Kern subsequently participated in an NIMH trial with phototherapy, his mood improved, and the results were published in 1982.2

Box 1

‘LAPP SICKNESS’ AND THE EFFECT OF LIGHT ON MOOD

Hippocrates, with his knack for keen observation, observed the variation of moods with the seasons. Aretaeus went a step further in the 2nd century by proposing that “lethargics are to be laid in the light and exposed to the rays of the sun.”

More recently, the physicist Angstrom—for whom the unit of light wavelength is named—was one of the first to mention the Swedish word “Lappsjuka,” which means “Lapp sickness” (Lapp refers to Scandinavian aborigines). He wrote, “Many people are sensitive to the lack of light, while others are less so. The former will in arctic winters suffer from Lappsjuka.”1

Two years later, the researchers published the first paper that described SAD as a psychiatric diagnosis.3 Criteria for the diagnosis included:

  • presence of a major affective disorder
  • affective episodes occurring during fall or winter and remitting in spring or summer for at least 2 consecutive years.

The paper also discussed treatment of winter depression with phototherapy.

DSM-IV-TR describes SAD as a course specifier for mood disorders, including major depressive episodes in bipolar I and II disorders and major depressive disorder (Box 2). In other words, as used in DSM-IV-TR and this article, SAD is not an independent disorder but a type of major affective disorder.

Characteristics of SAD

Symptoms. Patients with SAD suffer the typical symptoms of depression—decreased energy, guilt, and decreased libido—as well as atypical symptoms—carbohydrate craving, hypersomnia, and weight gain. They also appear less likely to exhibit psychotic symptoms and may be at lower risk for suicide than persons with major mood disorders but without SAD.1

Changes in sleep patterns also have been observed. Rosenthal et al4 found increased sleep latency and increased total sleep time in patients with SAD. Delta or slow-wave sleep—the restorative part of the sleep cycle—decreased by nearly one-half (mean 46%). REM latency did not change, contrary to typical findings in depressed patients. Anderson et al5 also reported no change in REM latency in patients with SAD.

Comorbid conditions. Eating disorders—particularly bulimia nervosa—are more prevalent in patients with SAD.1 Binge eating tends to worsen in the fall and winter.

Personality disorders are also common in these patients, with cluster C over-represented. Avoidant personality disorder is most common. In a sample of 45 patients with SAD, Reichborn-Kjennerud et al6 found any personality disorder in 58% and avoidant personality disorder in 31%. Patients with comorbid personality disorders were less likely to respond to bright light therapy.

Prevalence. The prevalence of SAD in North America is approximately 1 to 6 %, with four times as many women affected as men.1 Data on the effect of latitude on prevalence of SAD are inconclusive.7

Making the diagnosis

For patients with depression, clinicians should ask about seasonality of symptoms. Onset of major depressive symptoms in the fall or winter for at least two consecutive years or remission of depressive symptoms in the spring for two consecutive years (without onset of depressive syndromes during the spring or summer) probably merits a diagnosis of SAD. The diagnosis is confirmed if seasonal patterns of depressive symptoms substantially outnumber nonseasonal occurrences over the patient’s lifetime. The diagnosis may not be appropriate if there are obvious seasonal psychosocial stressors, such as anniversary reactions in posttraumatic stress disorder.

 

 

Some patients have sub-syndromal depressive symptoms that occur seasonally. DSM-IV would probably classify them as “mood disorder, not otherwise specified,” and that group has not been studied extensively.

Box 2

DSM-IV-TR: SEASONAL PATTERN SPECIFIER FOR MOOD DISORDER

Specify if:

With seasonal pattern (can be applied to the pattern of major depressive episodes in bipolar I disorder, bipolar II disorder, or major depressive disorder, recurrent)

  1. There has been a regular temporal relationship between the onset of major depressive episodes in bipolar I or bipolar II disorder or major depressive disorder, recurrent, and a particular time of the year (e.g., regular appearance of the major depressive episode in the fall or winter). Note: Do not include cases in which seasonal-related psychosocial stressors (e.g., regularly being unemployed every winter) create an obvious effect.
  2. Full remissions (or a change from depression to mania or hypomania) also occur at a characteristic time of the year (e.g., depression disappears in the spring).
  3. In the past 2 years, two major depressive episodes have occurred that demonstrate the temporal seasonal relationships defined in criteria A and B, and no nonseasonal major depressive episodes have occurred during that same period.
  4. Seasonal major depressive episodes (as described above) substantially outnumber the nonseasonal major depressive episodes that may have occurred over the individual’s lifetime.

Source: DSM-IV-TR

What causes SAD?

Research is ongoing, but the cause of SAD is not yet fully understood, although hypotheses have been developed. The four main hypotheses relate to duration of sunlight, changes in the circadian cycle, and secretion of the “hormone of darkness,” melatonin.

Photoperiod hypothesis. The shortening of the photoperiod—duration of sunlight—during autumn and winter may explain winter depression. Some research suggests that patients with SAD have an exaggerated melatonin response to shorter days and longer nights. For example, Wehr et al8 found that SAD patients secrete melatonin approximately 30 minutes longer per day in the winter, compared with controls.

Phase-delay hypothesis. Core body temperature is considered one of the most reliable markers of circadian rhythm. The nadir core body temperature occurs earlier than normal in a person whose circadian rhythm is “phase-advanced” and later than usual in those with “phase-delayed” circadian rhythms. Patients with seasonal affective symptoms generally reach their lowest body temperature of the day earlier than do controls.

Lewy et al,9 who proposed the phase-delay hypothesis, observed that melatonin secretion appeared to be delayed in patients with SAD. Some studies have supported this hypothesis, demonstrating greater benefit of bright light treatment when administered early in the morning than later in the day. Other studies, however, have shown benefit from light exposure late in the day.10

Reduced-amplitude hypothesis. SAD sufferers have dampened circadian rhythms, and bright light may increase the amplitude of the rhythms. There is little evidence for this hypothesis.

Melatonin hypothesis. Melatonin does not appear to cause depression. Looking at melatonin secretion patterns in conjunction with circadian phases, however, may offer new insights.8 Several studies have shown that manipulating the timing of melatonin secretion affects mood.

Cryptochrome, a photoreceptor in the retina, may be responsible for transmitting the photosignal to the elements of the circadian clock that regulate melatonin secretion. The pineal gland modifies its secretion of melatonin in response to the amount of light exposure (Box 3).8,11

Light therapy

Bright light therapy has been supported by placebo-controlled trials and is first-line treatment for patients with SAD.1 Bright light therapy is usually dosed at 2,500 lux for 2 hr/day or 10,000 lux for 30 min/day at eye level.12 The best evidence supports administering light therapy in the morning, generally between 6 and 10 AM. As described by Terman,13 “larks”—people who go to bed early and get up early—need earlier light than “owls”—people who stay up later and sleep later.

Box 3

HOW SUNLIGHT MAY SET THE CIRCADIAN CLOCK

When light strikes the eye, it is well known that vitamin A-based photo pigments, cones, and rods receive the signal and transmit it via the optic tracts to the occipital cortex. But if light plays a role in the pathophysiology of seasonal affective disorder, how does light signal the other elements of the circadian system?

Cryptochrome, a photoreceptor in the retina, may be responsible for transmitting the photosignal to the circadian clock.11 Cryptochrome is a vitamin B2-based pigment found in the ganglion cells and on cells in the inner nuclear layer of the retina. It is thought to transmit light through the optic nerve to the suprachiasmatic nucleus, the circadian pacemaker in the hypothalamus. The signal is then transmitted through the paraventricular nucleus, down the sympathetic chain, through the superior cervical ganglion, up the nervi canarii, to its final destination—the pineal gland.8 The pineal gland then modifies its secretion of melatonin in response to the amount of light exposure.

Although mammals have an intrinsic rhythmicity, the circadian clock must be entrained by exogenous light. The retinohypothalamic tract is believed to be the vehicle that sets the circadian clock. If the optic nerve is cut, a person becomes blind and unable to entrain the circadian rhythm.

 

 

Light therapy can be used alone or in addition to pharmacotherapy in patients whose previously wellcontrolled depressive symptoms worsen in the fall or winter. Light therapy also can be used as prophylaxis—starting in early fall—in patients with a history of a seasonal pattern of depression. Either way, light treatments generally should continue until early spring.

Given the relatively few side effects, light therapy may be used as monotherapy in patients with mild, subsyndromal mood symptoms occurring on a seasonal basis. Light therapy should not be used without pharmacotherapy to treat a full-blown major depressive episode.

Light boxes can be found via the Internet at an average cost of $180 to $300 for a 10,000-lux unit. The boxes are small enough to be placed on a table while the patient reads or eats breakfast. Artificial lights for this therapy do not emit ultraviolet rays, which have been associated with skin cancers.

Light visors also have shown some promise in SAD treatment, as demonstrated by a 2-week, randomized, controlled trial by Joffe et al.14 Compared with light boxes, light visors are more portable, so the patient can move around during treatment. Generally, the patient wears the visor 30 minutes in the morning.

Light visors appear to be as effective as table models, although no studies have compared the two devices. A visor costs $250 to $300.

Dawn simulation in SAD treatment has been examined in a few small studies and one placebo-controlled trial with 95 patients.10 In dawn simulation, a white light gradually increases between 4:30 and 6 AM to a peak intensity of 250 lux. Dawn simulation can be done while the patient is sleeping, whereas other light treatments require the patient to wake up early enough each morning to sit before a light box for 30 minutes. More study is needed to assess this modality’s efficacy.

Light therapy precautions. Review the patient’s medications before starting light therapy. Drugs that can magnify the effects of short wave-length light—leading to severe sunburns or rashes—include tetracycline, sulfonamides, and some older antipsychotics such as chlorpromazine. Some authors recommend an ophthalmologic examination before starting light therapy and every 2 to 3 years afterwards if no complications are apparent.1 Others believe that no ophthalmologic examination is necessary unless the patient is older than 70 or has a history of retinal disease.

Side effects of bright light therapy are usually few and mild and include headaches, eye irritation, and nausea. In some anecdotal cases, patients with bipolar disorder appear to have switched from depression to mania upon starting light therapy,1 but such switches appear to be rare. Still, patients with bipolar disorder and their family members should be advised to watch out for switches when using light therapy.

Pharmacologic therapy

Drug therapy in SAD has not been well studied, and many of the placebo-controlled trials that have examined this mode of treatment have been small. Serotonergic agents have been most studied because serotonin, with its effects on sleep and appetite, is thought to be related to SAD pathogenesis. The largest study of a selective serotonin reuptake inhibitor for SAD15 compared sertraline with placebo. Patients who received sertraline at a mean dosage of 111 mg/d had significantly fewer depressive symptoms than did the placebo group.

A placebo-controlled, double-blind study by Thorell16 found that adding citalopram to light therapy improved measures of depressed mood, compared with light therapy alone. This study is limited by small sample size but provides direction for further research.

An open trial of reboxetine—a noradrenaline reuptake inhibitor not available in the United States—suggests that further research of agents affecting catecholamines may be worthwhile in SAD treatment.17

Psychotherapy

Psychotherapy has not been researched sufficiently to be considered a proven treatment for SAD. However, some have observed that SAD patients have a negative cognitive style that may benefit from cognitive therapy. Thus, behavioral therapy may alter a patient’s response to light.1

Related resources

Drug brand names

  • Citalopram • Celexa
  • Sertraline • Zoloft

Disclosure

Dr. Paradies reports no financial relationship with any company whose products are mentioned in this article, or with manufacturers of competing products.

Dr. Hillard reports that he is a consultant to Pfizer Inc. and Janssen Pharmaceutica, and serves on the speakers bureau of Pfizer Inc., Janssen Pharmaceutica, and Eli Lilly and Co.

All of us see patients whose recurrent depressions seem to have a seasonal component. Should we treat them differently than patients whose recurrent depressions are not related to seasons? Is there adequate evidence for the existence of seasonal affective disorder (SAD), or—as it is called in DSM-IV-TR—mood disorder with a seasonal pattern? Is bright light therapy supported by the literature, or is it just some sort of fad?

As December brings the shortest days of the year, we shine the spotlight on SAD and examine the latest evidence on its causes, diagnosis, and treatment.

Moods with a seasonal rhythm

Moods have been observed to change with the seasons since ancient times (Box 1).1 As recently as 25 years ago, however, seasonal affective disorder was not recognized as a psychiatric diagnosis.

In the early 1980s, when researchers at the National Institute of Mental Health (NIMH) were studying the effect of bright light on melatonin secretion, they were contacted by Herbert E. Kern, a research engineer who suffered from recurrent depression. A methodical person, Kern had kept a journal of his mood variations and noticed a pattern that appeared to follow the seasons. His depression worsened in the fall and winter and improved in the spring and summer. Kern subsequently participated in an NIMH trial with phototherapy, his mood improved, and the results were published in 1982.2

Box 1

‘LAPP SICKNESS’ AND THE EFFECT OF LIGHT ON MOOD

Hippocrates, with his knack for keen observation, observed the variation of moods with the seasons. Aretaeus went a step further in the 2nd century by proposing that “lethargics are to be laid in the light and exposed to the rays of the sun.”

More recently, the physicist Angstrom—for whom the unit of light wavelength is named—was one of the first to mention the Swedish word “Lappsjuka,” which means “Lapp sickness” (Lapp refers to Scandinavian aborigines). He wrote, “Many people are sensitive to the lack of light, while others are less so. The former will in arctic winters suffer from Lappsjuka.”1

Two years later, the researchers published the first paper that described SAD as a psychiatric diagnosis.3 Criteria for the diagnosis included:

  • presence of a major affective disorder
  • affective episodes occurring during fall or winter and remitting in spring or summer for at least 2 consecutive years.

The paper also discussed treatment of winter depression with phototherapy.

DSM-IV-TR describes SAD as a course specifier for mood disorders, including major depressive episodes in bipolar I and II disorders and major depressive disorder (Box 2). In other words, as used in DSM-IV-TR and this article, SAD is not an independent disorder but a type of major affective disorder.

Characteristics of SAD

Symptoms. Patients with SAD suffer the typical symptoms of depression—decreased energy, guilt, and decreased libido—as well as atypical symptoms—carbohydrate craving, hypersomnia, and weight gain. They also appear less likely to exhibit psychotic symptoms and may be at lower risk for suicide than persons with major mood disorders but without SAD.1

Changes in sleep patterns also have been observed. Rosenthal et al4 found increased sleep latency and increased total sleep time in patients with SAD. Delta or slow-wave sleep—the restorative part of the sleep cycle—decreased by nearly one-half (mean 46%). REM latency did not change, contrary to typical findings in depressed patients. Anderson et al5 also reported no change in REM latency in patients with SAD.

Comorbid conditions. Eating disorders—particularly bulimia nervosa—are more prevalent in patients with SAD.1 Binge eating tends to worsen in the fall and winter.

Personality disorders are also common in these patients, with cluster C over-represented. Avoidant personality disorder is most common. In a sample of 45 patients with SAD, Reichborn-Kjennerud et al6 found any personality disorder in 58% and avoidant personality disorder in 31%. Patients with comorbid personality disorders were less likely to respond to bright light therapy.

Prevalence. The prevalence of SAD in North America is approximately 1 to 6 %, with four times as many women affected as men.1 Data on the effect of latitude on prevalence of SAD are inconclusive.7

Making the diagnosis

For patients with depression, clinicians should ask about seasonality of symptoms. Onset of major depressive symptoms in the fall or winter for at least two consecutive years or remission of depressive symptoms in the spring for two consecutive years (without onset of depressive syndromes during the spring or summer) probably merits a diagnosis of SAD. The diagnosis is confirmed if seasonal patterns of depressive symptoms substantially outnumber nonseasonal occurrences over the patient’s lifetime. The diagnosis may not be appropriate if there are obvious seasonal psychosocial stressors, such as anniversary reactions in posttraumatic stress disorder.

 

 

Some patients have sub-syndromal depressive symptoms that occur seasonally. DSM-IV would probably classify them as “mood disorder, not otherwise specified,” and that group has not been studied extensively.

Box 2

DSM-IV-TR: SEASONAL PATTERN SPECIFIER FOR MOOD DISORDER

Specify if:

With seasonal pattern (can be applied to the pattern of major depressive episodes in bipolar I disorder, bipolar II disorder, or major depressive disorder, recurrent)

  1. There has been a regular temporal relationship between the onset of major depressive episodes in bipolar I or bipolar II disorder or major depressive disorder, recurrent, and a particular time of the year (e.g., regular appearance of the major depressive episode in the fall or winter). Note: Do not include cases in which seasonal-related psychosocial stressors (e.g., regularly being unemployed every winter) create an obvious effect.
  2. Full remissions (or a change from depression to mania or hypomania) also occur at a characteristic time of the year (e.g., depression disappears in the spring).
  3. In the past 2 years, two major depressive episodes have occurred that demonstrate the temporal seasonal relationships defined in criteria A and B, and no nonseasonal major depressive episodes have occurred during that same period.
  4. Seasonal major depressive episodes (as described above) substantially outnumber the nonseasonal major depressive episodes that may have occurred over the individual’s lifetime.

Source: DSM-IV-TR

What causes SAD?

Research is ongoing, but the cause of SAD is not yet fully understood, although hypotheses have been developed. The four main hypotheses relate to duration of sunlight, changes in the circadian cycle, and secretion of the “hormone of darkness,” melatonin.

Photoperiod hypothesis. The shortening of the photoperiod—duration of sunlight—during autumn and winter may explain winter depression. Some research suggests that patients with SAD have an exaggerated melatonin response to shorter days and longer nights. For example, Wehr et al8 found that SAD patients secrete melatonin approximately 30 minutes longer per day in the winter, compared with controls.

Phase-delay hypothesis. Core body temperature is considered one of the most reliable markers of circadian rhythm. The nadir core body temperature occurs earlier than normal in a person whose circadian rhythm is “phase-advanced” and later than usual in those with “phase-delayed” circadian rhythms. Patients with seasonal affective symptoms generally reach their lowest body temperature of the day earlier than do controls.

Lewy et al,9 who proposed the phase-delay hypothesis, observed that melatonin secretion appeared to be delayed in patients with SAD. Some studies have supported this hypothesis, demonstrating greater benefit of bright light treatment when administered early in the morning than later in the day. Other studies, however, have shown benefit from light exposure late in the day.10

Reduced-amplitude hypothesis. SAD sufferers have dampened circadian rhythms, and bright light may increase the amplitude of the rhythms. There is little evidence for this hypothesis.

Melatonin hypothesis. Melatonin does not appear to cause depression. Looking at melatonin secretion patterns in conjunction with circadian phases, however, may offer new insights.8 Several studies have shown that manipulating the timing of melatonin secretion affects mood.

Cryptochrome, a photoreceptor in the retina, may be responsible for transmitting the photosignal to the elements of the circadian clock that regulate melatonin secretion. The pineal gland modifies its secretion of melatonin in response to the amount of light exposure (Box 3).8,11

Light therapy

Bright light therapy has been supported by placebo-controlled trials and is first-line treatment for patients with SAD.1 Bright light therapy is usually dosed at 2,500 lux for 2 hr/day or 10,000 lux for 30 min/day at eye level.12 The best evidence supports administering light therapy in the morning, generally between 6 and 10 AM. As described by Terman,13 “larks”—people who go to bed early and get up early—need earlier light than “owls”—people who stay up later and sleep later.

Box 3

HOW SUNLIGHT MAY SET THE CIRCADIAN CLOCK

When light strikes the eye, it is well known that vitamin A-based photo pigments, cones, and rods receive the signal and transmit it via the optic tracts to the occipital cortex. But if light plays a role in the pathophysiology of seasonal affective disorder, how does light signal the other elements of the circadian system?

Cryptochrome, a photoreceptor in the retina, may be responsible for transmitting the photosignal to the circadian clock.11 Cryptochrome is a vitamin B2-based pigment found in the ganglion cells and on cells in the inner nuclear layer of the retina. It is thought to transmit light through the optic nerve to the suprachiasmatic nucleus, the circadian pacemaker in the hypothalamus. The signal is then transmitted through the paraventricular nucleus, down the sympathetic chain, through the superior cervical ganglion, up the nervi canarii, to its final destination—the pineal gland.8 The pineal gland then modifies its secretion of melatonin in response to the amount of light exposure.

Although mammals have an intrinsic rhythmicity, the circadian clock must be entrained by exogenous light. The retinohypothalamic tract is believed to be the vehicle that sets the circadian clock. If the optic nerve is cut, a person becomes blind and unable to entrain the circadian rhythm.

 

 

Light therapy can be used alone or in addition to pharmacotherapy in patients whose previously wellcontrolled depressive symptoms worsen in the fall or winter. Light therapy also can be used as prophylaxis—starting in early fall—in patients with a history of a seasonal pattern of depression. Either way, light treatments generally should continue until early spring.

Given the relatively few side effects, light therapy may be used as monotherapy in patients with mild, subsyndromal mood symptoms occurring on a seasonal basis. Light therapy should not be used without pharmacotherapy to treat a full-blown major depressive episode.

Light boxes can be found via the Internet at an average cost of $180 to $300 for a 10,000-lux unit. The boxes are small enough to be placed on a table while the patient reads or eats breakfast. Artificial lights for this therapy do not emit ultraviolet rays, which have been associated with skin cancers.

Light visors also have shown some promise in SAD treatment, as demonstrated by a 2-week, randomized, controlled trial by Joffe et al.14 Compared with light boxes, light visors are more portable, so the patient can move around during treatment. Generally, the patient wears the visor 30 minutes in the morning.

Light visors appear to be as effective as table models, although no studies have compared the two devices. A visor costs $250 to $300.

Dawn simulation in SAD treatment has been examined in a few small studies and one placebo-controlled trial with 95 patients.10 In dawn simulation, a white light gradually increases between 4:30 and 6 AM to a peak intensity of 250 lux. Dawn simulation can be done while the patient is sleeping, whereas other light treatments require the patient to wake up early enough each morning to sit before a light box for 30 minutes. More study is needed to assess this modality’s efficacy.

Light therapy precautions. Review the patient’s medications before starting light therapy. Drugs that can magnify the effects of short wave-length light—leading to severe sunburns or rashes—include tetracycline, sulfonamides, and some older antipsychotics such as chlorpromazine. Some authors recommend an ophthalmologic examination before starting light therapy and every 2 to 3 years afterwards if no complications are apparent.1 Others believe that no ophthalmologic examination is necessary unless the patient is older than 70 or has a history of retinal disease.

Side effects of bright light therapy are usually few and mild and include headaches, eye irritation, and nausea. In some anecdotal cases, patients with bipolar disorder appear to have switched from depression to mania upon starting light therapy,1 but such switches appear to be rare. Still, patients with bipolar disorder and their family members should be advised to watch out for switches when using light therapy.

Pharmacologic therapy

Drug therapy in SAD has not been well studied, and many of the placebo-controlled trials that have examined this mode of treatment have been small. Serotonergic agents have been most studied because serotonin, with its effects on sleep and appetite, is thought to be related to SAD pathogenesis. The largest study of a selective serotonin reuptake inhibitor for SAD15 compared sertraline with placebo. Patients who received sertraline at a mean dosage of 111 mg/d had significantly fewer depressive symptoms than did the placebo group.

A placebo-controlled, double-blind study by Thorell16 found that adding citalopram to light therapy improved measures of depressed mood, compared with light therapy alone. This study is limited by small sample size but provides direction for further research.

An open trial of reboxetine—a noradrenaline reuptake inhibitor not available in the United States—suggests that further research of agents affecting catecholamines may be worthwhile in SAD treatment.17

Psychotherapy

Psychotherapy has not been researched sufficiently to be considered a proven treatment for SAD. However, some have observed that SAD patients have a negative cognitive style that may benefit from cognitive therapy. Thus, behavioral therapy may alter a patient’s response to light.1

Related resources

Drug brand names

  • Citalopram • Celexa
  • Sertraline • Zoloft

Disclosure

Dr. Paradies reports no financial relationship with any company whose products are mentioned in this article, or with manufacturers of competing products.

Dr. Hillard reports that he is a consultant to Pfizer Inc. and Janssen Pharmaceutica, and serves on the speakers bureau of Pfizer Inc., Janssen Pharmaceutica, and Eli Lilly and Co.

References

1. Partonen T, Magnusson A. Seasonal affective disorder New York: Oxford University Press, 2001;3-134.

2. Lewy AJ, Kern HA, Rosenthal NE, Wehr TA. Bright artificial light treatment of a manic-depressive patient with a seasonal mood cycle. Am J Psychiatry 1982;139(11):1496-8.

3. Rosenthal NE, Sack DA, Gillin JC, et al. Seasonal affective disorder: A description of the syndrome and preliminary findings with light therapy. Arch Gen Psychiatry 1984;41(1):72-80.

4. Rosenthal NE, Jacobsen FM, Sack DA, et al. Atenolol in seasonal affective disorder: a test of the melatonin hypothesis. Am J Psychiatry 1988;145:52-6.

5. Anderson JL, Rosen LN, Mendelson WB, et al. Sleep in fall/winter seasonal affective disorder: effects of light and changing seasons. J Psychosom Res 1994;38:323-37.

6. Reichborn-Kjennerud T, Lingjaerde O, Dahl AA. Personality disorders in patients with winter depression. Acta Psychiatrica Scand 1994;90:413-19.

7. Mersch PPA, Middendorp HM, Bouhuys AL, Beersma DGM, van den Hoofdakker RH. Seasonal affective disorder and latitude: a review of the literature. J Affect Disord 1999;53:35-48.

8. Wehr TA, Duncan WC, Sher L, et al. A circadian signal of change in patients with seasonal affective disorder. Arch Gen Psychiatry 2001;58:1108-14.

9. Lewy AJ, Sack RL, Singer CM, White DM, Hoban TM. Winter depression and the phase-shift hypothesis for bright light’s therapeutic effects: history, theory, and experimental evidence. J Biolog Rhythms 1988;3:121-34.

10. Avery DH, Kizer D, Bolte MA, Hellekson C. Bright light therapy of subsyndromal seasonal affective disorder in the workplace: morning vs. afternoon exposure. Acta Psychiatrica Scand 2000;103:267-74.

11. Sancar A. Cryptochrome: the second photoactive pigment in the eye and its role in circadian photoreception. Ann Rev Biochemistry 2000;69:31-67.

12. Meesters Y, Jansen JHC, Beersma DGM, Bouhuys AL, van den Hoofdakker RH. Light therapy for seasonal affective disorder: the effects of timing. Br J Psychiatry 1995;166:607-12.

13. Terman M. Internal night. Arch Gen Psychiatry 2001;58:1115-6.

14. Joffe RT, Moul DE, Lam RW, et al. Light visor treatment for seasonal affective disorder: a multicenter study. Psychiatry Res 1993;46(1):29-39.

15. Blashko CA, Moscovitch A, Eagles JM, Darcourt G, Thompson C, Kasper S. A placebo-controlled study of sertraline in the treatment of outpatients with seasonal affective disorder (unpublished data on file with Pfizer Inc.)

16. Thorell LH, Kjellman B, Arned M, Lindwall-Sundel K, Walinder J, Wetterberg L. Light treatment of seasonal affective disorder in combination with citalopram or placebo with 1-year follow-up. Int Clin Psychopharmacol 1999;14(suppl 2):S7-S11.

17. Hilger E. Reboxetine in seasonal affective disorder: an open trial. Eur Neuropsychopharmacology 2001;11(1):1-5.

References

1. Partonen T, Magnusson A. Seasonal affective disorder New York: Oxford University Press, 2001;3-134.

2. Lewy AJ, Kern HA, Rosenthal NE, Wehr TA. Bright artificial light treatment of a manic-depressive patient with a seasonal mood cycle. Am J Psychiatry 1982;139(11):1496-8.

3. Rosenthal NE, Sack DA, Gillin JC, et al. Seasonal affective disorder: A description of the syndrome and preliminary findings with light therapy. Arch Gen Psychiatry 1984;41(1):72-80.

4. Rosenthal NE, Jacobsen FM, Sack DA, et al. Atenolol in seasonal affective disorder: a test of the melatonin hypothesis. Am J Psychiatry 1988;145:52-6.

5. Anderson JL, Rosen LN, Mendelson WB, et al. Sleep in fall/winter seasonal affective disorder: effects of light and changing seasons. J Psychosom Res 1994;38:323-37.

6. Reichborn-Kjennerud T, Lingjaerde O, Dahl AA. Personality disorders in patients with winter depression. Acta Psychiatrica Scand 1994;90:413-19.

7. Mersch PPA, Middendorp HM, Bouhuys AL, Beersma DGM, van den Hoofdakker RH. Seasonal affective disorder and latitude: a review of the literature. J Affect Disord 1999;53:35-48.

8. Wehr TA, Duncan WC, Sher L, et al. A circadian signal of change in patients with seasonal affective disorder. Arch Gen Psychiatry 2001;58:1108-14.

9. Lewy AJ, Sack RL, Singer CM, White DM, Hoban TM. Winter depression and the phase-shift hypothesis for bright light’s therapeutic effects: history, theory, and experimental evidence. J Biolog Rhythms 1988;3:121-34.

10. Avery DH, Kizer D, Bolte MA, Hellekson C. Bright light therapy of subsyndromal seasonal affective disorder in the workplace: morning vs. afternoon exposure. Acta Psychiatrica Scand 2000;103:267-74.

11. Sancar A. Cryptochrome: the second photoactive pigment in the eye and its role in circadian photoreception. Ann Rev Biochemistry 2000;69:31-67.

12. Meesters Y, Jansen JHC, Beersma DGM, Bouhuys AL, van den Hoofdakker RH. Light therapy for seasonal affective disorder: the effects of timing. Br J Psychiatry 1995;166:607-12.

13. Terman M. Internal night. Arch Gen Psychiatry 2001;58:1115-6.

14. Joffe RT, Moul DE, Lam RW, et al. Light visor treatment for seasonal affective disorder: a multicenter study. Psychiatry Res 1993;46(1):29-39.

15. Blashko CA, Moscovitch A, Eagles JM, Darcourt G, Thompson C, Kasper S. A placebo-controlled study of sertraline in the treatment of outpatients with seasonal affective disorder (unpublished data on file with Pfizer Inc.)

16. Thorell LH, Kjellman B, Arned M, Lindwall-Sundel K, Walinder J, Wetterberg L. Light treatment of seasonal affective disorder in combination with citalopram or placebo with 1-year follow-up. Int Clin Psychopharmacol 1999;14(suppl 2):S7-S11.

17. Hilger E. Reboxetine in seasonal affective disorder: an open trial. Eur Neuropsychopharmacology 2001;11(1):1-5.

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 01(12)
Issue
Current Psychiatry - 01(12)
Page Number
13-17
Page Number
13-17
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Seasonal affective disorder: How to help patients beat the winter blues
Display Headline
Seasonal affective disorder: How to help patients beat the winter blues
Sections
Article Source

PURLs Copyright

Inside the Article

Article PDF Media